^ ^o/v; 
 
 r' 
 
 NBS G)mmunications 
 Manual for Scientific, 
 Technical, and Public 
 Information 
 
 m 
 
 
 % 
 
 .^^^' °^ oo, 
 
 1« 
 
 
 ^^fAU Of 
 
 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE/National Bureau of Standards 
 
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS'" 
 
 The National Bureau of Standards' was established by an act of Congress on March 3, 1901. 
 The Bureau's overall goal is to strengthen and advance the Nation's science and technology 
 and facilitate their effective application for public benefit. To this end, the Bureau conducts 
 research and provides: (1) a basis for the Nation's physical measurement system, (2) scientific 
 and technological services for industry and government, (3) a technical basis for equity in 
 trade, and (4) technical services to promote public safety. The Bureau's technical work is per- 
 formed by the National Measurement Laboratory, the National Engineering Laboratory, and 
 the Institute for Computer Sciences and Technology. 
 
 THE NATIONAL MEASUREMENT LABORATORY provides the national system ol 
 physical and chemical and materials measurement; coordinates the system with measurement 
 systems of other nations and furnishes essential services leading to accurate and uniform 
 physical and chemical measurement throughout the Nation's scientific community, industry, 
 and commerce; conducts materials research leading to improved methods of measurement, 
 standards, and data on the properties of materials needed by industry, commerce, educational 
 institutions, and Government; provides advisory and research services to other Government 
 agencies; develops, produces, and distributes Standard Reference Materials; and provides 
 calibration services. The Laboratory consists of the following centers: 
 
 Absolute Physical Quantities^ — Radiation Research — Thermodynamics and 
 Molecular Science — Analytical Chemistry — Materials Science. 
 
 THE NATIONAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY provides technology and technical ser- 
 vices to the public and private sectors to address national needs and to solve national 
 problems; conducts research in engineering and applied science in support of these efforts; 
 builds and maintains competence in the necessary disciplines required to carry out this 
 research and technical service; develops engineering data and measurement capabilities; 
 provides engineering measurement traceability services; develops test methods and proposes 
 engineering standards and code changes; develops and proposes new engineering practices; 
 and develops and improves mechanisms to transfer results of its research to the ultimate user. 
 The Laboratory consists of the following centers: 
 
 Applied Mathematics — Electronics and Electrical Engineering^ — Mechanical 
 Engineering and Process Technology^ — Building Technology — Fire Research — 
 Consumer Product Technology — Field Methods. 
 
 THE INSTITUTE FOR COMPUTER SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY conducts 
 research and provides scientific and technical services to aid Federal agencies in the selection, 
 acquisition, application, and use of computer technology to improve effectiveness and 
 economy in Government operations in accordance with Public Law 89-306 (40 U.S.C. 759), 
 relevant Executive Orders, and other directives; carries out this mission by managing the 
 Federal Information Processing Standards Program, developing Federal ADP standards 
 guidelines, and managing Federal participation in ADP voluntary standardization activities; 
 provides scientific and technological advisory services and assistance to Federal agencies; and 
 provides the technical foundation for computer-related policies of the Federal Government. 
 The Institute consists of the following centers: 
 
 Programming Science and Technology — Computer Systems Engineering. 
 
 'Headquarters and Laboratories at Gaithersburg, MD, unless otherwise noted; 
 
 mailing address Washington, DC 20234. 
 
 "Some divisions within the center are located at Boulder, CO 80303. 
 
 *This brief description of NBS and of the NBS technical publication series appear on the inside of the front 
 and back covers of most of the Bureau's published output. 
 
NBS COMMUNICATIONS MANUAL FOR 
 
 SCIENTIFIC, TECHNICAL, AND 
 
 PUBLIC INFORMATION 
 
 Edited by 
 
 Carol W. Solomon and Randall D. Bograd 
 
 Writing Consultants 
 
 and 
 
 W. Reeves Tilley 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 ♦Chapter 15 of the NBS Administrative Manual 
 
 This Manual is based on material prepared by 
 an Ad Hoc Committee consisting of Edward 
 Brady, Robert Parker, Carl Muehlhause, 
 Sam Chappell, Reeves Tilley, Robert Blunt, 
 Paul Campbell, Dick Franzen, Gordon Day, 
 and Ralph Desch. It supersedes the NBS 
 Publications and Reports Manual of June 
 1969 (and subsequent changes), and Chapter 
 15, dated 1968 through 1976, of the NBS 
 Administrative Manual. 
 
 For Official Distribution /November 1980 
 
i 
 
 How this Manual was produced 
 
 This document is a product of advanced publishing technology — electronic type- 
 setting — readily available to the NBS staff for producing high quaUty publications. 
 Also called phototypesetting or photocomposition, this modern production technique 
 was appUed by the Technical Information and Publications Division (TIPD) as 
 follows:* 
 
 • the manuscript was keyboarded (automated) into the NBS computer along 
 with the necessary typesetting codes using the Ed Text editing system — 
 
 • using the NBS-developed typographic program, a magnetic tape was produced 
 that drove, directly, the advance Government Printing Office (GPO) photo- 
 composition equipment to produce high-quality camera-ready copy — 
 
 • following page make-up, GPO published the final document. 
 
 The NBS Visual Arts staff of the Office Management Division provided the artwork 
 for the Manual. The text is set in 10-point Times Roman type with pages "perfect" 
 bound and three-hole punched for ease of inserting subsequent revisions. The cover 
 paper stock is vellum sub 100 weight, the text is offset white sub 120. 
 
 *See sections 3.6 and 3.7 for details of how this technique is utilized for NBS publications. 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
Foreword 
 
 This updated manual sets forth the poHcies and procedures for NBS communications. It is an important 
 document for it fosters and guides the transfer of information, a necessary step if NBS work is to have 
 timely impact. Since communicating is vital, I recommend that you become acquainted with the manual's 
 content. Don't be put off by the length — it is well written and has an excellent index for easy reference. 
 Keep it handy and use it to improve the flow of information to our peers and clientele. 
 
 4^ A-^- 
 
 Ernest Ambler 
 Director 
 
 i 
 % 
 
 111 
 
Preface 
 
 This manual should answer most questions about the policy, procedures, and administrative 
 requirements for communicating the results of NBS work. For answers not found in the manual, in 
 Gaithersburg contact either the Technical Information and Publications Division or the Public Information 
 Division. In Boulder, contact the Program Information Office. 
 
 The manual is designed to serve the needs of diverse groups at NBS: authors, reviewers, 
 administrators, editors, and secretaries. For that reason the manual consists of five self-contained chapters, 
 each of which, with one exception, addresses the needs of primarily one or two groups. Each chapter 
 contains the information pertinent to its subject, including bibliographies and exhibits. 
 
 The five chapters and the groups whose needs they address are: 
 
 Chapter 1 NBS Communications System: Functions and Policies 
 
 (authors, reviewers, administrators, and editors) 
 
 Chapter 2 Writing for Publication 
 
 (authors, reviewers, and editors) 
 
 Chapter 3 Selecting a Publication Medium and Method of Composition 
 
 (authors, reviewers, and administrators) 
 
 Chapter 4 Mechanics of Manuscript Preparation 
 
 (secretaries and the clerical stafO 
 
 Chapter 5 Special Forms of Communication 
 
 (administrators, scientists, and engineers) 
 
 The detailed index at the back of the manual and the extensive table of contents at the start of each 
 chapter should help the reader find answers to specific questions. 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2012 with funding from 
 
 LYRASIS IVIembers and Sloan Foundation 
 
 http://archive.org/details/nbscommunicationOOunit 
 
Contents 
 
 Page 
 
 Foreword iii 
 
 Preface v 
 
 Chapter 1 
 
 NBS Communications System: Functions and Policies 1-1 
 
 1.1 Overview of NBS Communications System 1-3 
 
 1.2 General Policy 1-3 
 
 1.3 Review and Approval Procedures 1-4 
 
 1.4 Legal Considerations 1-7 
 
 1.5 Reports to Sponsors 1-1 1 
 
 1.6 General Inquiries 1-13 
 
 1.7 Media Liaison 1-13 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 1-A. Charter — National Bureau of Standards Editorial Review 1-14 
 
 1-B. Bureau-Wide Advisory Boards for Periodicals 1-15 
 
 1-C. The Path to Publication for Scientific and Technical Papers — Gaithersburg 1-16 
 
 1-D. The Path to Publication for Scientific and Technical Papers — Boulder 1-17 
 
 1-E. Clearance and Processing Forms 1-18 
 
 1-F. Aids to Correspondence (Selected Items) 1-32 
 
 Chapter 2 
 
 Writing for Publication 2-1 
 
 2.1 Importance of Good Writing 2-3 
 
 2.2 Stages of Preparing a Paper 2-3 
 
 2.3 Recognizing Outstanding Writing Achievements 2-4 
 
 2.4 Policy Guidelines of Special Interest to Authors 2-4 
 
 2.5 Readability and Accuracy of Expression 2-5 
 
 2.6 Examples of Good and Poor Writing 2-5 
 
 2.7 Gender Terminology 2-5 
 
 2.8 Title 2-6 
 
 2.9 Byline 2-6 
 
 2.10 Abstract 2-7 
 
 2.11 Keywords 2-7 
 
 2.12 Organization of the Paper 2-8 
 
 2.13 Introduction 2-8 
 
 2.14 Methods 2-8 
 
 2.15 Results 2-9 
 
 2.16 Discussion 2-9 
 
 2.17 Summary 2-9 
 
 vii 
 
2.18 Illustrative Materials 2-9 
 
 2.19 Acknowledgments 2-10 
 
 2.20 References 2-10 
 
 2.21 Text Footnotes 2-11 
 
 2.22 Appendixes 2-1 1 
 
 2.23 Writing for DIMENSIONS/NBS 2-11 
 
 2.24 Writing for the NBS Standard 2-12 
 
 2.25 Writing for the Monthly Highlights 2-12 
 
 2.26 Producing a General Publication 2-12 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 2-A. Checklist for Authors and Reviewers 2-12 
 
 2-B. Sample Scientific Paper 2-14 
 
 2-C. Proofreader's Symbols 2-15 
 
 2-D . NBS Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) 2-17 
 
 2-E. Expression of the Uncertainties of Final Results 2-24 
 
 2-F. Abbreviations and Symbols 2-33 
 
 Bibliographies 
 
 2-A. Aids to Scientific and Technical Writing 2-36 
 
 2-B. Standards for Symbols, units, and Nomenclature 2-37 
 
 2-C. Books on Treatment of Data 2-37 
 
 2-D. Style Manuals 2-38 
 
 Chapter 3 
 
 Selecting a Publication Medium and Method of Composition 3-1 
 
 3.1 Selecting a Publication Medium 3-3 
 
 3.2 Publication Outlets Available to NBS Staff 3-3 
 
 3.3 Bibliographic Subscription Services 3-12 
 
 3.4 Duplicate Publication 3-12 
 
 3.5 Issuance Procedures of Grant/Contract Reports Prepared Under NBS Contract 3-12 
 
 3.6 Selecting a Method of Composition 3-13 
 
 3.7 Typeset Publications 3-13 
 
 3.8 Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy Publications 3-14 
 
 3.9 Cost Comparisons 3-15 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 3-A. Sample Cover, Title Page, and Bibliographic Data Sheet for Grant or 
 
 Contract Reports 3-16 
 
 3-B. Samples of Typeset Copy and Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 3-18 
 
 Chapter 4 
 
 Mechanics of Manuscript Preparation 4-1 
 
 4.1 Preparing Manuscript Copy for Electronic Typesetting Using In-House Capability ^'^ 
 
 4.2 Preparing Manuscript Copy for Typesetting by GPO, by DoC, or Under a GPO Contract ^'^ 
 
 4.3 Preparing Manuscripts for the Journal of Physical and Chemical Reference Data '^'^ 
 
 4.4 Preparing Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy ^~^ 
 
 4.5 Covers for NBS Publications 4-7 
 
 viii 
 
Page 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 4-A. Sample Manuscript Copy for Typesetting 4-10 
 
 4-B. Sample of Single-Column Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 4-12 
 
 4-C. Sample of Two-Column Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 4-14 
 
 4-D. Sample Table of Contents for Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 4-16 
 
 4-E. Reference Style in NBS Publications 4-17 
 
 4-F. Sample Cover and Title Page for NBSIRs 4-20 
 
 4-G. Sample Bibliographic Data Sheet for NBSIRs 4-21 
 
 Chapter 5 
 
 Special Forms of Communication 5-1 
 
 5.1 Conferences 5-3 
 
 5.2 Oral Presentations 5-5 
 
 5.3 Exhibits 5-6 
 
 5.4 Tours 5-7 
 
 5.5 Audiovisual Productions 5-8 
 
 5.6 Historical Information 5-9 
 
 5.7 Community Outreach 5-9 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 5-A. Conference Financing 5-10 
 
 5-B. Copyright Release for Non-Government Authors, Form NBS-1158 5-12 
 
 5-C. Checklist for Proceedings Editor 5-13 
 
 Bibliography 
 
 5-A. Aids to Oral Presentations 5-14 
 
 Index A-l 
 
 IX 
 
1-1 
 
 Chapter 1 
 
 NBS Communications System: 
 Functions and Policies 
 
 Page 
 
 1.1 Overview of NBS Communications System 1-3 
 
 1.2 General Policy 1-3 
 
 1.3 Review and Approval Procedures 1-4 
 
 1.3.1 Types of Review 1-4 
 
 1.3.2 Stages of Review 1-4 
 
 1.3.3 Author Responsibilities 1-4 
 
 1.3.4 Center and Division Responsibilities 1-4 
 
 1.3.5 MOU Responsibilities 1-5 
 
 1.3.6 Editorial Review Boards 1-5 
 
 1.3.7 Readers 1-5 
 
 1.3.8 Sponsors 1-6 
 
 1.3.9 Editorial Review Board Actions ., 1-6 
 
 1.3.10 Special Review Procedures 1-6 
 
 1.3.11 Manuscript FoUowup and Subsequent Changes in Papers for Non-NBS Media... 1-6 
 
 1.3.12 Recognizing Outstanding Writing Achievements 1-7 
 
 1.4 Legal Considerations 1-7 
 
 1.4.1 General Copyright Policy 1-7 
 
 1.4.2 Submissions to Copyrighted Publications 1-8 
 
 1.4.3 Manuscripts or Reports Prepared for NBS Under Contracts or Grants 1-8 
 
 1.4.4 Using Excerpts from Copyrighted Materials 1-8 
 
 1.4.5 Nonofficial Writing That May Be Copyrighted 1-8 
 
 1.4.6 Contributing Chapters to Technical Books 1-9 
 
 1.4.7 Writing Separate Volumes or Books 1-9 
 
 1.4.8 Honorariums and Royalties 1-9 
 
 1.4.9 Use of NBS Name in Advertising 1-9 
 
 1.4.10 Page Charges and Reprints 1-10 
 
 1.4.11 Avoiding the Use of Trade Names 1-10 
 
 1.4.12 When Trade Names May Be Allowed 1-10 
 
 1.5 Reports to Sponsors 1-1 1 
 
 1.5.1 Quality Control 1-1 1 
 
 1.5.2 Negotiations with Sponsors 1-11 
 
 1.5.3 Types of Reports to Other Agencies 1-1 1 
 
 1.5.4 Restrictive or Superseding Notices 1-12 
 
 1.6 General Inquiries 1-13 
 
 1.6.1 Responsibilities of Staff Members 1-13 
 
 1.6.2 Letter Circulars 1-13 
 
 1.6.3 Lists of Publications 1-13 
 
 1.7 Media Liaison 1-13 
 
 Exhibit 1 -A. Charter — National Bureau of Standards Editorial Review 1-14 
 
 Exhibit 1-B. Bureau-Wide Advisory Boards for Periodicals 1-15 
 
 Exhibit 1-C. The Path to Publication for Scientific and Technical Papers — Gaithersburg 1-16 
 
 Exhibit 1-D. The Path to Publication for Scientific and Technical Papers— Boulder 1-17 
 
 Chapter 1 — Contents 
 
1-2 
 
 Page 
 
 Exhibit 1-E. Clearance and Processing Forms 
 
 (a) Manuscript Review and Approval, Form NBS-114 1-18 
 
 (b) Bibliographic Data Sheet, Form NBS-1 14A 1-20 
 
 (c) Manuscript Evaluation, Gaithersburg Only, Form NBS-214 1-21 
 
 (d) Boulder Editorial Review Form, Form BL-7A 1-22 
 
 (e) Publications Followup Office Record, Form NBS-265 1-26 
 
 (0 Notice of Publication in Non-NBS Media, Form NBS-266 1-27 
 
 (g) PID Clearance, Form NBS-50 1-28 
 
 (h) Notice of Talk, Form NBS-1 18 1-30 
 
 Exhibit 1-F. Aids to Correspondence (Selected Items) 1-32 
 
 Chapter 1 — Contents (cont.) 
 
1-3 
 
 Chapter 1 
 
 NBS Communications System: 
 Functions and Policies 
 
 This chapter is a reference for authors, reviewers, 
 administrators, and editors, who are seeking 
 answers to poHcy questions or deciding whom to 
 consult for assistance. 
 
 1.1 Overview of NBS Communications 
 System 
 
 Communicating the results of NBS research is an 
 important part of the Bureau's mission. To transmit 
 results of activities and accomplishments to 
 individuals and groups inside and outside the 
 Bureau, NBS produces 2 technical periodicals, 1 
 public information periodical, 10 nonperiodical 
 series, and interagency and grant/contract reports 
 (see ch. 3). Also, Bureau authors publish articles in 
 professional and technical journals, contribute to 
 non-NBS books, make oral presentations at various 
 meetings, and use other special forms of communica- 
 tion as described in chapter 5. In addition, the 
 Bureau answers numerous general inquiries, releases 
 information to specialized and public media, and 
 sponsors conferences, workshops and symposia. 
 
 In Gaithersburg, two divisions are responsible for 
 assisting the staff to communicate effectively: Tech- 
 nical Information and Publications Division (TIPD) 
 and Public Information Division (PID). Basically, 
 TIPD manages the technical publications and tech- 
 nical inquiries while PID manages special 
 programs, general publications, internal publica- 
 tions, contacts with the media, and audiovisual 
 productions. 
 
 In Boulder, the Program Information Office 
 (PIO) is responsible for all these functions. 
 
 To assist the staff to maintain the highest possible 
 quality of content and style in NBS-authored 
 articles and books, the Director has established 
 three Editorial Review Boards. They are the 
 Washington Editorial Review Board (WERB), the 
 Boulder Editorial Review Board (BERB), and the 
 Joint Institute of Laboratory Astrophysics Editorial 
 Review Board (JERB) (see exh. 1-A). 
 
 The Director has also established advisory boards 
 for the NBS periodicals (see exh. 1-B). 
 
 1.2 General Policy 
 
 NBS has and must maintain an outstanding reputa- 
 tion among scientific and technical laboratories for 
 doing good work and for communicating its results 
 effectively. It is the policy of the Director to hold 
 the heads of the major operating units (MOUs) 
 responsible for the quality of the work done in their 
 organizations. Much of the management process of 
 NBS is devoted to ensuring that NBS selects high 
 priority projects and carries them out at the highest 
 level of technical competence. 
 
 The staff must report the results of projects 
 promptly and effectively. Reports are normally 
 reviewed critically several times before they are 
 released to potential users of the information. Poor 
 work cannot be converted to good work by 
 effective presentation, but good work can achieve 
 greater impact and usefulness through quality pre- 
 sentation. 
 
 NBS must communicate its accomplishments 
 broadly as well as accurately. Special staff 
 resources help the NBS staff to communicate 
 through various media to the public-at-large. The 
 specific responsibilities and functions of the staff are 
 pointed out in this manual. However, the scientific 
 and technical staff also must keep in mind the need 
 to tailor the style and content of their communica- 
 tions to their intended audiences. People of 
 different interests and different levels of technical 
 background are often served by the same informa- 
 tion. The essential content of a technical paper 
 written for a highly technical audience usually must 
 be presented in a quite different way for the general 
 public or for regulators and legislators. 
 
 The Bureau cannot escape responsibility for 
 the statements and publications of any indivi- 
 dual staff member; both in an individual and 
 collective sense, each person's professional 
 activity reflects and shapes the reputation of the 
 Bureau. 
 
 A release is therefore required from the NBS 
 Director or the MOU directors or the appropriate 
 editorial review board before official writing by an 
 NBS staff member may be published. This 
 requirement applies to writings that identify authors 
 in their official Bureau capacity, and should be 
 considered by the staff when making general public 
 
 sections 1.1-1.2 
 
1-4 
 
 statements that might affect the welfare or reputa- 
 tion of the Bureau. The responsibility for observing 
 and adhering to the Bureau's editorial policies and 
 practices is shared by all members of the staff; any 
 violations should be reported to the ERB and may 
 result in appropriate administrative action. 
 
 The chairpersons of the Editorial Review Boards, 
 either in Gaithersburg or in Boulder, are the 
 delegates of the Director (see exh. 1-A). These 
 Editorial Review Boards exercise policy, editorial, 
 and technical review. If an Editorial Review Board 
 is unable to approve a paper for publication, the 
 author will be advised of an appeal mechanism 
 (usually through the appropriate line management 
 to the MOU Director). 
 
 1.3 Review and Approval Procedures 
 
 The basic policy underlying the entire review 
 process is that the MOU directors are held 
 responsible by the NBS Director for the quality of 
 the publications of their organizations. Traditional- 
 ly, a two-stage review process has been used to help 
 the MOU directors fulfill this responsibility: first, a 
 review by the originating organization, and second, 
 a review by a Bureau-wide Editorial Review Board 
 (ERB) using individuals not personally involved in 
 the work and its reporting (to the maximum extent 
 possible). 
 
 For all Gaithersburg papers, release authority has 
 been delegated to the chairperson of WERB. For 
 Boulder papers, such authority has been delegated 
 to the chairpersons of the BERB and the JERB 
 (for a description of ERB responsibilities and 
 memberships, see exh. 1-A). 
 
 1.3.1 Types of Review 
 
 All technical manuscripts (except those prepared 
 for use in PID publications) undergo essentially the 
 same review procedures and involve participation 
 of NBS personnel at several levels. Three types of 
 review are routinely conducted, and a fourth is 
 conducted when appropriate. 
 
 (1) Technical review — includes critical evaluation 
 of the technical content and methodology, 
 statistical treatment of data, error analysis, use of ap- 
 propriate reference data and units; 
 
 (2) Policy review — includes examination of 
 consistency with NBS statutory authority and 
 operating policy, appropriateness of selected 
 medium of publication, and other matters as appro- 
 priate; 
 
 (3) Editorial review — includes a check on 
 nomenclature, formatting, titling, references, 
 indexing, citations, footnotes, acceptable standards 
 of writing quality, correct data on Form NBS- 114 
 
 (Manuscript Review and Approval Form) and 
 Form NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet); and 
 
 (4) Legal review when appropriate. 
 
 1.3.2 Stages of Review 
 
 The diagrams in exhibits 1-C and ID outline the 
 stages of the review process in Gaithersburg and 
 Boulder. An instruction sheet accompanying Form 
 NBS- 114 further details the stages of the review 
 process (see exh. l-E(a)). Note that the review 
 process within each MOU is established by the 
 director of that MOU, who may in turn delegate 
 the responsibility to the center/division directors. 
 
 The following sections 1.3.3 through 1.3.10 cover 
 specifically the review process for the organiza- 
 tional levels in Gaithersburg; however, the 
 principles and responsibilities also apply to the 
 modified review process in Boulder (exh. 1-D). 
 
 1.3.3 Author Responsibilities 
 
 The author has the primary responsibility for the 
 technical content and the quality of exposition of 
 the manuscript. Thorough review at the originating 
 level is vital (see Checklist for Authors and 
 Reviewers, exh. 2-A). When the manuscript is 
 finished and ready for review, the author carefully 
 fills out appropriate portions of Form NBS- 114 and 
 Form NBS-114A (see exh. l-E(a) and l-E(b)). Form 
 NBS-114A becomes an integral part of an NBS- 
 published paper and must accompany all non-NBS 
 media papers entered into the National Technical 
 Information Service. 
 
 One copy of the manuscript and the original and 
 one photocopy of Form NBS- 114 and Form NBS- 
 1 14A are sent through the review process. 
 
 1.3.4 Center and Division Responsibilities 
 
 The center director may establish a center 
 editorial review process or may delegate responsibil- 
 ity for review and recordkeeping to division chiefs. 
 If delegated the review responsibility, the division 
 chief then carries out, or causes to be carried out, a 
 complete review of the manuscript. Suggestions for 
 qualified critical readers for ERB are encouraged, 
 including suggestions from the author (criteria for 
 reader selection are given in sec. 1.3.7). Form NBS- 
 265 (Publications Followup Office Record, exh. 
 l-E(e)) should be initiated for each manuscript at 
 the time that the Form NBS-114 is prepared. Form 
 NBS-265 and Form NBS-266 (Notice of Publication 
 in Non-NBS Media, exh. l-E(O) can serve as a 
 checklist and record of manuscript progress, publi- 
 cation, and reprinting. These forms, along with 
 photocopies of Form NBS-114, are useful center 
 and division records. 
 
 sections 1.3-1.3.4 
 
1-5 
 
 When papers have authors from more than one 
 center or division, the center and division of the 
 principal author (first named) shall ordinarily 
 assume responsibility for initiating review. That 
 center/division shall verify that approvals and 
 clearances have been obtained from authors and 
 managers in other organizational units. Signatures 
 or initials indicating such review may be shown 
 along with those of the originating center/division. 
 
 Upon completion of the center/division review, 
 if further review is not required by the director of 
 the MOU, the manuscript is sent to the appropriate 
 ERB, together with any special notes and the 
 original and one copy of Form NBS-114 
 (Manuscript Review and Approval Form) and 
 Form NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet) (see 
 sec. 1.3.5 for circumstances when MOU review is 
 required). 
 
 The center/division is encouraged to send to the 
 ERB names of suggested readers in other than the 
 originating center and division. Although the ERB 
 is not obligated to choose these readers, the informa- 
 tion is useful to the Board and often aids in 
 reducing total review time. Also of great interest to 
 ERB are the names of additional readers used in the 
 center/division review. Space is provided on Form 
 NBS-114 for additional readers, and such evidence 
 of unusually thorough review will often prevent 
 duplication of effort and expedite ERB review. 
 Names of additional readers and other special cir- 
 cumstances can also be provided in a memorandum 
 accompanying the manuscript. 
 
 1.3.5 MOU Responsibilities 
 
 To assist the directors of the MOUs in ensuring 
 high quality technical papers originating within 
 their organizations, the directors may either 
 establish an editorial review committee at the MOU 
 level or delegate review authority for certain types 
 of papers to the center/division levels as discussed 
 in the previous section. These options, if exercised, 
 do not abrogate the MOU director's ultimate re- 
 sponsibility for these papers. 
 
 Moreover, the MOU director must personally 
 approve any paper that: 
 
 (1) Reports new values or methods for 
 determination of basic physical standards or 
 fundamental constants; or 
 
 (2) Reports material likely to draw conspicuous 
 public attention to NBS, such as evaluation of 
 commercial products and other sensitive matters. 
 
 1.3.6 Editorial Review Boards 
 
 The ERBs serve as instruments of the Director of 
 NBS and the directors of the MOUs to review all 
 manuscripts other than those for which the Public 
 Information Division is responsible (see sec. 1.7 and 
 
 ch. 5). Detailed review by the ERB will normally 
 follow review and approval by the originating orga- 
 nization. 
 
 The ERB procedures call for normal processing 
 of manuscripts that arrive with signatures of at least 
 one line manager and at least one technical 
 reviewer. Generally, the ERB assigns one technical 
 reader to review the paper and one ERB member 
 to serve as sponsor for the paper. 
 
 Upon the satisfactory completion of the ERB 
 review — usually within 2 to 4 weeks — the ERB 
 chairperson releases a manuscript for publication. 
 
 In all cases, the regional ERB maintains complete 
 records of papers produced in its area, and TIPD 
 maintains centralized records for all NBS technical 
 outputs. Form NBS-114, Form NBS-114A, Form 
 NBS-266 (Notice of Publication in Non-NBS 
 Media), along with appropriate memorandums are 
 used to form the principal entries in these files. 
 
 1.3.7 Readers 
 
 Although one reader can perform multiple 
 functions, different readers may be necessary to 
 meet the requirements of technical, policy, editorial, 
 and, when appropriate, legal review. On the 
 center/division level the emphasis of the reader(s) is 
 usually on technical content; although all NBS 
 requirements are considered. On the ERB level the 
 emphasis of the reader(s) is on NBS policy and 
 editorial practices as well as technical content. 
 
 Technical review includes at least one reader 
 (either inside or outside the Bureau) who is totally 
 independent of the research leading to the manu- 
 script. 
 
 Policy review is carried out by a reader who is 
 familiar with NBS statutory authority and operating 
 policy and with the nature and appropriateness of 
 the planned publication outlet. 
 
 Editorial review is the responsibility of the 
 author and all readers; they must be familiar with 
 NBS editorial and publication practices and with 
 the provisions of this manual. 
 
 Legal review is carried out by the NBS legal 
 advisor when such review is requested by the 
 center director, the MOU director, or the ERB. 
 
 Readers are selected from the author's own field 
 or a related field. Their primary function is to 
 provide an independent judgment of the value of 
 the paper, as well as how successfully the paper 
 communicates its message to its potential audience. 
 They have knowledge of the field concerned, and 
 at least a potential interest in the findings, but they 
 should not be so closely connected with the work 
 to reflect a vested interest. The ERBs, MOUs, and 
 the centers/divisions welcome suggestions of 
 qualified readers from authors and managers. 
 
 All members of the Bureau's professional staff are 
 expected to accept reviewing assignments within 
 their fields of competence, unless they are 
 
 sections 1.3.5-1.3.7 
 
1-6 
 
 prevented from doing so by the pressure of urgent 
 business. 
 
 The ERB readers are urged to confer directly 
 with authors of papers on suggested changes or any 
 questions on content. However, the reader can 
 remain anonymous if desired. In that case, the 
 reader can send the author unsigned comments via 
 the ERB sponsor or the secretary of ERB. 
 
 The ERB reader, on completing the review, signs 
 Form NBS-214' (Manuscript Evaluation, exh. 
 l-E(c)) and Form NBS-114 (Manuscript Review 
 and Approval), fills out the manuscript custody 
 transfer blanks, and sends the entire package of 
 manuscript and forms to the ERB sponsor whose 
 name and address appear on Form NBS-214. 
 
 The ERB reader should complete the review 
 within 2 weeks, or sooner if possible. If it appears 
 that additional time will be required, the reviewer 
 should notify the originating organization or the 
 secretary of ERB. 
 
 Readers should consult the Checklist for Authors 
 and Reviewers in exhibit 2-A. 
 
 1.3.8 Sponsors 
 
 The ERB sponsor is a member of the ERB who 
 helps coordinate the final review of the paper. The 
 ERB members are familiar with NBS policy and 
 editorial criteria, and as sponsors put primary effort 
 on these aspects of review. The sponsor serves as 
 the final reader of the paper, though this review is 
 usually not in as great detail as that done by the 
 other readers. In addition, the sponsor serves as an 
 arbiter for points of difference between the author 
 and the ERB reader when necessary. Sponsors 
 present their recommendations and assessment of 
 manuscripts at ERB meetings. 
 
 1.3.9 Editorial Review Board Actions 
 
 When the manuscript has been approved by the 
 ERB and released for publication by the chairper- 
 son, the secretary of ERB notifies the author by 
 memo through the center/division director (or 
 authorized designee). At the same time, the manu- 
 script is returned to the originator for final 
 corrections to the manuscript prior to submission 
 for publication. All manuscripts for NBS publica- 
 tion series (including the NBS Journal of Research) 
 and for all non-NBS media are handled in this 
 manner. Review and related ERB processing are 
 normally completed within 2 to 4 weeks. 
 
 If the ERB cannot release a manuscript (for tech- 
 nical or other reasons), it is returned to the 
 originating organization for reconsideration. When 
 differences between ERB and the originating organi- 
 zation cannot be resolved, the manuscript is 
 
 'In Boulder, use Form BL-7A (Boulder Review Form). 
 
 sections 1.3.8-1.3.11 
 
 returned and the author advised of an appeal 
 mechanism (usually through the appropriate line 
 management to the MOU director). 
 
 1.3.10 Special Review Procedures 
 
 The review process described in the preceding 
 sections applies to all manuscripts designed for 
 issuance in the NBS technical publication series or 
 to be published as official writing by NBS staff 
 members in non-NBS publications. There are other 
 NBS information products for which the review 
 process is different. 
 
 (1) Letters to Editor 
 
 Letters to journal editors should be submitted to the 
 ERB. A distinction is made between (a) a simple 
 letter to the editor of a newspaper or a general pub- 
 lication, and (b) a more formal letter to the editor 
 of a journal that has a special section bearing this 
 title. The former is sent to ERB for a quick review 
 to ensure that the letter is free of statements that are 
 outside the jurisdiction of the Bureau or that could 
 cause embarrassment to the Bureau. The latter is 
 usually regarded as a short paper and must be 
 accompanied by Form NBS-114 and Form NBS- 
 114A. The ERB will normally expedite its 
 handling. 
 
 (2) Oral Presentations 
 
 When a staff member plans to speak before an 
 outside group, the ERB is notified by Form NBS- 
 118 (Notice of Talk, exh. l-E(h)) at least 10 days 
 before the talk is given and 3 weeks if the talk is to 
 be given outside of the Gaithersburg and Boulder 
 areas. When possible, all talks are announced in the 
 NBS Technicalendar 2 weeks in advance. The 
 2-week notification is particularly helpful to 
 Department of Commerce field officers if the talk is 
 likely to draw public or press interest (see sec. 5.2 
 for details about oral presentations). 
 
 (3) NBS Audiovisual Programs, General Publica- 
 tions, and Articles for DIMENSIONS/NBS and 
 Monthly Highlights 
 
 If such programs and articles have direct public in- 
 formation implications, their review and production 
 are coordinated by PID in Gaithersburg or by PIO 
 in Boulder. All information prepared or 
 coordinated by these offices undergoes stringent 
 review before release (see sees. 1.7 and 5.5). 
 
 1.3.11 Manuscript Followup and Subsequent 
 Changes in Papers for Non-NBS Media 
 
 It is important that the Bureau's publication 
 records be complete and correct. Therefore, when 
 a paper is published in an outside medium, two 
 
1-7 
 
 reprints or photocopies are forwarded to the 
 Production Unit, TIPD, together with the 
 completed Form NBS-266 (Notice of Publication in 
 Non-NBS Media) and a completed Form NBS- 
 114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet). The Form NBS- 
 114A should reflect any changes subsequent to 
 review and approval by ERB, but need not be 
 retyped. In Boulder, reprints and forms are sent to 
 PIO for recordkeeping in PIO and forwarding to 
 TIPD. If the paper is part of conference 
 proceedings, the full title, place, and dates of the 
 conference are included. 
 
 After the Editorial Review Board (ERB) has 
 released a manuscript, changes in the place of publi- 
 cation require concurrence of ERB. In addition, 
 authors must report to ERB any subsequent 
 changes in title or authors, withdrawal of a manu- 
 script, or substantive changes in text. 
 
 If an editor of the outside publication declines to 
 publish a manuscript, or if the author decides not to 
 publish the paper after ERB approval, the ERB 
 should be informed by a memorandum accompa- 
 nied by any relevant correspondence. 
 
 For information about outside journals to which 
 NBS is authorized to pay page charges for NBS- 
 authored papers, see section 1.4.10. 
 
 1.3.12 Recognizing 
 Achievements 
 
 Outstanding Writing 
 
 (1) Incentive Awards for Outstanding Written 
 Exposition 
 
 The Bureau encourages supervisors to use the 
 incentive awards program as a mechanism for 
 recognizing outstanding writing achievements of 
 the staff. Scientific and technical papers and reports 
 having high quality content and exemplary 
 exposition should be noted. In the review and evalu- 
 ation process, both ERB readers and sponsors are 
 asked to recommend papers which should be 
 considered for an award of merit. Such recommen- 
 dations are referred to the author's supervisors by 
 the ERB chairperson. 
 
 (2) Condon Award 
 
 A major Bureau award for notable accomplishment 
 by the NBS staff is the Edward Uhler Condon 
 Award. Its purpose is to recognize and to promote 
 distinguished achievement in written exposition. 
 Dr. Condon, for whom this award is named, was an 
 outstanding Director of the Bureau from 1945 to 
 1951. He is also remembered for his distinguished 
 authorship of numerous books, papers, and reports 
 on a variety of subjects in science and technology. 
 
 To qualify for consideration for the Condon 
 Award, a paper must have been recently published, 
 usually within 1 year prior to nomination for the 
 award. Papers by one or more authors are 
 considered, and both a single paper and a series of 
 
 papers by an author or authors are eligible. 
 Important characteristics of such papers are as 
 follows: 
 
 (a) Papers must have substantial scientific or 
 technological merit and demonstrate clarity in 
 style and effectiveness in exposition. 
 
 (b) Papers must represent the contribution in 
 style and content of the acknowledged authors 
 except for minor editing changes that occur in 
 the review process and in publication; therefore, 
 papers by professional writers, whether acknowl- 
 edged or not, will not be eligible for the award. 
 
 (c) A single paper should be either a substantial 
 review, a survey of a specific subject area, or a 
 tutorial paper with a quality of exposition that 
 appeals to a broad audience with a range of 
 interests and specialities. 
 
 (d) A Series of papers must demonstrate a 
 sustained superior accomplishment by the same 
 author or authors and need not be a review, a 
 survey, or a tutorial series intended for broad 
 audiences. 
 
 The Condon Award is presented at the NBS 
 Annual Awards Ceremony along with other major 
 NBS and Department of Commerce (DoC) awards. 
 The award consists of an engraved plaque and an 
 honorarium of $3,000, which is shared equally if the 
 paper has more than one author. 
 
 (3) Nominating Authors 
 
 In nominating authors of papers for either an 
 incentive award or the Condon Award, supervisors 
 should contact the incentive awards program 
 officer of the Personnel Division to obtain forms 
 and relevant submission instructions. 
 
 1.4 Legal Considerations 
 1.4.1 General Copyright Policy 
 
 Generally, official writings are in the public 
 domain when they are performed as part of official 
 duties; therefore copyright in the United States is 
 not available. 
 
 This includes writings produced during working 
 hours, using Government facilities. It also extends 
 to writings devoted substantially to the responsibili- 
 ties, programs, or operations of the Bureau or DoC, 
 or to writings which draw substantially upon 
 official data or ideas that have not yet become part 
 of the body of public information (17 U.S.C. 8; 44 
 U.S.C. 58; "Writing for Outside Publication"— DoC 
 Administrative Order 219-1). An exception is the 
 Standard Reference Data Act (Public Law 90-396, 
 15 U.S.C. 290) which authorizes the Secretary of 
 Commerce to secure copyright on behalf of the 
 United States for standard reference data compiled 
 and evaluated by NBS. 
 
 sections 1.3.12-1.4.1 
 
1.4.2 Submissions to Copyrighted Publications 
 
 When writings that fall under the preceding 
 categories (except NSRDS items) are submitted to a 
 non-NBS publication, a statement should be 
 included indicating that the material is in the public 
 domain and not subject to copyright. This caveat 
 can be presented in a number of ways in these publi- 
 cations. 
 
 (1) Book chapters and articles of conference 
 proceedings should have the following statement at 
 the bottom of the first page of the section by an 
 NBS author: "Official contribution of the National 
 Bureau of Standards, not subject to copyright in the 
 United States." 
 
 (2) Manuscripts submitted to non-NBS periodical 
 publications should preferably have the following 
 statement at the bottom of the first page of the 
 article: "Contribution of the National Bureau of 
 Standards, not subject to copyright in the United 
 States." However, this statement may be shortened 
 to "Contribution of the National Bureau of 
 Standards" if the publisher prefers. 
 
 (3) The no-copyright notice may be omitted 
 entirely from the NBS paper if the publication in 
 which it appears carries a statement excluding U.S. 
 Government material from its copyright coverage 
 and the affiliation of the NBS author is clearly 
 shown. 
 
 1.4.3 Manuscripts or Reports Prepared for NBS 
 Under Contracts or Grants 
 
 In those instances where a manuscript has been 
 prepared for NBS under a Government contract or 
 grant, ownership of copyright will depend upon the 
 copyright provisions in the contract or grant. When 
 a report is the specific purpose of the work being 
 performed, the NBS procurement contract will 
 generally include the following no-copyright 
 provision: 
 
 The contractor relinquishes any and all copy- 
 rights and/or privileges to the data developed 
 under this contract, and such information will 
 become the sole property of the Government. In 
 addition, any data, in whole or in part, developed 
 under this contract cannot be published by the 
 contractor without the expressed permission of 
 the Government; in the event permission is 
 granted to publish any data, in whole or in part, 
 the data shall be identified by such phrasing as: 
 "This information is the result of tax-supported 
 research. It may be reprinted without restriction 
 with the customary crediting of the source." 
 
 When a contractor or grantee (including 
 employees thereoQ, is permitted to assert copy- 
 right to materials produced under contract or grant, 
 the copyright is subject to a nonexclusive, royalty- 
 
 free, irrevocable license for the Government to 
 publish or reproduce the published form of the 
 contribution, or allow others to do so for U.S. Gov- 
 ernment purposes (see sec. 3.5 for procedures for 
 publishing these reports). 
 
 1.4.4 Using Excerpts from Copyrighted Material 
 
 The use of copyrighted material in NBS publica- 
 tions is also an important concern. NBS authors 
 must recognize the need to obtain in advance the 
 consent of the copyright holder before reprinting 
 extensive sections. When authors plan to quote 
 extensively or use any illustrations from copyright- 
 ed publications, they must obtain permission in 
 writing from the copyright holder before the 
 material may be used in any form of publication. In 
 addition, the source and the copyright owner must 
 be acknowledged either in the text or in a footnote. 
 The following form is suggested: 
 
 Reprinted with permission from 
 
 Copyright 19 by 
 
 Official writing by NBS authors and other 
 employees in copyrighted books and periodicals 
 may be reproduced in whole or in part without 
 regard to an overall copyright of the publication in 
 which the excerpt is found, provided that the 
 source is explicitly acknowledged. However, when 
 an NBS author plans to reprint such material by a 
 non-NBS author, it is appropriate (as a matter of 
 courtesy and as a means of ascertaining that the 
 material is up-to-date and contains no copyrighted 
 material) to inform the originating organization or 
 author of the intent to use the material. One of the 
 following statements may be appropriate: 
 
 Originally published in 
 Reprinted from 
 
 or, 
 
 A publisher's copyright notice should not appear 
 on the original or reprint of official writings by 
 Government employees. 
 
 1.4.5 Nonofficial Writing That May be Copyrighted 
 
 NBS staff members may write manuscripts that 
 are not considered work of the U.S. Government, 
 and for which a copyright may be claimed. If 
 authors are unsure as to the status of their writing 
 (official or nonofficial), they should check in Gai- 
 thersburg with the chief of TIPD and in Boulder 
 with the chief of PIO. In general, it is 
 recommended that authors request official approval 
 from the Bureau's conflict-of-interest officer 
 (Personnel Division) before undertaking nonofficial 
 writing (see sec. 1.4.1 for definition of official 
 writing). 
 
 sections 1.4.2-1.4.5 
 
1-9 
 
 1.4.6 Contributing Chapters to Technical Books 
 
 1.4.7 Writing Separate Volumes or Books 
 
 The Bureau has long recognized that the 
 contribution of special subject matter chapters by 
 NBS staff members to copyrighted non-NBS books 
 often constitutes an appropriate and effective means 
 of disseminating the results of the Bureau's 
 research, development, and service activities to the 
 scientific and technical community. 
 
 An increasing number of NBS staff members are 
 receiving requests from technical book editors and 
 publishers for book chapters, the preparation of 
 which cannot be undertaken as nonofficial writing 
 as defined in DoC Administrative Order 219-1, 
 "Writing for Outside Publication." The reasons 
 may be varied: the subject matter is inseparable 
 from the author's NBS duties and responsibilities; 
 the chapter would require the use of yet 
 unpublished NBS data; or the contribution involves 
 a deadline that would just not be realizable by the 
 authors working on their own time and using only 
 personal resources. 
 
 If an NBS staff member has been requested to 
 write a book chapter and decides to prepare it on 
 Bureau time, either entirely or partially, the author 
 should take the following steps to avoid possible 
 conflict of interest and to comply with Government 
 policy: 
 
 (1) Obtain written permission from the center/ 
 division director to prepare the chapter on 
 Bureau time. 
 
 (2) Conduct any necessary negotiations with the 
 book editor or publisher, not by signing the usual 
 formal contract, but through correspondence 
 covering the following points: 
 
 (a) The author is willing to prepare the article 
 as a contribution of the National Bureau of 
 Standards. 
 
 (b) The following required notice is to be 
 printed with the author's chapter: "Contribution 
 of the National Bureau of Standards, not subject 
 to copyright in the United States." This does not 
 preclude the publisher from obtaining an overall 
 copyright on the book itself. 
 
 (c) Any honorarium or payment for the chapter 
 that the author would normally be due should be 
 made payable to NBS. 
 
 If appropriate, correspondence should also state 
 the following: 
 
 (a) The work is original except for material 
 from acknowledged sources, and if any copyright 
 material is used, permission has been, or will be, 
 obtained for such use. 
 
 (b) The publisher should provide NBS with a 
 few complimentary copies of the published 
 volume, and when feasible, some reprints of the 
 NBS contribution. 
 
 The preceding procedures do not apply if a staff 
 member has been requested to write or edit a 
 separate volume or book by a commercial publisher 
 on official time. It is not permissible to provide 
 official writing services for a commercial or profit- 
 making organization unless there is sufficiently 
 strong justification to request the approval of the 
 DoC and the Joint Committee on Printing. 
 
 Generally, an NBS staff member may write or 
 edit a separate volume or book on official time for a 
 professional society or nonprofit organization 
 whose professional activities promote NBS 
 objectives. The advance clearance procedures given 
 for book chapters should be followed. 
 
 1.4.8 Honorariums and Royalties 
 
 In general, NBS authors are encouraged to 
 accept an honorarium or royalty on behalf of NBS, 
 if payment is offered for their official writings, i.e., 
 in any of the following situations: 
 
 (a) The writing has been done on Government 
 time. 
 
 (b) Significant contributions of substance or 
 editing have been made by colleagues on Govern- 
 ment time. 
 
 (c) The manuscript has been prepared with use of 
 Government facilities. 
 
 (d) The writing is devoted substantially to the re- 
 sponsibilities, program, or operations of NBS or 
 DoC. 
 
 (e) The writing draws substantially upon official 
 data or ideas which have not become a part of the 
 body of public information. 
 
 Honorariums and royalties should not be waived, 
 if any of the preceding apply. Instead the author 
 should request that payment be made to the 
 National Bureau of Standards, so that the payment 
 can be deposited in the gift and honorarium fund 
 created for that purpose. 
 
 An author may accept honorariums for nonoffi- 
 cial writings not covered by any of the restrictions 
 listed in this section (see DoC Administrative Order 
 219-1 and sec. 1.4.4). 
 
 1.4.9 Use of NBS Name in Advertising 
 
 The longstanding policy of NBS is that its name 
 or its materials cannot be used in any way, directly 
 or indirectly, to imply approval or disapproval of a 
 commercial product or process. 
 
 When communicating with commercial firms 
 regarding calibration procedures for products (e.g., 
 using measuring instruments) or for standardizing 
 
 sections 1.4.6-1.4.9 
 
1-10 
 
 material compositions marketed by such firms, the 
 author should make clear the Bureau policy 
 concerning advertising. For example, the statement 
 "calibrated by the U.S. National Bureau of 
 Standards" would almost certainly be misleading in 
 an advertisement, since an NBS calibration applies 
 only to a particular device at the time of its test. 
 Moreover, statements containing phrases such as 
 "approved by NBS" or "recommended by NBS" 
 are precluded by DoC and NBS policy. 
 
 Precise statements of the actual relation of NBS- 
 developed standards to a marketed item are 
 allowed. Thus there is no objection to a statement 
 by manufacturers that their primary standards have 
 been periodically calibrated by NBS, if this is 
 actually the case (see also Code of Federal 
 Regulations, Title 15, sec. 200.113 or NBS SP 250). 
 
 1.4.10 Page Charges and Reprints 
 
 The Bureau is authorized by law to pay page 
 charges and to purchase reprints of NBS papers in 
 non-NBS publications. Certain requirements, 
 however, must be met before page charges may be 
 paid: 
 
 (1) The journal must not be operated for profit. 
 
 (2) Page charges must be levied impartially on all 
 papers the journal publishes. 
 
 (3) The journal must be published domestically. 
 
 Thus commercial and foreign journals do not 
 qualify for payment of page charges, though the 
 purchase of reprints is permissible. 
 
 To ensure that specific domestic journals qualify 
 for page charges and that the NBS paper has been 
 reviewed and released by an ERB, the person 
 making the request routes the purchase request 
 (Form NBS- IDA) for payment of page charges and 
 purchase of reprints through TIPD in Gaithers- 
 burg, or through PIO in Boulder. This procedure 
 also enables NBS to keep central records of such 
 requests. 
 
 Both page charges and reprint orders are charged 
 to the appropriate division project. The page 
 charges and reprinting costs are shown as separate 
 items on the purchase request. When the journal's 
 page charge/reprint order form is returned to the 
 publisher with the galley proof, the publisher's 
 order form should bear the notation: "Formal NBS 
 purchase order will follow," as only the Bureau's 
 contracting officer can legally commit payment. A 
 copy of the publisher's order form is retained and 
 attached to Form NBS- IDA. 
 
 Reprints are the property of the Bureau. If 
 authors leave the Bureau, they may take a supply of 
 reprints, provided sufficient stock remains at NBS 
 to meet future anticipated needs. 
 
 1.4.11 Avoiding the Use of Trade Names 
 
 The Joint Committee on Printing, DoC, and 
 Bureau policies require that NBS authors avoid the 
 use of trade names in all manuscripts (including illus- 
 trations) except where public safety or health is 
 involved or where mention of the trade name is 
 essential to comprehension of reported results and 
 would not result in a competitive advantage or 
 disadvantage to a manufacturer. In general, authors 
 should use generic terminology rather than specific 
 commercial identification. 
 
 Even when trade names are avoided, the Bureau 
 may be required to reveal the identity of commer- 
 cial products used in NBS investigations if a formal 
 request is made under the Freedom of Information 
 Act. This possibly should be kept in mind when 
 reports are written, reviewed, and approved. See 
 section 1.5.3(2)(b) for guidance on handling pubHc 
 requests for reports containing sensitive and trade 
 name information. 
 
 1.4.12 When Trade Names May Be Allowed 
 
 When a trade name is required for a clear under- 
 standing of the paper, an author must use care to 
 prevent possible misuse of the passage by others, or 
 objection by the manufacturers or distributors of 
 the same or competitive products. Mention of the 
 trade name in a footnote, rather than in the body of 
 the text, may help prevent its misuse. 
 
 Situations that may require trade name or other 
 specific identification of commercial products (e.g., 
 materials, equipment, or instruments) in NBS manu- 
 scripts usually fall into one of the two following 
 categories: 
 
 (1) Precise identification of the product is 
 necessary to specify adequately the experimental 
 procedure used to determine some physical or 
 chemical property of some other material or system. 
 
 (2) Precise identification of the product is 
 necessary because the product is part of an 
 assembly or machine and is a part whose physical 
 dimensions or technical characteristics must, in the 
 event of damage or failure, be duplicated exactly in 
 a successful replacement part. 
 
 If modifications of a system or equipment have 
 been made to provide some additional features, 
 these changes are also described in sufficient detail 
 to permit duplication. In the case of materials, the 
 information given should be adequate to 
 characterize the materials. 
 
 In situation (1) the manuscript ordinarily 
 includes, as a footnote to the first identification of 
 the product, or to the section containing it, an ap- 
 propriately worded disclaimer. The following is an 
 example: "Certain commercial equipment, instru- 
 ments, or materials are identified in this paper in 
 
 sections 1.4.10-1.4.12 
 
1-11 
 
 order to adequately specify the experimental 
 procedure. Such identification does not imply rec- 
 ommendation or endorsement by the National 
 Bureau of Standards, nor does it imply that the 
 materials or equipment identified are necessarily the 
 best available for the purpose." 
 
 Occasionally it may be permissible to omit this 
 footnote when only isolated passing reference is 
 made to a well-recognized product. Even when a 
 disclaimer is used, mention of trade names are kept 
 to a minimum. 
 
 In situation (2) use of a trade name is permitted 
 so as to enable others to reproduce the reported 
 results in their laboratories. Details of procedures, 
 methods, and equipment are included to the extent 
 necessary for this purpose. For example, in many 
 cases identification of a material as "Teflon" may 
 be sufficient; in other cases it may be necessary to 
 identify it as "Teflon 5" or "Teflon 7." Generally, 
 in the case of instruments, precise identification 
 may require giving both the manufacturer's identity 
 and the model number. 
 
 Specific clearance must be obtained from the ap- 
 propriate MOU director for reports which involve 
 the performance of brand name products, instru- 
 ments, or commercial organizations. If a center 
 director makes a determination that the item or or- 
 ganization must be identified in the report, the 
 rationale and justification must be set forth in a 
 memorandum to the MOU director, as soon as 
 possible and preferably prior to acceptance of the 
 work, requesting approval to issue such a report. 
 The MOU director, prior to taking action on the 
 request, may consult with the legal advisor if, in the 
 director's judgment, it is necessary to ensure that all 
 legal impHcations are considered. If the MOU 
 director approves the use of specific names in the 
 report, the director should sign Form NBS-114 
 prior to the manuscript's transmission to the ERE, 
 and if the MOU director considers it desirable, 
 should request that the final report be subject to a 
 legal review as well as technical review. 
 
 1.5 Reports to Sponsors 
 
 1.5.1 Quality Control 
 
 NBS reports of work sponsored by other 
 agencies, regardless of the form they take, are 
 subject to quality control requirements, as are all 
 other technical reports of NBS. This normally 
 includes the review and approval procedures given 
 in section 1.3, including clearance by the appropri- 
 ate ERB. Even when urgent deadlines must be met, 
 special arrangements can usually be made for full 
 review by ERB. However, if time constraints make 
 ERB review impracticable, special procedures 
 established by the MOU directors shall be followed. 
 
 In such a case, a copy of the report must be sent to 
 the appropriate ERB for post technical and policy 
 review, and for recordkeeping. 
 
 The center director (or delegate) is responsible 
 for identifying any reports for which review by the 
 NBS legal advisor is necessary. ERB may also 
 decide to request legal review for certain reports. 
 
 For guidance on the use of trade names in reports 
 to sponsors, see sections 1.4.11 and 1.4.12. 
 
 1.5.2 Negotiations with Sponsors^ 
 
 The agreement between NBS and a sponsoring 
 agency should contain an explicit statement of the 
 procedures for reporting. The following matters 
 should be clearly specified in the agreement: 
 
 (1) Dates and formats of progress reports, if any; 
 
 (2) Dates and formats of topical and final reports; 
 
 (3) Number of copies to be provided to sponsor; 
 
 (4) Extent and method of distribution of report by 
 both sponsor and NBS; and 
 
 (5) Responsibility for release of information to the 
 public. Unless the report is a memorandum or 
 letter, NBS will normally release it to the National 
 Technical Information Service (NTIS), although in 
 special circumstances it may be witheld by joint 
 agreement of NBS and the sponsor. 
 
 1.5.3 Types of Reports to Other Agencies 
 
 Work reported to external sponsors will 
 generally take one of three forms: an NBS publica- 
 tion, an NBS Interagency/Internal Report (unless 
 the sponsoring agency requires that its own format 
 and issue procedures be followed), or an NBS- 
 Sponsor Communication. 
 
 (1) NBS Publications 
 
 In this form, the report of sponsored work appears 
 in one of the GPO-printed series, such as the Tech- 
 nical Note, Building Science Series, or Special Pub- 
 lication. 
 
 NBS GPO-printed publications receive wide distri- 
 bution, both inside and outside the Government. 
 Both NBS and the Superintendent of Documents, 
 who handles public sales, give these publications 
 wide promotion and publicity and ensure that they 
 are abstracted and indexed by major bibliographic 
 services. NTIS cites them in its announcement 
 journals and sells them in microfiche or paper copy 
 form. Publication in these series avoids the added 
 
 2 See NBS Policy Bulletins 5, 6, and 7 and Administrative 
 Manual Chapter 11, Subchapter 4 for policy guidance for 
 accepting other-Agency work and negotiating agreements. 
 
 sections 1.5-1.5.3 
 
1-12 
 
 costs that result when material initially published 
 in limited-availability versions is subsequently 
 republished for wider distribution (see ch. 3 for 
 more information about these series). 
 
 (2) NBS Interagency/Internal Reports (NBSIRs) 
 
 This method of reporting results to sponsors should 
 be used when an NBS GPO-printed publication is 
 not acceptable to the sponsor, when the information 
 reported is a preliminary progress report or 
 material not appropriate for wider distribution, or 
 when time constraints make it impractical to 
 prepare and publish the results through the GPO. 
 
 In the latter case, if the material is otherwise appro- 
 priate for wider distribution, it should be considered 
 for publication in a different form. When the 
 material will be published in a second form, the 
 NBSIR should indicate on the title page that an 
 NBS publication is forthcoming and the Biblio- 
 graphic Data Sheet (Form NBS-114A) of the 
 NBSIR should indicate "limited" distribution (see 
 (a) below). 
 
 NBSIR publications have the following characteris- 
 tics: 
 
 (a) Primary (initial) distribution is limited to 
 those persons who have a definite interest in the 
 subject. The distribution is determined by the 
 sponsor and NBS jointly, and carried out by 
 either agency. By mutual agreement, secondary 
 distribution is accomplished by sending the 
 reports to NTIS for public announcement and 
 sale. In some instances, NBS and the sponsor may 
 agree on a restricted distribution because 
 the report contains proprietary information, 
 preliminary and fragmentary results, or policy 
 recommendations for further consideration by the 
 sponsor. If so, the appropriate block in item 1 3 of 
 Form NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet) 
 should be checked. (This block reads: "For 
 Official Distribution. Do not Release to NTIS.") 
 The reason for restricting distribution may be 
 further explained in a "special notice" on the 
 inside front cover, the text for which may be 
 provided by the sponsor or NBS (see sec. 1.5.4). 
 
 (b) Limited or restricted NBSIRs must be made 
 available to all interested parties upon request 
 under provisions of the Freedom of Information 
 Act unless the documents fall within one of the 
 exemptions clearly specified in that act. The 
 possibility of distribution to the general public 
 should be kept in mind when such reports are 
 written, reviewed, and approved. Freedom of In- 
 formation inquiries and other public requests for 
 the release of limited or restricted reports 
 containing sensitive matters and trade name identi- 
 fication should be directed to the legal office for 
 coordination with the appropriate ERB and 
 MOU. This also applies to requests for the trade 
 name identification key for both restricted and 
 
 unlimited reports in which trade products or com- 
 mercial organizations are coded. 
 
 (c) As with other publications, the use of trade 
 names should be avoided, except as prescribed in 
 section 1.4.12. 
 
 (d) Reproduction is handled by the Printing and 
 Duplicating Unit in Gaithersburg (PIO in 
 Boulder). The time between submission and repro- 
 duction is 2 to 3 weeks (see sec. 3.2 for more in- 
 formation about NBSIRs. See sec. 4.4 and exhs. 
 4B, 4C, and 4D for guidelines for preparing 
 NBSIR copy). 
 
 (3) NBS-Sponsor Communications 
 
 The term "NBS-Sponsor Communication" means a 
 letter or memorandum to an appropriate person in 
 the sponsoring agency. Because of the urgency or 
 nature of such communications, a central review by 
 the ERB is not required. Full accountability and 
 recordkeeping rests with the originating organiza- 
 tion under procedures established by the MOU 
 director. 
 
 NBS-Sponsor Communications have at least one of 
 the following characteristics: 
 
 (a) The urgency of the report is such that only 
 this format can meet the sponsor's needs. 
 
 (b) The material is of interest only to the 
 project monitor and a small number of associates. 
 
 (c) The material contains proprietary or 
 otherwise administratively restricted information. 
 Typical examples might be results of product 
 safety tests for the Food and Drug 
 Administration, or codes identifying samples of 
 commercial products used in performance tests 
 for the General Services Administration. 
 
 Regardless of limitations on initial distribution, such 
 communications may be subject to release under the 
 Freedom of Information Act if they contain techni- 
 cal data and other factual information. 
 
 1.5.4 Restrictive or Superseding Notices 
 
 No restrictive or superseding notice of any kind 
 is needed for reports to sponsors except under the 
 following circumstances: 
 
 (1) If the report to the sponsor is to be 
 republished in another NBS publication series, the 
 title page should bear the following legend: "This 
 report is to be superseded by a future publication 
 which will receive general distribution. Please 
 consult the NBS Technical Information and Publica- 
 tions Division to obtain the proper citation." 
 
 (2) Progress reports or preliminary reports should 
 contain an appropriate notice of limited value. One 
 of the following may be used: 
 
 section 1.5.4 
 
■13 
 
 (a) "This is a progress report. The work is 
 incomplete and is continuing. Results and 
 conclusions are not necessarily those that will be 
 included in the final report." 
 
 (b) "This report presents results of a 
 preliminary study. A number of uncertainties 
 remain that should be considered in more detail. 
 Therefore, the conclusions are not necessarily 
 those that would be reached in a full and 
 complete investigation." 
 
 (3) Reports containing sensitive matters that may 
 involve NBS in litigation or may raise controversial 
 issues of concern to high Administration officials or 
 the Congress should receive limited distribution and 
 carry a notice of the following type: 
 
 "This document has been prepared for the use of 
 
 (identification of sponsoring agency). 
 
 Responsibility for its further use rests with that 
 agency. NBS requests that if release to the public 
 is contemplated, such action be taken only after 
 consultation with the Technical Information and 
 Publications Division at the National Bureau of 
 Standards." 
 
 When notified by sponsors of their intention to 
 release such a report, TIPD will immediately bring 
 the matter to the attention of the originating unit 
 and the appropriate ERE (see also sec. 1 .4. 12). 
 
 1.6 General Inquiries 
 
 An important part of the information program is 
 the numerous direct contacts by NBS technical staff 
 with their peers in academia, industry, and other 
 research laboratories. (For information on handling 
 media inquiries, see sec. 1.7 and ch. 5.) 
 Supplementing this effort are the specialized 
 services of the NBS information analysis centers of 
 the National Standards Reference Data System, 
 numerous NBS special subject information offices 
 (as listed by the Library of Congress National 
 Referral Center), the information services of the 
 Library Division, and the inquiry service of TIPD 
 in Gaithersburg and PIO in Boulder. 
 
 In Gaithersburg, TIPD responds to or refers to 
 appropriate staff members approximately 65,000 
 letters and telephone inquiries annually, and PIO in 
 Boulder handles about 5, OCX) each year. 
 
 1.6.1 Responsibilities of Staff Members 
 
 Responding to inquiries is, of course, an 
 important public service, and the NBS staff 
 members involved are responsible for making this 
 correspondence program an effective one. Aids to 
 such correspondence are available in the form of 
 brochures, press releases, letter circulars, lists of 
 
 publications, and, when justified, the technical publi- 
 cations of the Bureau. A list of some of the current 
 aids to correspondence is given in exhibit 1-F. 
 
 1.6.2 Letter Circulars 
 
 As aids to quicker and more economical handling 
 of recurring requests for the same information, a 
 number of letter circulars (LCs) have been prepared 
 by various Bureau laboratories. Letter circulars 
 usually present general information and are made 
 available only when no other publication can satisfy 
 frequent requests from the public for the informa- 
 tion. 
 
 Letter circulars receive careful editorial review 
 by the originating units and the appropriate ERB. 
 
 1.6.3 Lists of Publications 
 
 Lists of publications (LPs), like letter circulars, 
 are also aids to correspondence. There are three 
 types of lists of publications: (1) references to 
 published works by staff members of a specific NBS 
 laboratory or office, (2) references on a given 
 subject by NBS staff members, and (3) references 
 on a given subject, including work by NBS staff 
 members and by outside authors. Lists of type (3) 
 are sometimes expanded and submitted as formal 
 Bureau publications. 
 
 Lists of publications receive careful editorial 
 review by the originating units and the appropriate 
 ERB. 
 
 1.7 Media Liaison 
 
 Representatives of the news media are given 
 special attention by the Bureau in order to foster 
 accurate and influential exposure for NBS activities 
 and to assure that NBS research results are commu- 
 nicated to various public and professional audiences 
 via the press. In Gaithersburg, media liaison is 
 provided by PID, which assists staff members in 
 initiating and responding to news media contacts; in 
 Boulder, PIO performs this function. These offices 
 have public information specialists who cover 
 assigned areas of Bureau work and assist staff 
 members in preparing and clearing material for the 
 technical, trade, and general news media — including 
 magazines, newsletters, newspapers, and radio and 
 television stations. Generally excluded from the re- 
 sponsibilities of the media liaison group is the 
 scientific or archival literature that appears in tech- 
 nical journals for scientific and peer audiences. 
 
 Written materials prepared by public information 
 specialists include news releases, fact sheets, press 
 advisories, newsletters, brief consumer-oriented 
 reports, articles for DIMENSIONS/NBS and the 
 
 sections 1.6-1.7 
 
-14 
 
 NBS Standard, and publication announcements. 
 The media liaison group also arranges articles by 
 and interviews with Bureau staff as requested 
 by the media. Other responsibilities include: 
 arrangements for news conferences and preparation 
 of materials specifically for radio and television 
 when appropriate; daily monitoring of media 
 coverage of NBS activities; and weekly reporting 
 to the Secretary of Commerce on major accomplish- 
 ments and activities at NBS. 
 
 Clearance for written materials produced by the 
 media liaison group involves thorough review for 
 technical accuracy and policy, usually at least 
 through the MOU directors level and, when appro- 
 priate, through the Office of the Director, the 
 Department, and non-NBS agencies and organiza- 
 tions (see exh. l-E(g) for PID clearance Form NBS- 
 50 and Media Distribution List). 
 
 Staff members should contact the appropriate 
 media liaison group in PID or PIO under the 
 following circumstances: 
 
 (1) When contacted for information by a represen- 
 tative of the news media they don't know 
 personally; 
 
 (2) When they have produced results that could 
 be of interest to the news media; 
 
 (3) When they wish to release any information 
 concerning NBS to the news media either through 
 NBS or through another organization. 
 
 (4) When they feel that their statements, NBS 
 policy, or NBS research results have been 
 misrepresented in an article in the news media; and 
 
 (5) When they have provided information to 
 media contacts with whom they have established a 
 good working relationship. 
 
 In the case of (5) the appropriate media liaison 
 group should be contacted, within 1 working day 
 after the response has been made. 
 
 Exhibit 1-A. Charter 
 National Bureau of Standards Editorial Review 
 
 The NBS editorial review boards at the Gaithers- 
 burg and Boulder sites have been established as 
 standing committees by the Director, NBS, to assist 
 the staff and management to maintain the highest 
 possible quality of content and style of NBS publica- 
 tions. The Director holds the heads of the major 
 operating units responsible for the quality of the 
 work done in their organizations and for its 
 reporting. The Bureau-wide editorial review boards 
 are a part of the process of technical, policy, and 
 editorial review employed by management to help 
 ensure the quality of NBS reporting. 
 
 Membership of the Boards: 
 
 A. Washington Editorial Review Board (WERB) 
 
 • The Washington Editorial Review Board shall 
 consist of the Chairperson, one representative of 
 each center of each major operating unit, and up to 
 three "at large" members to ensure that necessary 
 competences are available to facilitate the work of 
 the Board (e.g., statistical analysis). 
 
 • The Chairperson of the Board is appointed by 
 the Director, and is expected to have a broad 
 knowledge of the Bureau's mission and goals, its 
 technical programs, and the channels of communica- 
 tion used to distribute the Bureau's output. 
 
 • Each Center Director, shall designate a represen- 
 tative, who shall be appointed a member of WERB 
 by the Chairperson. The Chairperson may appoint 
 up to three additional members to obtain necessary 
 expertise. 
 
 • Each member shall serve for 2 years and may be 
 reappointed by mutual consent. Terms shall be 
 staggered to assure maximum continuity and shall 
 begin at the beginning of each fiscal year. Half of 
 the initial appointments, beginning in FY 1979, shall 
 be for a period of 3 years to obtain the desired 
 staggering. 
 
 • The Chief, Technical Information and Publica- 
 tions Division, shall serve as an ex-officio member 
 of WERB, and a member of the TIPD staff shall 
 serve as Executive Secretary. 
 
 B. Boulder Editorial Review Board (BERB) 
 
 • The Boulder Editorial Review Board shall 
 consist of one representative of each division, plus 
 up to two additional members to ensure that needed 
 competences are available. 
 
 • Each Center Director to whom the Boulder 
 divisions report shall designate a representative 
 of each division, who shall be appointed BERB 
 members by the Director, NBS Boulder Laboratories. 
 
 • The Chairperson, BERB, will be appointed by 
 the Director of the Boulder Laboratories with the 
 concurrence of the Directors of NML and NEL. 
 
 • Each member of BERB shall serve for 2 years 
 and may be reappointed by mutual consent. Terms 
 shall be staggered to assure continuity. 
 
 • The Chief, Program Information Office, will 
 serve as an ex-officio member. 
 
 Exhibit 1-A 
 
1-15 
 
 C. JILA Editorial Review Board (JERB) 
 
 • The Editorial Review Board of the Joint 
 Institute for Laboratory Astrophysics (JILA) shall 
 consists of the Chief of the Quantum Physics Division 
 plus three additional persons, all of whom may be, 
 but do not necessarily have to be, NBS employees 
 assigned to JILA. One or two may be on the staff of 
 the University of Colorado. 
 
 • The Chairperson and members of JERB are 
 appointed by the Chief of the Quantum Physics Divi- 
 sion with the concurrence of the Director of the Center 
 for Absolute Physical Quantities and the Director of 
 the Boulder Laboratories. 
 
 • Each member of JERB shall serve for 2 years 
 and may be reappointed by mutual consent. Terms 
 shall be staggered to assure continuity. 
 
 Functions of the Editorial Review Boards: 
 
 • The editorial review boards shall conduct techni- 
 cal, policy, and editorial review of all technical 
 manuscripts and letters to the editor for which at 
 least one NBS person is an author, if the work is 
 considered to be "official writing." In special cir- 
 cumstances, other manuscripts may also be 
 reviewed (e.g., those reporting on work done under 
 contract to NBS). If, in the judgment of the board, 
 legal review is also needed, the board will request 
 such review from the office of the NBS Legal 
 Adviser. 
 
 • With appropriate consultation with designated 
 representatives of the MOU offices, the editorial 
 review boards shall develop procedures for review 
 of the Bureau's technical output. 
 
 • Policy issues which arise within the activities of 
 the editorial review boards shall be resolved by the 
 Chairperson of the Washington Editorial Review 
 Board, who will seek guidance from the Director, if 
 existing policy guidelines are not adequate. 
 
 • The editorial review boards shall review papers 
 nominated for the E. U. Condon Award for 
 Distinguished Writing and submit recommendations 
 on the winner for consideration by the Director. 
 
 • The review boards shall review and note notices 
 and abstracts of talks, and other technical informa- 
 tion outputs of NBS to assure technical accuracy 
 and adherence to NBS policies. 
 
 • Papers, reports, and other technical writings 
 which have satisfactorily passed the review 
 procedures established by the editorial review 
 boards shall be released by the Chairperson of the 
 appropriate board for publication or for the 
 intended distribution outside NBS. 
 
 • Information releases and responses to the media 
 and the general public are the responsibility of the 
 Public Information Division, operating under 
 different review and approval procedures. 
 
 Approved March 12, 1979 
 
 ^ )ijli. 
 
 Exhibit 1-B. Bureau-Wide Advisory Boards for Periodicals 
 
 1. Board of Editors for Journal of Research of the 
 National Bureau of Standards — Established April 
 1977 to oversee and direct the selection and 
 acquisition of articles for the Journal of Research of 
 the National Bureau of Standards, and to provide 
 guidance to authors with respect to content and 
 form. ' 
 
 2. DIMENSIONS/NBS— Advisory Board— Estab- 
 lished to guide the staff of DIMENSIONS in 
 coverage of Bureau activities and selection of tech- 
 nical staff members to write feature articles and 
 editorials. ' 
 
 3. NBS Standard Advisory Committee — Estab- 
 lished in the 1960's to provide policy guidance for 
 
 the editor of the Standard and regular review and 
 evaluation of the newsletter, i 
 
 4. The Board of Editors of the Journal of Physical 
 and Chemical Reference Data shall consist of: (a) an 
 Editor-in-Chief appointed by NBS; (b) three board 
 members appointed by AIP; (c) three board 
 members appointed by ACS; and (d) three board 
 members appointed by NBS. The Board of Editors 
 of the Journal shall meet at least once each year. It 
 shall advis? the Editor-in-Chief on matters of 
 editorial policy and may be called upon to assist in 
 reviewing manuscripts. 
 
 'Charters for these periodicals appear in the NBS Administra- 
 tive Manual, 3.01 Appendix A. 
 
 Exhibit 1-B 
 
1-16 
 
 Exhibit 1-C. The Path to Publication for Scientific and Technical Papers — Gaithersburg 
 
 © 
 
 > 
 
 E 
 
 © 
 
 u 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 most common route 
 alternate route 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 il 
 
 © 
 
 2 <« 
 
 ii 
 
 ' ® 
 
 Compatible automated copy elec- 
 tronically typeset by TIPD and 
 GPO. Author reviews and 
 approves proofs. 
 
 1 
 
 © 
 
 1 
 
 
 Author prepares manuscript; re- 
 views it for content and style; 
 selects place of publication; and 
 completes Forms NBS-114 and 
 114A. Manuscript receives critical 
 review by author's immediate 
 supervisor(s). 
 
 I 
 
 Manuscript and forms submitted 
 for center/division management 
 and technical review, or as other- 
 wise prescribed by center director. 
 
 I 
 
 Manuscript and forms submitted 
 to Washington Editorial Review 
 Board (WERE). WERE assigns 
 reader and sponsor (WERE 
 member) who complete Form 
 NES-214 and sign Forms 
 NBS-214 and 114 to signify 
 approval. WERE also initiates 
 Manuscript Custody Transfer 
 form to track manuscript during 
 WERE process. 
 
 I 
 
 WERE members review reader/ 
 sponsor action and approve man- 
 uscript. WERE releases manu- 
 script for publication in desig- 
 nated medium. 
 
 I 
 
 Author makes final changes in 
 manuscript, if required, and sub- 
 mits for publication. 
 
 I 
 
 Technical Information and Pub- 
 lications Division (TIPD) coordi- 
 nates publication in an NES 
 series produced by the Govern- 
 ment Printing Office (GPO). 
 
 MI 
 
 Manuscript copy edited by TIPD 
 and typeset by GPO. 
 Author reviews and approves 
 proofs. 
 
 I 
 
 TIPD coordinates final printing, 
 delivery, distribution, sales by 
 GPO and NTIS, etc. 
 
 For further information on the review, 
 approval, and publication process see 
 exhibit 1-E and the following sections. 
 CD section 1.3.3 (for guideline on 
 writing see ch. 2) 
 
 t section 1.3.4 
 section 1.3.5 
 sections 1.3.6, 1.3.7, 1.3.8, or 
 __1. 3^10^ for special procedures 
 
 ) section 1.3.9 
 section 1.5.3(2) and table 3-1 
 sections 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, and table 3-1 
 section 3.7.1 
 section 3.7.2 
 section 3.8 
 section 1.1 and table 3-1 
 
 Manuscript and forms submitted 
 to center and/or MOU director 
 under special circumstances 
 (foreign medium or new stand- 
 ard data). 
 
 If paper is for NES Journal of 
 Research, approval by editor is 
 required. 
 
 © 
 
 — ► 
 
 © 
 
 Author deals directly with outside 
 journal on acceptance, review 
 and approval of proofs, page 
 charges, and reprints, etc. 
 
 Printing and Duplicating co- 
 ordinates production of NESIR's 
 (reports to sponsors). Author 
 submits typewritten camera-ready 
 copy. 
 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy 
 reviewed for quality & complete- 
 ness by TIPD and produced 
 by GPO. 
 
 Exhibit 1-C 
 
1-17 
 
 Exhibit 1-D. The Path to PubHcation for Scientific and Technical Papers — Boulder 
 
 0^ 
 
 ■a 
 
 > 
 
 e 
 
 T 
 
 Time: 
 
 Typically 
 
 1 week 
 
 i 
 
 If manuscript is for 
 NBS Journal of 
 Research, approval by 
 the editor is required. 
 
 ° i 
 
 o o 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Manuscript (Special 
 Publications, Mono- 
 graphs, and Hand- 
 books) copy-edited by 
 TIPD and typeset by 
 GPO, Wash., DC. 
 or 
 
 Compatible automated 
 copy electronically type- 
 set by TIPD and GPO, 
 Wash., DC. 
 Author reviews and 
 approves proofs. 
 
 I 
 
 TIPD coordinates final 
 printing, delivery, distri- 
 bution, and sales by 
 GPO and NTIS. 
 
 Author prepares manuscript; 
 selects medium of publication, 
 and prepares NBS-114 and 114A. 
 Manuscript receives review and 
 approval at the group level. 
 
 I 
 
 Author, group leader, and 
 sponsor jointly select two 
 readers. One reader serves as 
 center/ division reader and is 
 selected according to center/ 
 division policy. The other 
 reader serves as BERB reader and 
 is selected according to the 
 BERB policy. 
 
 I 
 
 Manuscript, along with form 
 BL-7A, is submitted to each 
 reader. Author responds to 
 readers' comments as 
 appropriate. 
 
 I 
 
 Division chief examines manu- 
 script and results of reviews and 
 approves submission to BERB. 
 
 I 
 
 BERB members review manu- 
 script and reader/sponsor 
 comments and recommend 
 action. Chairman releases manu- 
 script for publication by memo 
 to author through division 
 chief 
 
 I 
 
 Author makes final changes in 
 manuscript, if required, and 
 submits for publication. 
 
 I 
 
 Program Information Office 
 (PIO) coordinates publication in 
 an NBS series. 
 
 I 
 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy 
 (Special Publications, Mono- 
 graphs, and Handbooks) 
 reviewed for quality and 
 completeness by TIPD and 
 produced by GPO, Wash., DC. 
 
 f 
 
 PIO coordinates delivery, distri- 
 bution, and sales by GPO and 
 NTIS. 
 
 For further information on the 
 
 review, approval, and publication 
 
 process see exhibit 1-E, section 1.3, 
 
 and chapter 3 
 
 Under special circum- 
 stances (e.g., foreign 
 medium, new standard 
 data, etc.), manuscript 
 and forms submitted to 
 center, MOU, or 
 Director, NBS/ 
 Boulder Labs. 
 
 If BERB judges that 
 prior review has not 
 been adequate, an addi- 
 tional reader will be 
 assigned. 
 
 1 
 
 Typewritten camera- 
 ready copy (NBSIR's, 
 Tech Notes, and Letter 
 Circulars) reviewed for 
 quality and completeness 
 by PIO and produced 
 by GPO, Denver, CO. 
 
 Author deals directly 
 with outside journal on 
 acceptance, review, 
 approval of proofs, 
 page charges, reprints, 
 etc. 
 
 Exhibit 1-D 
 
1-18 
 
 Exhibit l-E(a). Manuscript Review and Approval, Form NBS-114 
 
 MBS-114 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 "rev 2-«OI NATIONAL BU RE Au O F ST AN D AR DS 
 
 
 
 
 MANUSCRIPT REVIEW AND APPROVAL 
 
 
 
 3. NBS Publication No. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS: Attach original and 1 copy (photocopy) of this form to 
 
 
 one copy of manuscript and send to: The Secretary, appropriate Editorial 
 
 4. 
 
 Total ms. pgs. ( 
 
 ncl. tables) 
 
 Review Board. Comolete form oer instructions on reverse side. 
 
 
 L TITLE OF PAPER; 
 
 no. arawiRBS/Dnoios 
 
 No. of DBS. camera readv codv 
 
 Is manuscript in automated form' 
 
 
 5. Patent review 
 
 □ In process [ 1 Not required 
 
 2. Author(s), include title and affiliation. If NBS, 
 give Organizational Code No. and Tele. ExL 
 
 Signature (of submitting NBS 
 author; see Instruction 2) 
 
 Date 
 
 6. RECOMMENDED FOR N BS PUBLICATION 
 (Definitions: NBS Manual) 
 
 
 
 
 □ Journal of Research (NBS J RES) 
 
 □ J. Phys. & Chem. Ref. Data (JPCRD) 
 
 
 
 
 □ Handbool<(NBSHB) 
 
 □ Special Publication (NBS SP) (If NBS pro- 
 
 
 
 
 ceedings, cite in full following title) 
 □ Applied Mathematics Series ( N BS AMS) 
 
 
 
 
 □ Technical Note (NBS TN) 
 
 □ Monograph (NBS MN) 
 
 
 
 
 □ Natl. Std. Ref. Data Series (NBS NSRDS) 
 
 □ Building Science Series (NBS BSS) 
 
 
 
 
 □ Federal Info. Process. Stds. (NBS FIPS) 
 
 □ Consumer Information Series (NBS CIS) 
 
 
 
 
 1 [Product Standards (NBS PS) 
 
 [:;;]Letter Circular (NBS LC) 
 
 7. APPROVAL (Per instruction 7; type or 
 print name) 
 
 Signature 
 
 Date 
 
 □ List of Publications (NBS LP) 
 
 □ NBS Interagency/lnternal RepL (NBSIR) 
 
 Division/Office Chief 
 
 
 
 □ Check if restricted per sponsor request 
 (Re: Item 13, Form NBS-114A) 
 RECOMMENDED FOR NON-NBS PUBLICATION: 
 1 1 U.S. Publication □ Foreign 
 CITE FULLY 
 
 Division/Center Reader 
 
 
 
 
 Center Director 
 
 
 
 
 S. MOD Director Approval (If required. See instruction 8) 
 
 Date 
 
 9. ERB MANUSCRIPT CUSTODY TRANSFER (see reverse) 
 
 
 Date 
 
 From 
 
 To 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 10. EDITORIAL BOARD 
 
 Signature 
 
 Date 
 
 
 Reader 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Reader 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Reader 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sponsor 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sponsor 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11. EDITORIAL BOARD MEMBERS 
 
 12. J. RES., JPCRD. or NBS-NSRDS EDITOR 
 APPROVAL (Signature and date) 
 
 13. RELEASED FOR PUBLICATION (Signature of 
 
 
 authorized official and date) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Note: Forms 1 14, 1 14A, and 214 are used by Gaithersburg staff; Forms 1 14, 1 14A, and BL-7A (see ex. l-E(d)) by Boulder 
 Staff. 
 
 Exhibit l-E(a) 
 
1-19 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING FORMS 
 
 FORM HB$-n4: MANUSCRIPT REVIEW AND APPROVAL 
 
 1. Give the title in full as it Is to appear when the paper Is published. 
 
 2. List all authors in the order in which they are to appear in the published paper. Only one sijnature of an NBS 
 author is required, but the signing author thereby acknowledges that manuscript approval has been obtained from 
 the other listed authors. 
 
 3. Leave blank. This will be filled in by the Technical Information and Publications Division. 
 
 4. This information is helpful in processing the manuscript and in assuring that no parts of it are inadvertently 
 ornitted (manuscripts in automated form may be converted to typeset copy if desired). 
 
 5. This space is to remind the author<s) and their supervisors to make a conscious decision on the desirability of 
 filing a patent application. NBS staff members are encouraged to seek patent coverage of appropriate new 
 developments. 
 
 6. Select the appropriate publication medium after careful consideration of the desired audience (see NBS Com- 
 
 municot/ons Manual for guidance). 
 
 7. At least one management signature and at least one technical review signature at the Center or Division level 
 are needed. Editorial procedures for achieving this requirement are determined by the Center Director consistent 
 with MOU policies. In addition, the Center Director's (or the NBS Boulder Director's) signature is required for 
 publication in a foreign medium. 
 
 S. The MOU Director's signature is needed only for papers that report new values of, or methods for determination 
 of basic physical standards or fundamental constants, or that report material likely to draw conspicuous public 
 attention to NBS. 
 
 9. Manuscript custody, or tracking record, reflects routing and dates during the editorial review process after sub- 
 mission to the appropriate ERB. 
 
 10, 11. For ERB use. ERB normally assigns one reader and one sponsor (ERB member) to each paper. After review, 
 papers are returned to ERB for final review and approval by members. 
 
 12. This space is for approval by an editor of certain NBS publications. These publications are the NBS Journal of 
 Research, JPCRD, and the NBS-NSRDS series. 
 
 13. Authority to release papers for publication has been delegated by the Director to the Chairperson of the appro- 
 priate ERB. If ERB is unable to approve the paper for publication, the author will be advised of an appeal 
 mechanism. 
 
 FORM NBS-114A: BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA SHEET. This bibliographic data sheet meets the standards adopted for use 
 by all U.S. Government agencies. It is needed for NTIS processing and must accompany all NBS papers, those appear- 
 ing in nongovernmental media as well as those in NBS series, since all reports of NBS technical work are normally 
 entered into the N TIS system. For all GPO publications, it becomes an integral part of the document and is widely used 
 by librarians and abstractors. 
 
 Items 1, 2 -Complete if information is available; otherwise Publications Office will complete later. Ifnon-NBS 
 publication, state "see item 10" (enter other agency sponsor's report number if requested to do so, and 
 enter NBSIR number under item 2). 
 
 Item 3 — Complete if known; otherwise Publications Office will complete. 
 
 Items 4, 5 — Complete as shown on manuscript. When NBS-I I4A is resubmitted along with NBS-266, following pub- 
 lication of non-NBS media papers, these items must agree with published paper. 
 
 Item 6 — If not NBS, blank out and enter Grantee/Contractor name and address, or if performed jointly, show both. 
 
 Item 7 — Complete when applicable. 
 
 Item 8 — Enter "Interim", "Final", or period covered. 
 
 Item 9 — Enter all sponsors' names and addresses. Include NBS if also a sponsor. 
 
 Item 10 — Enter other relevant information. I.e., related or superseded documents. Also used by Publications 
 
 Office for Library of Congress catalog number, and entry of non-NBS media citation upon receipt of Form 
 NBS-266 from author. Check block if appropriate and attach SF 185. 
 
 Items 11, 12 — Prepare abstract and key words with special care. These are published separately by NBS, NTIS, and 
 other bibliographic services, and are vital elements in guiding readers to your paper. The key words will 
 be used as entries in a subject index (see NBS Communicolions Manual for additional guidance). 
 
 Item 13 — Indicate "Unlimited" — for open-literature documents cleared under NBS editorial procedures, or "For 
 
 official distribution. Do not release to NTIS." — for limited, restricted, or need-to-know material (see 
 NBS Communications Monuol). Publications Office will mark appropriate "order" box and complete 
 
 Stock Number when known. 
 
 Items 14, 15 — Leave blank. To be completed by Publications Office or Printing and Duplicating for NBSIR's. 
 
 Back side NBS-1 14— Instructions for completing NBS-114 and NBS-114A (on next page). 
 
 Exhibit l-E(a) (cont.) 
 
1-20 
 
 Exhibit l-E(b). Bibliographic Data S'heet, Form NBS-1 14A 
 
 (see instructions on previous page) 
 
 NBS-114A IREV. 2-6CI 
 
 U.S. OEPT. OF COMM. 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA 
 
 SHEET (See instructions) 
 
 1. PUBLICATION OR 
 REPORT NO. 
 
 2. Performing Organ. Report No. 3. Publication Date 
 
 4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 
 
 5. AUTHOR(S) 
 
 6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other thon NBS, see instructions) 
 
 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 
 DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 WASHINGTON, D.C. 20234 
 
 7. Contract/Grant No. 
 
 S. Type of Report & Period Covered 
 
 9. SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS (Street. City, State, ZIP) 
 
 10. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES 
 
 QJ Document describes a computer program; SF-185, FIPS Software Summary, is attached. 
 
 11. ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most significant information. If document includes a significant 
 bibliography or literature survey, mention it here) 
 
 12. KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries; o/phabeticoi order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words by semicolons) 
 
 13. AVAILABILITY 
 
 Q3I Unlimited 
 
 I I For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS 
 
 I I Order From Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 
 20402. 
 
 {2Zi Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. 22161 
 
 14. NO. OF 
 
 PRINTED PAGES 
 
 15. Price 
 
 USCOMM-DC 6043-PeO 
 
 Exhibit l-E(b) 
 
1-21 
 
 Exhibit l-E(c). Manuscript Evaluation, Gaithersburg Only, Form NBS-214 
 
 NBS-214 
 
 (REV. 9-78) 
 
 MANUSCRIPT EVALUATION 
 NBS Editorial Review Board (ERB) 
 (Optional for Division/Center Use) 
 
 To; (Reader s name and address) 
 
 ERB CONTROL NO. 
 
 From: 
 
 Rfiturn To; (Sponsor' s name and address) 
 
 P lease review the attached manuscript for technical content and quality of expression. In addition, statements interpreted to be in conflict with 
 established NBS policies should be noted. You are urged to discuss suggestions for revisions directly with the author. You may wish, how- 
 ever, to remain anonymous. If so, you may discuss the manuscript with the Secretary of ERB, or with the sponsor of the paper, or return it with 
 your written comments. Please complete your review promptly and return the form and attachments within two weeks or sooner, if possible. Your 
 assistance is much appreciated by the Editorial Review Board and the NBS managers who are held responsible for the quality of publication. 
 
 READER'S CHECKLIST: The following items are listed to assist you in reviewing the attached manuscript. 
 
 1. General Value: Clear statement of the problem, the methodology, 
 the analysis, and the conclusions. 
 
 2. Manner of Presentation: Informative title, statements of accuracy 
 and precision adequately expressed, concise captions for tables 
 and figures, sufficient literature citations, and appropriate quanti- 
 ties and values expressed in SI units. 
 
 3. Abstract and Key Words: Abstract should be succinct statement 
 of the purpose and conclusions of the paper and be informative 
 enough to be published independent of the paper. Keywords or 
 phrases should be suitable for subject indexing. 
 
 4. NBS Policy: Should not be in conflict with current NBS policy. 
 
 5. Proposed place of publication appropriate. 
 
 6. See NBS Communications Manual for more detailed guidance. 
 
 I recommend the following action for this manuscript 
 
 Q Approve 
 
 [3] Approve: Suggested changes to be considered by the author(s) 
 
 [ I Approve: Changes have been agreed to by the author(s) 
 
 Q Approve only if specified changes are made 
 
 I I Refer to another reader 
 
 [ I Do not approve I'/'/ease comment below) 
 
 [ I Recommend for an award. The paper is found to be 
 (Good - excellent - worthy of distinction) for 
 (Technical content - quality of exposition - both) 
 (Please circle appropriately and comment below) 
 
 Comments: (With attachments if necessary) 
 
 Reader (Signature here and on NBS-IH) 
 
 Date 
 
 SPONSOR'S COMMENTS: I recommend the following action(s) for this manuscript 
 
 \^ Approve □ Recommend that it be considered for an award Q Re'ef to another reader 
 
 I I Do not approve for the following reasons: (Comments with attachments ij necessary) 
 
 SfXinsoi (Signature here and on SBS-1 14) 
 
 Date 
 
 Exhibit l-E(c) 
 
1-22 
 
 Exhibit l-E(d). Boulder Editorial Review Form, Form BL-7A 
 
 Form BL-7A 
 (Rev 11/79) 
 
 NBS Boulder Editorial Review Form 
 
 BERB Control No: 
 
 U. S. Department of Commerce 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Boulder, Colorado 80303 
 (303) 499-1000 
 
 SECTION I : (To be completed before submitting for review) 
 
 Manuscript Title 
 
 Author's Name($) 
 
 
 Div. or Affiliation 
 
 Room 
 
 Extension 
 
 BERB Sponsor's Name 
 
 
 
 Room 
 
 Extension 
 
 Intended Medium of Publication 
 
 Name and Affiliation of Reviewer 
 
 This review is for | | the Division 
 
 1 1 Editorial Review Board 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION II: Instructions to Reviewer 
 
 Please answer all questions in SECTIONS III and IV by marking the appropriate boxes and adding comiTients as needed. Additional 
 comments may be written on the manuscript or on a separate sheet. If you wish you may discuss the review with the author. This 
 
 completed form, along with the manuscript, should be returned to the Sponsor by , 19 . If the review will take 
 
 longer, please notify the sponsor or author immediately. 
 
 Thank you for your cooperation and willingness to serve as a reviewer. 
 
 Page 1 of Boulder Review Form 
 Exhibit l-E(d) 
 
1-23 
 
 SECTION III: 
 
 1. Judge the significance of this work. Major Significance Significant Minor Significance 
 
 Ds n^ n^ n^ n^ 
 
 Explanation: 
 
 2. Judge the interest that this paper will arouse in the technical community. General Special 
 
 Explanation: [^5 Q4 Qs (^2 f"! 1 
 
 3. Is the proposed medium of publication appropriate? Q yes Q Another preferred Q No 
 
 Explanation: 
 
 4. Is the paper technically sound and reliable? Q Yes Q Minor deficiencies Q Major deficiencies Q Can't determine 
 Explanation: 
 
 5. Is the relationship to other work given so that the authors contribution Q yes □ Improvement Suggested Q No 
 
 may be seen in proper perspective? 
 
 Explanation: 
 
 Page 2 of Boulder Review Form 
 
 Exhibit l-E(d) (cont.) 
 
1-24 
 
 Exhibit l-E(d). Boulder Editorial Review Form, Form BL-7A — Continued 
 
 SECTION III (Cont.) 
 
 6. Judge the quality of presentation. 
 
 (Examples; Is it well organized, clear, and self-contained? 
 
 Is it free from specialized jargon? Are conclusions clearly stated?) 
 
 Explanation: 
 
 Outstanding Satisfactory Inadequate 
 
 n^ n^ n3 n^ n^ 
 
 7. Are the title and abstract clear, concise, and complete? 
 Explanation: 
 
 I I Yes I I Improvements Suggested I I 
 
 No 
 
 8. Is the preparation of the manuscript adequate? 
 
 (including figures, tables, captions, references) 
 Explanation: 
 
 Dves D 
 
 Improvements Suggested 
 
 D 
 
 No 
 
 9. Are there any controversial aspects to this manuscript that 
 should be carefully considered before publication? 
 
 Explanation: 
 
 D 
 
 Yes 
 
 n 
 
 Possibly 
 
 D 
 
 No 
 
 Page 3 of Boulder Review Form 
 Exhibit I-E(d) (cortL)'^-^ 
 
1-25 
 
 SECTION III (Cont.) 
 
 10. Recommendation 
 
 I I Publication in present form in proposed medium (changes at the discretion of the author) 
 
 I I Publication with ^J indicated revisions |^ change in medium 
 
 I I Revision and further review 
 
 I I Rejection 
 
 Additional comments: 
 
 SECTION IV: 
 
 1. What is your degree of familiarity with the subject? 
 
 Expert Knowledgeable Uninformed 
 
 Ds n^ n^ n^ n^ 
 
 2. Are there any aspects of this manuscript that you were unable to review adequately? 
 Specify: 
 
 \~] Yes Q No 
 
 3. Have you discussed this review with the author? 
 Comments: 
 
 I I Yes Q No 
 
 Signature of Reviewer 
 
 Date 
 
 Page 4 of Boulder Review Form 
 
 Exhibit l-E(d) (cont.) 
 
1-26 
 
 Exhibit l-E(e). Publications Followup Office Record, Form NBS-265 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 NBS-265 U, S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 
 (R»v. 8-721 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 
 
 PUBLICATIONS FOUOW-UP OFFICE RECORD 
 (Read Instructions below before completing this form) 
 
 AUTHORISI 
 
 
 TITLE OF MANUSCRIPT 
 
 COST CENTER 
 
 TORE PUBLISHED IN INKS PUBLICATION OR OUTSIDE JOURNAL) 
 
 PUBLICATION REFERENCE 
 
 JOURNAL OR NBS PUBLICATION 
 
 FOLLOW UP DATES 
 
 VOL. 
 
 NO 
 
 PAGES DATE 
 
 ALL PUBLICATIONS 
 
 OUTSIDE PUBLICATIONS 
 
 TO DIVISION OFFICE OR DIVISION 
 READER 
 
 SENT TO OUTSIDE JOURNAL 
 
 REPRINT INFORMATION 
 
 DATE ORDERED 
 
 QUANTITY 
 
 DIRECTOR'S APPROVAL TO PUBLISH 
 
 ' Ar-r-cDTcn i RETURNED OR 
 
 ACCEntD _| REJECTED 
 
 DATE 2 COPIES SENT TO 
 OTIP 
 
 DATE OlST TO SPONSOR 
 
 PROOFS RECEIVED 
 
 n, 
 
 OTIP NOTIFtEO OF PUBLICATION 
 lUSE NSS 2661 
 
 OTHER DIST, 
 
 NOTES: 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS: Initiate this form at the same tmie vou prepare NBS-114, Editorial Record, ar>d use it as a check-list and record of 
 date, reprint and publication information. After tf>e article is published, tfie form will serve as a record of publications by authors. 
 PUBLICATION IN OUTSIDE JOURNALS ONLY As soon as volume, number, page numbers and date of publication are known, send 
 form NBS-266. Notification of Publication m Non-NBS Journal, to Office of Technical Information and Publications. If article is not 
 published, inform the Editorial Committee by memorandum, attaching correspondence. 
 
 
 USCOMM-NBS-OC 
 
 
 Note: Originating units use NBS-265 to record status of papers from manuscript to publication. NBS-266 is used to notify 
 TIPD that an outside paper has been pubUshed along with complete citation information and copies of the paper. See also 
 section 1.3.4. 
 
 Exhibit l-E(e) 
 
1-27 
 
 Exhibit l-E(f). Notice of Publication in Non-NBS Media, Form NBS-266 
 
 NBS-26e 
 
 (R*v. 6-80) 
 
 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 NOTICE OF PUBLICATION IN NON-NBS MEDIA 
 
 Send this completed notice to Publications/Production Office, Room A-607, Administration Building immediately after the article appears in print, 
 along with NBS-1 14A, "Bibliographic Data Sheet". If abstract or summary on the published paper has changed since WERB approval, be sure 
 abstract shown on NBS-1 14A agrees with published abstract. NOTE: Please expedite this notice so that NBS citation records may reflect the 
 Bureau's publication output as promptly as possible. 
 
 Author(s): (Give authors and new organizational number in the same order as shown in the article, e.g., WE. Smith, 345, R.S. Jones, 502, etc.) 
 
 Title of Article 
 
 Medium: 
 
 D Journal 
 
 a Book 
 
 D Book Chapter 
 
 D Encyclopedia 
 Article 
 
 TITLE OF BOOK, JOURNAL OR PERIODICAL 
 
 VOLUME 
 
 (IF APPLICABLE) 
 
 ISSUE NUMBER 
 (IF APPLICABLE) 
 
 PAGE NUMBERS 
 (INCLUSIVE) 
 
 Chapter No. 
 
 DATE OF PUBUCATION 
 
 IF BOOK, NAME OF PUBLISHER AND ADDRESS (CrTY/STATE OR TOWN/COUNTRY) 
 
 D Conference 
 Proceedings 
 
 NOTE: Complete upper bk>cks 
 and/or lower blocks as applicable. 
 (In many instances. Proceedings 
 are also published in a book with 
 a different title.) If Book. Con- 
 ference/Proceedings information is 
 confusing, attach Xerox copy of 
 preliminary pages with reprints. 
 
 FUU NAME OF CONFERENCE/PROCEEDINGS 
 
 PLACE HELD (Cmc/STATE OR TOWN/COUNTRY) 
 
 NAME OF PUBLISHER AND ADDRESS (CrTY/STATE OR TOWN/COUNTRY) 
 
 PAGE NUMBERS 
 (INCLUSIVE) 
 
 DATE OF CONFERENCE 
 (MO., DAV(S). YR.) 
 
 DATE OF PUBUCATION 
 
 Reprints 
 
 D TWO ATTACHED 
 
 D XEROX ATTACHED, Wia SEND REPRINTS LATER. 
 
 Notice Prepared By 
 
 Date 
 
 Remarks 
 
 FOR PRODUCTION USE ONLY 
 
 Notice Received (Date) 
 
 NTIS Notified (Date) 
 
 USCOMM-NBS-DC 
 
 Exhibit 1-E(f) 
 
1-28 
 
 Exhibit l-E(g). PID Clearance, Form NBS-50 
 
 NBS50 
 
 (Rev 10-80) 
 
 EXPEDITE 
 
 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 PUBLIC INFORMATION DIVISION CLEARANCE 
 
 NATURE OF MATERIAL 
 
 INTENDED AUDIENCE: Technical or Trade 
 SUBJECT 
 
 General 
 
 PROPOSED RELEASE TIME 
 PREPARED BY 
 
 DATE 
 
 ROUTING 
 
 APPROVAL 
 
 NAME OR OFFICE 
 
 BLDG. AND ROOM 
 
 ORG. CODE NO. 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 DATE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 COMMENTS: 
 
 Front side: Review and approval record 
 
 Exhibit 1-E(g) 
 
1-29 
 
 
 Public Information Division 
 
 
 
 Distribution 
 
 
 Technical and Trade Press 
 
 
 
 Code Category 
 
 Code Category 
 
 100 
 
 Building Technology (186) 
 
 114 
 
 Materials (216) 
 
 
 A Construction & Standards (127) 
 
 
 A Ceramics & Glass (17) 
 
 
 B Air Conditioning, Heating, Refrigeration 
 
 
 B Chemical (47) 
 
 
 & Plumbing (20) 
 
 
 C General (13) 
 
 
 C Architecture (20) 
 
 
 D Metals Trade & Mining (51) 
 
 
 D Select (18) 
 
 
 E Paints, Inks & Printing (17) 
 
 101 
 
 Business, Financial & Government (216) 
 
 
 F Paper, Packaging, & Lumber (37) 
 
 
 A General Business & Management (86) 
 B General Industrial (37) 
 
 
 G Plastics & Polymers (16) 
 H Textiles (18) 
 
 
 C Municipal & Government (68) 
 
 115 
 
 Photography (16) 
 
 
 D Select (25) 
 
 
 
 
 
 116 
 
 Publications Centers (57) 
 
 102 
 
 Computers & Information Processing (129) 
 
 
 
 
 A General (125) 
 
 117 
 
 Science (154) 
 
 
 B Select (4) 
 
 
 A General (102) 
 
 B Mathematics & Statistics (3) 
 
 103 
 
 Consumer Products & Safety (139) 
 
 
 C Physics (10) 
 
 
 A General Consumer & Safety (26) 
 
 
 D Marine & Oceanography (9) 
 
 
 8 Safety (15) 
 
 
 E Atmosphere & Meteorology (6) 
 
 
 C Fire Safety (38) 
 
 
 F Sound & Acoustics (7) 
 
 
 D Law Enforcement (34) 
 
 
 G Cryogenics (10) 
 
 
 E Clothing, Furnishings, Stores (26) 
 
 
 H Nuclear Science (7) 
 
 104 
 
 Ecology & Environment (43) 
 
 118 
 
 Transportation (27) 
 
 
 A General (34) 
 
 
 A Automotive (24) 
 
 
 B Water Supply & Pollution (4) 
 
 
 B Aviation & Aerospace (1) 
 
 
 C Solid Waste (5) 
 
 
 C Miscellaneous (2) 
 
 105 
 
 Education (47) 
 
 119 
 
 Miscellaneous (13) 
 
 106 
 
 Electronics (85) 
 
 
 A Operations Research (5) 
 
 
 A General (59) 
 
 
 B Metric (8) 
 
 
 B Optical (11) 
 C Select (15) 
 
 120 
 
 International Standards Organization (3) 
 
 107 
 
 Engineering (149) 
 
 
 General Press 
 
 
 A General (38) 
 
 B Electrical & Lighting (19) 
 
 C Educators (80) 
 
 D Select (12) 
 
 200 
 
 Consumer (971) 
 
 A Writers (445) 
 B Radio-TV (472) 
 C Select (54) 
 
 108 
 
 Food & Food Processing (48) 
 
 203 
 
 Environmental Writers (131) 
 
 109 
 
 Fuels & Energy (145) 
 
 A Production (60) 
 
 204 
 
 Foreign Press (195) 
 
 
 B Conservation & Solar (30) 
 
 205 
 
 General Science Writers (400) 
 
 
 C General (40) 
 
 
 A General (352) 
 
 
 D Select (15) 
 
 
 B Select (48) 
 
 110 
 
 Health Related (72) 
 
 A General Medicine (56) 
 
 206 
 
 Local Media (101) 
 
 
 B Dental (11) 
 
 207 
 
 Medical (146) 
 
 
 C Hospitals (5) 
 
 
 Other 
 
 111 
 
 Instrumentation (25) 
 
 
 
 
 
 300 
 
 DOC Offices (330) 
 
 112 
 
 Machinery (33) 
 
 
 
 
 
 301 
 
 PlO-Other Agencies (24) 
 
 
 
 303 
 
 NBS-Gailhersburg (126) 
 NBS-Boulder 
 
 
 
 
 Miscellaneous 
 
 Back side: Media distribution record 
 
 Exhibit l-E(g) (cotit.) 
 
1-30 
 
 Exhibit l-E(h). Notice of Talk, Form NBS- 1 1 8 
 (see next page for review procedures) 
 
 NBS-118 
 
 <REV. 2-eu) 
 
 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 
 
 NOTICE OF TALK 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS - Use this form to notify the appropriate Editorial Review Board 
 of proposed talks by NBS staff members to outside groups, and to provide necessary 
 information for listing in the NBS Technicalendar and the BL Weekly Bulletin of talks 
 to be listed. (Set revtrsu for NBS policy and further defails.) , 
 
 FOR USE OF EDITORIAL REVIEW BOARD 
 
 APPROVED 
 
 Talks by staff members to outside 
 groups ^^^^^__^^.^^^___ 
 
 Washington 
 Original and 2 copies to WERB c/o Publication 
 Production, Admin. Bldg., Rm. A-607 
 
 Boulder 
 Original and 5 copies to Secre- 
 tary, Editorial Review Boards. 
 
 2 weeks before talk is to be given 
 
 Talks of interest to NBS Staff for listing 
 in Technicalendar or BL Weekly 
 Bulletin. Complete Section 1 Only 
 
 Original and 1 copy to Publications 
 Production by noon Wednesday 
 
 Original to Secretary for Weekly Bulletin 
 by 10:00 A.M. Thursday 
 
 Section I 
 
 DATE OF TALK 
 
 TIME OF TALK 
 
 TITLE OF TALK 
 
 CONCISE DESCRIPTION OF SUBJECT TO BE COVERED 
 
 SPEAKER(S) AND BUSINESS ADDRESS C/nc/ude organization. II 
 NBS atafl member, tf/ve dirlalon.) 
 
 IDENTIFY MEETING AND/OR ORGANIZATION SPONSORING TALK 
 
 ADDRESS WHERE TALK WILL BE PRESENTED (II yBS, fiive building 
 and room) 
 
 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CALL (Name) 
 
 TELEPHONE 
 
 Section I 
 
 I. Will the talk be preprinted for distribution before or at the meeting? 
 
 If answer is yes - Hos the required Editorial Review Board release been obtained? 
 
 □ Yes 
 
 □ Yes 
 
 □ No 
 
 □ No 
 
 2. Will ihe talk be published (either in whole or in abstract)? 
 
 □ Yes □No 
 
 If answer is yes - (a) Where will it be published? 
 
 (b) Check One □ Paper attached for review (with Form NDS-1 14, Editorial Record). 
 
 I I Abstract attached. 
 
 □ Paper will follow (with Form NBS-114, Editorial Record). 
 
 3. Does talk involve new policy matters that mugt receive Director or DoC approval? 
 
 □ Yes 
 
 □ No 
 
 4. Will slides or other visual aids meet minimum NBS specifications (See NBS PubZ/caf/onsManua/; □ Yes I I No 
 
 5. Kor the talk, patent review is: □] In Progress 
 
 I I Requested 
 
 I I Not Required 
 
 6. COMMENTS 
 
 SIGNATURE OF SPEAKER OR UNIT CHIEF 
 
 TELEPHONE EXT. 
 
 SIGNATURE OF DIVISION CHIEF 
 
 ROOM & BLDG. NO. 
 
 uscoMM-DC eo.eoi4-Peo 
 
 Exhibit 1-E(h)..._,^ 
 
1-31 
 
 ORAL PRESENTATIONS REVIEW AND APPROVAL 
 
 R«vl*w and Approval 
 
 When you are invited to speak before an outside group, the Editorial Review Board should be 
 notified by submitting Form NBS-118, "Notice of Talk", at least ten (10) days before the talk 
 is given, and three (3) weeks if the talk is to be given outside of the Caithersburg or Boulder 
 areas.* If publication of the oral presentation is contemplated, the manuscript is subject to 
 the same review procedures as other papers. An abstract of approximately 200 words must 
 accompany the Form NBS-118 for clearance. Manuscripts and other material reproduced in any 
 form for general distribution before or during a meeting, or for any other prepublication use, must 
 be submitted to the Editorial Review Board for review or noting. The manuscripts should be 
 clearly labeled "Preliminary Draft for Discussion—not for Publication." Editorial review is 
 not required if such a manuscript is distributed to a limited number of colleagues for comments. 
 
 Transcripts of tape-recorded speeches intended for publication must also be submitted for appro- 
 priate review. You should carefully edit the transcript so as to be suitable for formal publication. 
 
 Some organizations publish abstracts of talks that are in themselves short papers. These more 
 extensive abstracts will normally be treated as papers and will be given the same type of review 
 as is given a Letter to the Editor. 
 
 This permits the listing of talks in the NBS Technicalendar in advance, when possible, to 
 advise Department of Commerce District Offices of NBS speaking engagements in their arears. 
 
 NBS-t18 <REv. 2-eoi 
 
 USCOMM-DC 80.4014.PB0 
 
 Back side NBS-118— Notice of Talk 
 
 Exhibit l-E(h) (cont.) 
 
1-32 
 
 METRIC 
 
 Exhibit 1-F. Aids to Correspondence (Selected Items) 
 
 LC 1035 Units and Systems of Weights and Measures — Their Origins, Development, and Present 
 
 Status 
 
 LC 1120 NBS Guidelines for Use of the Metric System (Reprint from DIM/NBS 12/79 with 
 
 revisions 8/80) 
 
 LC 1070 NBS Metric Information (Bibliography) 
 
 LC 1071 Factors for High-Precision Conversion — U.S. Customary and Metric Units 
 
 LC 1098 Preferred Metric Units for General Use by the Federal Government 
 
 SP 304 Modernized Metric System (Wall Chart) 
 
 SP 304A Brief History of Measurement System with Chart of Modernized Metric System 
 
 SP 330 The International System of Units (SI) 
 
 SP 365 Metric Conversion Card (pocket card) 
 
 SP 430 Household Weights and Measures 
 
 ENERGY AND ENERGY SAVINGS (including SOLAR ENERGY) 
 
 LC 1092 The NBS/DoE Energy Related Invention Evaluation Program 
 
 DIM/NBS Reprint Fusion Reactors in Our Future? (from DIM/NBS 4/78) 
 
 DIM/NBS Reprint Solar Heating and Cooling: Standards for a Maturing Industry (from DIM/NBS 12/78) 
 
 HB 120 Energy Management Guide for Light Industry and Commerce 
 
 COMPUTER AND MATHEMATICAL 
 
 CIS 10 Automation in the Marketplace 
 
 LC 84 Computer Science and Technology Publications 
 
 LP 88 The Computer Science and Technology Series — Publications 
 
 LP 9 1 Computer Security Publications 
 
 LP 17 Publications Series of the Applied Mathematics Division 
 
 HOME SAFETY AND SECURITY 
 
 Leaflet Home Security Starts at Your Door 
 
 LC 1079 Home Security Alarms — What They Are and How They Work 
 
 LC 1074 Smoke Detectors — What They Are and How They Work 
 
 LC 1091 Building Safety 
 
 SOME NBS SERVICES 
 
 LC 1080 Non-Destructive Evaluation 
 
 Exhibit 1-F 
 
1-33 
 
 SP 250 Calibration and Related Measurement Services of the NBS 
 
 SP 260 NBS Standard Reference Materials 
 
 LC 1094 NBS Standards Information Service 
 
 GENERAL 
 
 TFS 602 NBS Time Via Satellites 
 
 LP 81 National Standard Reference Data System Publications List 
 
 LC 1067-1 Code for the Names of Countries 
 
 Smithsonian Mag. 
 
 Reprint The National Bureau of Standards — America's Inquisitive Agency 
 
 Leaflet Guidelines for Preparation of Unsolicitated Proposals 
 
 SP 538 NBS — A National Resource for Science and Technology 
 
 CIS 4 Facts About Hearing and Hearing Aids 
 
 LP 80 NBS Publication Program — A Descriptive Brochure 
 
 LP 87 Publications of the NBS by Subject Category 
 
 LC 1075 Measurement Technology for the Marketplace 
 
 GENERAL PHYSICAL CONSTANTS 
 
 SP 368 Electrical Engineering Units and Constants (pocket card) 
 
 SP 398 Fundamental Physical Constants (pocket card) 
 
 Exhibit 1-F (cont.) 
 
2-1 
 
 Chapter 2 
 
 Writing for Publication 
 
 Page 
 
 2.1 Importance of Good Writing 2-3 
 
 2.2 Stages of Preparing a Paper 2-3 
 
 2.2.1 Defining Purpose, Scope, and Audience 2-3 
 
 2.2.2 Setting Style and Format 2-3 
 
 2.2.3 Organizing the Paper 2-4 
 
 2.2.4 Writing the First Draft 2-4 
 
 2.2.5 Revising the First Draft 2-4 
 
 2.2.6 Proofreading 2-4 
 
 2.3 Recognizing Outstanding Writing Achievements 2-4 
 
 2.4 Pohcy Guidelines of Special Interest to Authors 2-4 
 
 2.4.1 Units 2-4 
 
 2.4.2 Expression of the Uncertainties of Final Results 2-4 
 
 2.4.3 Trade Names 2-4 
 
 2.5 Readability and Accuracy of Expression 2-5 
 
 2.6 Examples of Good and Poor Writing 2-5 
 
 2.7 Gender Terminology 2-5 
 
 2.8 Title 2-6 
 
 2.9 Byline 2-6 
 
 2.9.1 Identifying Authors 2-6 
 
 2.9.2 Form of Identification 2-6 
 
 2.10 Abstract 2-7 
 
 2.11 Keywords 2-7 
 
 2.12 Organization of the Paper 2-8 
 
 2.13 Introduction 2-8 
 
 2.14 Methods 2-8 
 
 2.15 Results 2-9 
 
 2.16 Discussion 2-9 
 
 2.17 Summary 2-9 
 
 2.18 Illustrative Materials 2-9 
 
 2.18.1 Tables 2-9 
 
 2.18.2 Graphs 2-10 
 
 2.18.3 Photographs 2-10 
 
 2.18.4 Line Drawings 2-10 
 
 2.18.5 Other Figures 2-10 
 
 2.19 Acknowledgments 2-10 
 
 2.20 References 2-10 
 
 2.20.1 Distinction Between "References Cited" and "Bibliography" 2-10 
 
 2.20.2 References to Unpublished Work, Personal Communications, and 
 
 Documents with Limited Distribution 2-10 
 
 2.20.3 Accuracy and Completeness 2-10 
 
 2.21 Text Footnotes 2-11 
 
 2.22 Appendixes 2-11 
 
 Chapter 2— Contents 
 
2-2 
 
 Page 
 
 2.23 Writing for DIMENSIONS/NBS 2-11 
 
 2.23.1 Staff Reports 2-11 
 
 2.23.2 Other Sections 2-11 
 
 2.24 Writing for the NBS Standard 2-12 
 
 2.25 Writing for the Monthly Highlights 2-12 
 
 2.26 Producing a General Publication 2-12 
 
 Exhibit 2-A. Checklist for Authors and Reviewers 2-12 
 
 Exhibit 2-B. Sample Scientific Paper 2-14 
 
 Exhibit 2-C. Proofreader's Symbols 2-15 
 
 Exhibit 2-D. NBS Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) 2-17 
 
 Exhibit 2-E. Expression of the Uncertainties of Final Results 2-24 
 
 Exhibit 2-F. Abbreviations and Symbols 2-33 
 
 Bibliography 2-A. Aids to Scientific and Technical Writing 2-36 
 
 Bibliography 2-B. Standards for Symbols, Units, and Nomenclature 2-37 
 
 Bibliography 2-C. Books on Treatment of Data 2-37 
 
 Bibliography 2-D. Style Manuals 2-38 
 
 Chapter 2 — Contents (com.) 
 
2-3 
 
 Chapter 2 
 
 Writing for Publication 
 
 The following guidelines are provided to assist 
 NBS authors, reviewers, editors, and others 
 concerned with effective writing in the communica- 
 tion of the results of NBS activities. A number of 
 the suggestions in this chapter have been adapted 
 from American National Standard for the Preparation 
 of Scientific Papers for Written or Oral Presentation 
 (Z39. 16-1979). Instructions for secretaries and the 
 clerical staff are given in chapter 4. 
 
 2.1 Importance of Good Writing 
 
 It is the responsibility of the NBS professional 
 staff to report findings clearly, completely, and 
 concisely. The writings of the NBS staff cover an 
 extremely broad range of subjects, including not 
 only the physical sciences and engineering but also 
 biology, psychology, economics, regulatory affairs, 
 and others. Clearly a standard format for manu- 
 scripts in such a wide range of subjects is neither 
 possible nor even desirable. Even within a given 
 subject, NBS authors' tastes and predilections range 
 widely. 
 
 The NBS committee preparing this manual has 
 no desire to tell the staff exactly how to write 
 papers. Instead, the committee provides general 
 guidelines on what constitutes good writing along 
 with policy guidelines of importance to NBS 
 authors. In addition, examples of good and poor 
 scientific writing are given to illustrate the 
 principles of clear, direct, and concise style. 
 
 Of course, the quality of the experiments, 
 theories, ideas, results, or discoveries in NBS 
 research and development are of foremost 
 importance. However, good writing is also 
 important for effective communication of these 
 results to the intended audiences. 
 
 intended audience. When considering its purpose, 
 authors should be sure that the work is sufficiently 
 complete for reporting. If the work is fragmentary, 
 the author may consider presenting the information 
 as a short note, a brief communication, or a letter to 
 the editor. An exception to this guideline is if the 
 author is conducting a series of experiments 
 requiring several years to complete. 
 
 Before actually writing the paper, authors should 
 be able to define its purpose in a few words. 
 Generally, they should also be able to place their 
 work in the context of what has already been 
 accomplished in the field and to explain the 
 significance of their findings. With this definition, 
 an author may avoid producing a paper that is 
 rambling, too detailed, too narrow, or too shallow. 
 
 The intended scope of the paper should also be 
 considered. For example, a paper could be a 
 detailed, comprehensive study or a brief interim 
 report or a report of only one specific aspect of the 
 research. 
 
 Another important concern is identification of 
 the primary audience for whom the paper is 
 intended. This identification will affect the content, 
 organization, and vocabulary used in the paper, as 
 well as the medium of publication. Some NBS 
 series are better suited for one audience than others. 
 Often a non-NBS journal will best reach the 
 intended audience (see ch. 3 for guidance in 
 selecting a medium of publication). 
 
 When identifying the audience, authors should 
 consider the need of not only the primary 
 audience — usually specialists in the field — but also 
 the secondary audience — usually less specialized 
 readers. The secondary audience will not always 
 readily understand jargon, abbreviations, and 
 shortcuts in logic. Proper consideration of both 
 groups of readers may affect the content and style 
 of the final paper. 
 
 2.2 Stages of Preparing a Paper 
 
 2.2.1 Deflning Purpose, Scope, and Audience 
 
 Before writing a paper, authors should clearly 
 define its purpose and scope, and identify its 
 
 2.2.2 Setting Style and Format 
 
 Format and style requirements are substantially 
 influenced by the chosen medium of publication; 
 therefore, authors and their staff should become 
 familiar with the format and style before writing 
 begins. 
 
 sections 2.1-2.2.2 
 
2-4 
 
 The Technical Information and PubHcations 
 Division (TIPD) uses the U.S. Government Printing 
 Office Style Manual as the primary style guide for 
 NBS in-house publications, along with the style 
 guides of the American Institute of Physics and the 
 American Chemical Society. In addition, TIPD 
 consults the Department of Commerce (DoC), 
 Handbook of Publishing and Printing to be sure NBS 
 publications conform with DoC policy and style. 
 For abbreviations, TIPD uses the forms listed in 
 exhibits 2-D and 2-F. 
 
 Bibliographies 2-A through 2-D list style manuals 
 and other books concerning scientific and technical 
 writing, which may interest NBS authors. 
 
 2.2.3 Organizing the Paper 
 
 upon the place or method of publication (see ch. 3). 
 The final manuscript should be proofread at least 
 once before submitting it for publication. This 
 usually is the last chance to proof typewritten 
 camera-ready copy. For material set in type, at least 
 one more chance is provided. At NBS, proofread- 
 ing of manuscripts, galleys, and page proofs is the 
 responsibility of the originating organization. 
 
 Changes are not generally allowed after the manu- 
 script has been submitted to the printer and is in the 
 composition stage, because such changes are very 
 costly. However, it is important to note printer's 
 errors and errors of fact (see exh. 2-C for standard 
 proofing symbols). Detailed guidance in proofread- 
 ing is given in American National Standard for Proof 
 Corrections (Z39.22-1974). 
 
 Authors can save time by organizing a paper 
 before actually starting to write it. At intervals 
 during an investigation, they may wish to review 
 on paper the status of the project. An outline can be 
 done at progressive stages throughout the research, 
 with more detail each time. In this way, a detailed 
 skeleton of the paper will be complete even before 
 writing begins. 
 
 2.2.4 Writing the First Draft 
 
 The object of the first draft is to flesh out the 
 outline, not to produce a polished, finished paper. It 
 is probably unreasonable to expect the first draft to 
 be well written. At this stage, it is better to capture 
 as many ideas as possible, whereas searching for the 
 right word, editing, and revising can result in losing 
 an important idea. 
 
 2.2.5 Revising the First Draft 
 
 If time permits, the first draft should be allowed 
 to sit for a while. Then, the author can revise it 
 more objectively. During the revision authors can 
 search for the right word, provide connections 
 between ideas, correct faulty grammar, evaluate the 
 logic of the presentation, and verify the spelling of 
 words. Slowly a polished version will emerge (see 
 also sees. 2.5 to 2.22). For final review the author 
 should use the Checklist for Authors and 
 Reviewers, exhibit 2-A. An example of a well- 
 written, concise scientific paper is provided in 
 exhibit 2-B. 
 
 2.2.6 Proofreading 
 
 Proofreading is different from editing a manu- 
 script. Proofreading is the process of ensuring that 
 the typeset material corresponds exactly with the 
 manuscript from which it was prepared. The 
 number of times a manuscript is proofread depends 
 
 2.3 Recognizing 
 Achievements 
 
 Outstanding Writing 
 
 The Bureau encourages supervisors to use the 
 incentive awards program as a mechanism for 
 recognizing outstanding writing achievements of 
 the staff. In addition, a major Bureau award, the 
 Edward Uhler Condon Award, is given annually 
 for distinguished achievement in written exposition 
 (see sec. 1.3.12 for details about these awards). 
 
 2.4 Policy Guidelines of Special Interest 
 to Authors 
 
 2.4.1 Units 
 
 The official NBS policy is to encourage and lead 
 in the use of the International System of Units (SI). 
 This system is explained in exhibit 2-D. 
 
 2.4.2 Expression 
 Results 
 
 of the Uncertainties of Final 
 
 The current NBS guidelines regarding the expres- 
 sion of the uncertainties of final results are presented 
 in exhibit 2-E. 
 
 2.4.3 Trade Names 
 
 Authors should avoid the use of trade names in 
 all manuscripts (including illustrations) except 
 where public safety or health is involved or where 
 mention of the trade name would not result in a 
 competitive advantage or disadvantage to the 
 manufacturer. This Bureau policy complies with the 
 regulations of the Joint Committee on Printing. In 
 general, authors should use generic terminology 
 rather than specific commercial identification (see 
 sees. 1.4.11 through 1.4.12 for detailed policy and 
 discussion of exceptions). 
 
 sections 2.2.3-2.4.3 
 
2-5 
 
 2.5 Readability 
 Expression 
 
 and Accuracy of 
 
 Effective scientific and technical writing is 
 precise, clear, concise, and direct. Words should be 
 selected as carefully as possible. Authors should 
 make sure that terms commonly used in the labora- 
 tory are understood by intended readers; if 
 ambiguity is possible, such terms should be 
 carefully defined when first used. 
 
 Authors should express their ideas as concisely 
 and simply as possible without sacrificing accuracy 
 or clarity. Some ways to make writing more clear 
 and concise are as follows: 
 
 (1) Substitute verbs for abstract nouns wherever 
 possible. 
 
 ORIGINAL 
 
 The decision was made by a committee. 
 
 REVISION 
 
 A committee decided that.... 
 
 (2) Authors should preferably limit the total 
 number of modifiers per noun to three. (These 
 modifiers include nouns, adjectives, and adverbs.) 
 Prepositional phrases help break up bulky noun 
 phrases. 
 
 ORIGINAL 
 
 Electronic component 
 maintenance costs.... 
 
 production equipment 
 
 REVISION 
 
 Costs of maintaining equipment that produces 
 electronic components.... 
 
 (3) Where appropriate, authors should use the 
 active voice as well as the passive voice. When a 
 verb concerns action by the author, the author may 
 occasionally use the first person, although overuse 
 of the first person can distract the reader. 
 
 ORIGINAL 
 
 It was found that.... 
 
 REVISION 
 We found that.... 
 
 Authors who have difficulty writing acceptable 
 English should seek assistance from colleagues who 
 write correctly and well. Editors and reviewers are 
 not expected to rewrite papers to correct language 
 problems. 
 
 2.6 Examples of Good and Poor Writing 
 
 A clear grammatical style does not come easily to 
 everyone. It needs to be developed. There are at 
 least two prerequisites: clear thinking and a 
 knowledge of usage. Thereafter, a good style can 
 result from practice over a period of years and from 
 ability to criticize and revise one's own work. 
 
 The following examples illustrate good and poor 
 scientific writing: 
 
 EXAMPLE 1 ' 
 
 (Clear, concise, and direct.) 
 
 "The basis of classical mechanics is contained in 
 Newton's three laws of motion (1687). According 
 to the first of these, a body moves uniformly in a 
 straight line if not acted on by a force. According 
 to the second, the rate of change of momentum of a 
 particle is proportional to the resultant force acting. 
 According to the third, the force acting on particle 
 i due to any kind of interaction with particle j is 
 equal and opposite to that acting on j due to 
 interaction with i and acts in the direction of the 
 line joining i and j." 
 
 EXAMPLE 2 
 
 ORIGINAL 
 
 (Wordy and tedious.) 
 
 It was recognized that if a resonance should occur, 
 large losses would be introduced in the range of the 
 resonance frequency and that from a practical 
 viewpoint the transformer could not be used in 
 such a region. (37 words) 
 
 REVISION 
 
 (Concise and vigorous.) 
 
 If resonance should occur, the resulting losses 
 would make the transformer useless in the 
 resonance frequency range. (17 words) 
 
 See exhibit 2-B for a sample of a well-written 
 scientific paper. 
 
 2.7 Gender Terminology 
 
 Traditionally, masculine nouns and pronouns 
 were acceptable for use in statements applying to 
 either sex. But this usage is changing to reflect the 
 significant change of the role of women in society. 
 Many people are offended by the traditional usage, 
 which can be interpreted to reflect a male dominant 
 role. 
 
 ' From Condon, E. U., Dynamical Principles. Condon, E. U., and 
 Odishaw, H. eds. Handbook of Physics, 2d Ed., New York: 
 McGraw-Hill, 1967. p.2-11. 
 
 sections 2.5-2.7 
 
2-6 
 
 One step in removing unintentional sexism is to 
 avoid any use of gender-specific pronouns (he, she, 
 him, her) in nonspecific situations. The author 
 should do so without resorting to an abundance of 
 awkward his/her constructions. As an example, 
 instead of 
 
 The scientist should verify the accuracy of his 
 data. 
 
 It would be preferable to say 
 
 Scientists should verify the accuracy of their data. 
 
 or 
 
 The scientist should verify the accuracy of the 
 data. 
 
 Another step is to use substitutions for words that 
 begin or end with "man" in nonspecific situations. 
 
 chairman — chairperson, chair, head 
 
 manpower — workforce, workers, human power, 
 
 human energy 
 congressman — representative, member of 
 
 Congress 
 men — persons, people 
 manhours — staff hours 
 
 2.8 Title' 
 
 The title should be concise and informative, using 
 words that the author would use if searching for 
 the paper by topic. The author should omit 
 unnecessary words, such as "a report on..." or "an 
 in-depth study of..." To make the title meaningful to 
 a wide audience, the author should avoid 
 abbreviations, symbols, formulas, and jargon. 
 
 ^Much of the material in sections 2.8 to 2.22 has been adapted 
 from American National Standard for the Preparation of Scientific 
 Papers for Written or Oral Presentation (Z39.16. 1979). New York: 
 American National Standards Institute; 1979, 16 p. 
 
 2.9 Byline 
 
 2.9.1 Identifying Authors 
 
 At NBS the decision to include a person as an 
 author should be made at the project level and 
 should be based on a substantial and truly profes- 
 sional contribution by the person so named. Mere 
 administrative supervision of the work is not a 
 sufficient qualification for authorship. The order in 
 which the authors' names appear should also be 
 decided at the project level, and as with authorship 
 itself should only be carried to the next higher 
 administrative authority for resolution if a conflict 
 arises at the project level. Alphabetical ordering 
 may be used. (In a multi-authored paper, it is not 
 expected that all authors be able to explain or 
 defend all points in the paper.) 
 
 Ordered attribution is useful not only in crediting 
 contributions but also in signaling the audience who 
 the principal contact is for further information. 
 Sometimes this individual is not the same as the 
 "principal contributor," as when a chairperson of a 
 committee issuing a report may have only given 
 oversight to the work but nevertheless should serve 
 as the contact for the audience. When this is the 
 case, the principal contact should be identified by 
 footnote along with that person's role, if appropri- 
 ate. 
 
 2.9.2 Form of Identification 
 
 (1) NBS Staff 
 
 The author's official affiliation with the Bureau 
 must be shown on all official writing. 
 
 The major operating units have agreed on a 
 uniform and preferred method for indicating the 
 NBS author's affiliation for manuscripts published 
 by the Bureau, as well as for those published in 
 non-NBS publications if not otherwise specified by 
 the outside publisher. The following format is 
 preferred: 
 
 General form 
 
 Example 
 
 Author's name* 
 
 John Smith* 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 Washington, DC 20234 
 
 Washington, DC 20234 
 
 Boulder, CO 80303 
 
 
 *In a footnote, list the division 
 
 *Building Economics and 
 
 or program, the center, and the 
 
 Regulatory Technology 
 
 laboratory or institute. For 
 
 Division, Center for Building 
 
 journal and proceedings papers, 
 
 Technology, National Engineering 
 
 place the footnote at the bottom of 
 
 Laboratory 
 
 the page; for monographs and other 
 
 
 separate publications, place the 
 
 
 footnote above the Department of 
 
 
 Commerce/NBS seal on the title 
 
 
 page. 
 
 
 sections 2.8-2.9.2 
 
2-7 
 
 This format allows for the "preferred" minimal, 
 meaningful organizational identity or, when appro- 
 priate, a fuller identification, including the author's 
 title. Multiple affiliations or credits can usually be 
 accommodated on one line (e.g., National Bureau of 
 Standards and University of Colorado). 
 
 The byline of nonofficial manuscripts may not 
 identify authors in their official capacity at the 
 Bureau; such manuscripts may indicate affiliation 
 with NBS by footnote or other manner but must 
 make clear that the author is writing as a private 
 individual and not as a member of the Bureau staff 
 (DoC Administrative Order 219-1). 
 
 (2) Associates and Guests 
 
 Papers written by postdoctoral research associates 
 and industrial research associates are reviewed and 
 published under the NBS policies and procedures 
 prescribed in this manual. The status of the 
 associates should be indicated on the title page of 
 their papers or by a footnote of the following form: 
 
 NRC-NAS Postdoctoral 
 Research Associate, 1979-80 
 
 or 
 
 Research Associate, XYZ 
 Trade Association (include years, 
 if appropriate) 
 
 Papers by NBS guest workers collaborating with 
 NBS staff members or producing papers as sole 
 authors, should exhibit the guest workers' 
 affiliations as well as the NBS affiHation. 
 
 (3) Staff Members on Training Assignment 
 
 If a paper is written when an NBS employee is 
 away at another institution on an authorized 
 assignment and the paper is not submitted for NBS 
 editorial review, it should carry the name of that in- 
 stitution in the author's byline. Papers receiving 
 NBS review may carry the name of either the 
 training institution, NBS, or both, depending on the 
 wishes of the institution. A footnote should state 
 that the author was at the institution for the period 
 during which the work was done. 
 
 2.10 Abstract 
 
 For NBS in-house publications the abstract is an 
 integral part of a manuscript and is published with 
 the paper. Abstracts must also accompany all other 
 NBS manuscripts submitted for ERB review, i.e., 
 for non-NBS media, and must be suitable for 
 separate publication in the Journal of Research, in 
 NBS publication catalogs, and in various outside 
 abstract journals. Thus, even though an outside 
 
 journal may not require an abstract, it is important 
 that a publishable abstract be prepared and included 
 on Form NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet). 
 The abstract also assists the editorial review board 
 in choosing readers for the paper. 
 
 The abstract should be an "x ray" of the paper, 
 showing in microcosm the whole purpose, nature, 
 and results of the study. It is usually about 200 
 words long for NBS publications and should 
 address the following questions: 
 
 • What problem was examined or procedure 
 carried out? 
 
 • What was the objective of the activity being 
 documented? 
 
 • What was the scope of the activity? 
 
 • What were the principal conclusions and 
 recommendations? 
 
 Abstracts should have complete sentences, and 
 should not contain unnecessary contractions and 
 abbreviations that are inappropriate for the main 
 text. Also, sections or illustrations should not be 
 cited by their numerical references in the text and 
 display equations, tables, and figures should be 
 avoided where possible. 
 
 For additional guidance, authors may examine 
 American National Standards for Writing Abstracts 
 (Z39. 18-1974), available from the NBS storeroom. 
 
 2.11 Key Words 
 
 As in the case of abstracts, key words are an 
 integral part of a manuscript and will be published 
 with the paper if scheduled for an NBS in-house 
 publication. Key words must also accompany all 
 other NBS manuscripts submitted for ERB review, 
 i.e., for non-NBS media, and must be suitable for 
 separate publication with the abstract. 
 
 Key words should be words, terms, or phrases 
 that give a clear, precise indication to the reader of 
 pertinent subjects covered in a specific paper. 
 Between 6 and 12 key words should be used to 
 indicate contents of NBS papers and are usually 
 best selected by the author. These words will be 
 used as later entries in an NBS subject index publica- 
 tions catalog and should be cited exactly as they 
 will appear in this index. Thus the author should 
 provide an entry for every route that a potentially 
 interested reader might follow in trying to find a 
 paper. If a key word is omitted, it will not be Hsted 
 in the index, thus eliminating that search route. 
 Semicolons (;) should be used to separate the index 
 terms since commas may be necessary within some 
 entries. Key words must be included on Form NBS- 
 114A. 
 
 sections 2.10-2.11 
 
2-8 
 
 The following suggestions are offered to authors: 
 
 (1) Include the obvious. 
 
 (2) Search the title and abstract for possible 
 entries. 
 
 (3) List the research area, general type of study, 
 or general class of processes examined. 
 
 (4) Identify the specific problem studied and the 
 method used. 
 
 (5) Indicate the type of results reported. 
 
 (6) Use synonyms freely or suggest cross 
 references. 
 
 (7) Remember that the potential reader may not 
 be an expert in the field. 
 
 EXAMPLE^ 
 
 Key words: aqueous solution; equilibrium; 
 humidity; relative humidity; salt; saturated salt 
 solution; vapor pressure; water vapor. 
 
 The Technical Information and Publications 
 Division in Gaithersburg, or the Program Informa- 
 tion Office in Boulder can give further assistance. 
 
 2.12 Organization of the Paper 
 
 Although there is a wide range of acceptable 
 forms, authors of scientific and technical papers 
 often structure their papers as follows: 
 
 (1) Introduction — (directed to specialist and 
 nonspecialist readers) includes purpose, scope, and 
 background of work; 
 
 (2) Methods — (directed to specialist readers) may 
 include a subsection on materials; 
 
 (3) Results — (directed to specialist readers); 
 
 (4) Discussion — (directed to specialist readers) 
 includes a statement of conclusions and elaboration 
 on their significance; 
 
 (5) Summary — (directed to specialist and 
 nonspecialist readers) optional. 
 
 Even though the above structure is a common 
 one for journal articles, not all papers need include 
 all of the elements, or in this order. Other types of 
 papers are brief notes, editorials, engineering 
 specifications, chemical papers in which 
 experimental details are placed at the end, and 
 mathematical papers in which methods are often 
 
 5 From Greenspan, Lewis, Humidity fixed points of binary 
 saturated aqueous solutions, J. Res. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.), 
 81A(l):89-96; 1977 January-February. 
 
 part of the results. In addition, some journals prefer 
 that major conclusions be presented at the 
 beginning of the paper. 
 
 Thus the structure of a paper is determined in 
 part by convention, in part by journal requirements, 
 and in part by the authors' own good judgment as 
 to how they can best communicate their findings. 
 
 2.13 Introduction 
 
 In the introduction authors generally state the 
 purpose of the work, the hypothesis tested (if there 
 is one), the background of the study, and the scope 
 of the investigation. The readers should be told 
 exactly what question(s) will be discussed in the 
 paper, and in a long paper an outline of the rest of 
 the paper may be included at the outset. 
 
 Because many papers will be read by both 
 specialists and nonspecialists, the author should 
 make the introduction understandable to both, 
 especially statements about the purpose of the 
 work. 
 
 The introduction is an appropriate place for 
 authors to credit others for what is already known 
 about the subject. Although this is an important re- 
 sponsibility for authors, they generally should not 
 begin an original scientific article by presenting an 
 exhaustive critical review of all the scholarly work 
 in the field. Such a review is best published 
 separately. 
 
 2.14 Methods 
 
 At the start of this section, or immediately 
 preceding it, authors should include a description of 
 the overall experimental design or theoretical 
 procedures. The exception is when a specialist 
 reader can easily deduce the design and procedures 
 from the introduction. In addition, this section 
 should give premises and assumptions in the design 
 and support the methods chosen in the investigation 
 when reasonable alternatives exist. 
 
 While it is usually the aim of this section to give 
 enough information for colleagues or peers in the 
 field to reproduce the results obtained, for the sake 
 of brevity authors customarily describe in detail 
 only what is new or innovative in the procedures 
 and operations. References to prior published work 
 are given for the rest of the procedures and 
 operations. Even in this abbreviated form, 
 procedures should be presented in a logical order so 
 that the reader can see the relationship of the 
 procedures and the experimental design. 
 
 Sometimes the work involves underlying sciences 
 that are referred to as soft and multidisciplinary and 
 the resulting data may be incomplete and subject to 
 
 sections 2.12-2.14 
 
2-9 
 
 a variety of interpretations. In such instances, 
 authors must be particularly careful to reveal their 
 methodology, the limitations of the data, and the un- 
 certainties in the inferences and stated outcome. 
 
 The methods section may also include 
 descriptions of special apparatus and a subsection 
 labeled "materials," which describes the materials 
 used and their preparation or source. 
 
 2.15 Results 
 
 In this section authors should present information 
 in an order that either logically relates to the 
 hypothesis or answers questions posed in the 
 introduction. They should limit its contents to data 
 and illustrative material that are relevant to the 
 purpose of the paper. 
 
 Tables and figures are often the best ways to 
 present results. Authors need not repeat in detail in 
 the text numerical data already provided in tables, 
 although restatement of average values for group 
 data can help emphasize the evidence on which 
 authors may have based their conclusions. 
 
 2.16 Discussion 
 
 In this section, authors elaborate on their results. 
 This includes relating them to previous and related 
 findings; discussing the impact of their results; and 
 showing what is different from the work of others, 
 including contradictory evidence when appropriate. 
 
 Tables and figures should be included in this 
 section only when they contribute to an argument 
 and should be presented in a logical order. As in 
 the results section, the author should refrain from 
 extensively repeating results that are included in the 
 tables and figures and only make references to them 
 as appropriate. 
 
 Authors should discuss the work of others with 
 care and focus such comments on the scientific 
 aspects of their published work. 
 
 In their comments on the significance of their 
 findings, authors may speculate provided (1) they 
 identify such comments as speculation, (2) the 
 speculation stays close to experimental observations 
 or proved theorems, (3) the speculation is concise, 
 and (4) the speculation is capable of being further 
 investigated. However, the author should not 
 inhibit relevant speculation just because empirical 
 observations are not yet possible. To do so might 
 impede the scientific process. 
 
 When trying to explain the reasons for a set of 
 results, authors should not state all possible 
 hypotheses in the hope that one may be correct. 
 Nor should they overstate the precision of the 
 work, the generality of the conclusions, or the 
 applicability of the results. 
 
 2.17 Summary 
 
 The summary is an optional section, which either 
 stands separate or is incorporated at the close of the 
 discussion. Like the introduction, the summary 
 should be directed to both specialists and 
 nonspecialists. 
 
 A summary differs from an abstract. The 
 summary's concise conclusions are intended for 
 someone who has read the entire paper, but an 
 abstract is intended for someone who has not yet 
 done so. 
 
 2.18 Illustrative Materials 
 
 Illustrative materials include tables, graphs, 
 photographs, and figures. Authors should select 
 these materials before writing the text so they may 
 adequately discuss these items in the text. In 
 addition, they should provide a title for each piece 
 of illustrative material. 
 
 For the best reproductions, authors should submit 
 camera-ready originals or good photographic prints, 
 not copies from quick copying machines. 
 
 2.18.1 Tables 
 
 Tables are used to present numerical data in a 
 compact and logical format. If possible, the reader 
 should be able to use the tables without referring to 
 the text. To enable the reader to do this, the author 
 should carefully select titles and column headings 
 and use table footnotes and logical arrangements of 
 values. As a result, the reader should be able to see 
 the purpose, design, method, and main conclusions 
 of the experiment(s) or theoretical procedure(s) 
 from which the table is derived. Tables are clearer 
 when values to be compared are placed in adjacent 
 columns or rows, and when "baseline values," if 
 used, are in the first column or row. 
 
 If authors wish to record voluminous data for 
 possible future retrieval (especially if many 
 individual results might be useful to another 
 specialist but not to most readers), they should 
 deposit the data in a national depository and 
 retrieval center. NBS authors may use the NBS 
 Interagency/Internal Report series for this purpose; 
 such reports are deposited with the National Techni- 
 cal Information Service for public availability. 
 Another alternative is to publish a relatively small 
 quantity of such data as an appendix. 
 
 The statistical treatment of results should be 
 clearly indicated. For example, uncertainty in 
 values should be shown either as ranges or as the 
 standard deviations of individual values; or implied 
 by the standard error of means or of least square 
 values of parameters. Authors must state, in a 
 convenient place such as a table footnote, whether 
 the table shows standard deviations or standard 
 
 sections 2.15-2.18.1 
 
2-10 
 
 errors, and must indicate how many observations 
 were used to derive these values or the range. 
 When authors give statistical estimates of 
 significance, they should justify or reference 
 uncommon or atypically used tests (see exh. 2-E). 
 
 2.18.2 Graphs 
 
 While tables are used for presenting numerical 
 data, graphs are better for illustrating trends and 
 relationships. As with tables, graphs should be 
 intelligible without reference to the text. This 
 means titles, labels, and legends that clarify the 
 purpose, design, method, and main conclusions of 
 the experiment(s) or theoretical procedure(s) from 
 which the graph is derived. This also means 
 labeling coordinates and the units of measure given. 
 
 The number of curves in the graph should not be 
 so many as to prevent easily following of each 
 curve over its whole length. And to be readable, 
 letters and numerals must be at least 1.5 mm high 
 after reduction to fit the publication format. 
 
 If authors choose to extrapolate beyond or 
 interpolate between determined points in line 
 graphs, they should carefully consider their 
 justification for doing so, and, when appropriate, 
 explain the justification to the reader. 
 
 If possible, authors should present the uncertainty 
 of values for each point, either as such or as a 
 vertical line representing magnitude as stated in the 
 legend. 
 
 2.18.3 Photographs 
 
 Photographs of equipment are usually less useful 
 as illustrative devices than line drawings or verbal 
 descriptions that make clear how the equipment 
 operates. If photographs are used, authors should 
 use arrows or letters to clearly point out elements 
 of interest. Also, the center of interest should be at 
 the same point as the center of the field. To have 
 effective photographs, authors should crop 
 unimportant details or note crop marks in the 
 margins. 
 
 Photomicrographs and electron micrographs 
 should be of top quality. To compensate for errors 
 in calculating magnification after such photographs 
 are reduced to fit a format, the author should 
 include a measured bar in the photograph to show 
 the scale. 
 
 2.18.4 Line Drawings 
 
 Crowded illustrations often confuse the reader. 
 Thus, authors should limit lines and letters to the 
 minimum number needed to convey meaning. They 
 should also be sure lines are heavy enough and 
 letters large enough to be readable after reduction 
 in size. 
 
 2.18.5 Other Figures 
 
 Authors should have a clear reason for using any 
 figure. This includes automatically recorded 
 tracings or computer printouts. Authors should not 
 use a figure just because it is available. 
 
 2.19 Acknowledgments 
 
 At NBS acknowledgments of aid should be made 
 to individuals or groups who have made significant 
 contributions to the paper but who cannot properly 
 be regarded as authors of the paper. When 
 acknowledgment is made for assistance in a 
 specialized field, the individual or group to whom 
 acknowledgment is named should be given the op- 
 portunity to review the paper and make comments. 
 
 Acknowledgments should be the last section of 
 the text, in a separate paragraph. 
 
 2.20 References 
 
 2.20.1 Distinction Between "References Cited" and 
 "Bibliography" 
 
 A list of references ("references cited") contains 
 only those sources cited in the text, whereas a 
 bibliography contains other literature of interest to 
 the reader. If authors include both types of 
 references in a paper, they should construct two 
 separate, appropriately labeled lists. 
 
 2.20.2 References to Unpublished Work, Personal 
 Communications, and Documents With Limited 
 Distribution 
 
 Unless absolutely necessary, lists of references 
 should not include references to manuscripts being 
 prepared, to technical reports with limited 
 distribution, to unpublished work, or to personal 
 communications. Editors often require authors to 
 integrate such references into the text. 
 
 Authors should cite documents with limited 
 distribution, only if they tell readers how the 
 documents can be obtained. If such a document is 
 not available on request for reasons of Government 
 or company regulations, authors should indicate 
 this and should provide all the information from the 
 document that the reader would need. However, if 
 this would violate the intent of the restriction, 
 authors should not reference or use the information 
 from the restricted document. 
 
 2.20.3 Accuracy and Completeness 
 
 Authors should prepare references that are 
 bibliographically complete and accurate. The form 
 
 sections 2.18.2-2.20.3 
 
2-n 
 
 used depends upon the journal in which the paper 
 will be published. NBS authors writing for NBS in- 
 house publications should use the forms given in 
 exhibit 4-E and section 4.4.11. 
 
 An alternative and acceptable method for 
 literature references is often referred to as the 
 Oxford, Harvard, or Science Method. In this 
 method, the references in the text are indicated by 
 the bracketed insertion of the author's name and the 
 year of publication: [Smith, I960]. If the author's 
 name is part of the text, only the year is shown in 
 brackets [I960]. When more than one paper is cited 
 in the same year by the same author, the references 
 are distinguished by the letters "a, b, c" etc. after 
 the year. References to two or more papers within 
 the same brackets are given in chronological order: 
 [Smith, 1960; Jones and Taylor, 1964]. In the 
 reference section at the end of the manuscript all 
 references are cited in alphabetical order and in the 
 style recommended in section 4.4.11. 
 
 For further guidance, NBS authors should 
 consult the style manuals of the American Institute 
 of Physics, the American Chemical Society, or 
 others listed in bibliography 2-D. 
 
 2.21 Text Footnotes 
 
 Authors should limit footnotes to peripherally 
 related information that would seriously disrupt the 
 train of thought if included in the text. Footnotes 
 should be placed in accordance with the 
 instructions of NBS or the outside journal (see sec. 
 4.4.13). 
 
 2.22 Appendixes 
 
 Authors sometimes use appendixes to publish 
 lengthy proofs, subsidiary arguments, or data not 
 essential to the argument but of interest to some 
 specialists. Unlike a note added in proof, an 
 appendix is considered an integral part of the paper 
 and is reviewed as such. 
 
 2.23 Writing for DIMENSIONS /NBS 
 
 The monthly magazine DIMENSIONS /NBS is a 
 product of the Public Information Division (PID). 
 This magazine describes in technical and general 
 terms results of NBS activities in areas of basic 
 research and national concern. The publication has 
 three major sections: staff reports describing in tech- 
 nical terms ongoing or completed research; feature 
 articles written for the nonspecialist; and brief 
 articles describing industry and standards-related 
 programs, often involving technology transfer. 
 
 Although the editor of DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 generally solicits manuscripts from the staff, 
 members of the staff are encouraged to contact the 
 editor if they would like to write for it. The editor 
 will work with authors to plan the initial draft and 
 to guide them through the publication process 
 (see sec. 3.2 for a detailed description of 
 DIMENSIONS/NBS). 
 
 2.23.1 Staff Reports 
 
 "Staff Reports" is a section in DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 intended to give NBS researchers the opportunity to 
 report briefly on developments in the laboratory to 
 scientific colleagues and directors of research who may 
 not be experts in the field. This section of the magazine 
 also discusses NBS technical services. Over the course 
 of a year, this section tries to reflect the breadth of 
 NBS technical activities and features most major tech- 
 nical developments that occur during that time. The 
 following are guidelines for "Staff Reports:" 
 
 (1) Before beginning a staff report, authors should 
 contact the DIMENSIONS/NBS editor. In Boulder 
 contact the Program Information Office (PIO). 
 
 (2) Selection of subjects — the choice of staff 
 report topics is the prerogative of each technical 
 unit. Authors are encouraged to contact the editor 
 with suggested topics. 
 
 (3) Preparation of articles — In general, staff 
 reports are drafted by the scientist(s) or engineer(s) 
 most directly involved in the program under 
 discussion and edited by the DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 editor. 
 
 (4) Format — Each report on an area of research 
 begins with a paragraph that highlights the 
 significance of the development. This introduction 
 is followed by the name(s) of the individual(s) 
 primarily responsible for the work, along with the 
 division, address, and phone number of each 
 person. This is followed by the body of the article. 
 
 (5) Style guidelines — The body of an article 
 should be written in narrative form, using the first 
 person (I or we) to describe the development and 
 its ramifications in as much technical detail as is ap- 
 propriate in a maximum of four double-spaced 
 manuscript pages. (Some reports run less than one 
 manuscript page.) Authors should discuss the 
 subject in technical terms, but should write for 
 colleagues outside their specific discipline. 
 Wherever appropriate, technical illustrations with 
 captions should accompany the text. 
 
 2.23.2 Other Sections 
 
 Authors planning to write a feature article or a 
 brief article describing industry and standards- 
 related programs should contact the editor of 
 
 sections 2.21-2.23.2 
 
2-12 
 
 DIMENSIONS/NBS. In Boulder contact PIO. 
 These articles are generally written in a popular 
 style and include less detailed technical information 
 than a staff report. 
 
 2.24 Writing for the NBS Standard 
 
 The NBS Standard is issued biweekly to all 
 members of the NBS staff. It is the official 
 employee publication and reports on employee 
 activities and Bureau programs. All employees are 
 invited to contribute articles to the NBS Standard. 
 Those staff members wishing to write a story or 
 article should first contact the editor of this publica- 
 tion. In Boulder contact PIO. 
 
 2.25 Writing for the Monthly Highlights 
 
 The Monthly Highlights is designed to keep NBS 
 management informed of significant events 
 involving the Bureau, its programs, and its staff. 
 The information in this publication is for internal 
 use only. 
 
 The entries for Monthly Highlights are generated 
 at the project level and compiled by each major 
 operating unit (MOU). Final coordination is 
 handled by FID. For the most part, the content and 
 style are the responsibility of the originating MOU, 
 but these general guidelines should be kept in mind: 
 
 (1) Make contributions brief and factual. 
 
 (2) Use names and dates when possible — for 
 example, when discussing publication of significant 
 technical articles, start-up of new equipment, 
 receipt of an award, and significant meetings about 
 a major national problem. 
 
 (3) Note the relative importance of the event 
 discussed — for example, magnitude of the problem. 
 
 cost, savings to be accrued, and interest shown in 
 the problem. 
 
 (4) Submit highlights to division chiefs, who will 
 in turn submit them to the designated contact in 
 each MOU. A list of these contacts is available 
 from FID. In Boulder contact the Program 
 Coordination Office. 
 
 2.26 Producing a General Publication 
 
 If NBS staff members are interested in producing 
 a general publication, they should contact PID, or 
 in Boulder, PIO. Publications that fall into this 
 category include flyers, brochures (general interest 
 and program), annual reports (Bureau-wide and 
 program), employee newsletters, magazines, 
 consumer information booklets, and recruiting 
 materials. After the initial contact, a planning 
 meeting will be scheduled involving the author, the 
 public information specialist covering the author's 
 area, and the PID publications coordinator. The 
 PID publications coordinator then works with the 
 author to produce an appropriate manuscript. The 
 final manuscript must be cleared through the 
 author, the author's supervisor, the appropriate 
 public information specialist, the PID publications 
 coordinator, and the PID general publications 
 supervisor. Those manuscripts containing technical 
 information are also cleared through the appropri- 
 ate Editorial Review Board. 
 
 After approval of the manuscript, the PID publi- 
 cations coordinator arranges for the design, layout, 
 and production of the publication, obtaining 
 clearances on the camera-ready copy from the 
 author and the PID general publications supervisor. 
 After the publication is received, the public informa- 
 tion specialist proceeds with a promotional plan for 
 announcing the availability of the publication. 
 
 Exhibit 2-A. Checklist for Authors and Reviewers 
 
 It is important to pay particular attention to the 
 following items when writing or reviewing a manu- 
 script: 
 
 1. Text presentation 
 
 a. Text is internally consistent as to nomenclature, 
 abbreviations, and units (see exhs. 2-F and 2-D for 
 guidance in use of abbreviations and units). 
 
 b. Style and form are suited to the proposed 
 medium and prospective readers. 
 
 c. Length is appropriate for the medium and for 
 the amount of material to be communicated. 
 
 2. Content 
 
 a. Paper clearly indicates the problem with which 
 it is concerned. 
 
 sections 2.24-2.26 & Exhibit 2-A 
 
2-13 
 
 b. Contribution of paper to the problem is readily 
 apparent. 
 
 c. Premises and methodology used are sound. 
 
 d. Materials studied or employed are clearly 
 characterized (e.g., composition and purity). 
 
 e. Evidence is given about how and against what 
 the instruments used were calibrated. 
 
 f. Measurements are adequate in scope and 
 number to support conclusions reached. 
 
 g. Uncertainties of reported numerical values are 
 stated without ambiguity. For example, distinction 
 is made between systematic errors and random 
 error (see exh. 2-E). 
 
 h. Fitting of data to mathematical models is 
 clearly described. Details and accuracy of 
 computational procedures are treated adequately. 
 
 i. Data are given in sufficient detail to permit 
 comparison with other studies and quantitative eval- 
 uations. 
 
 j. Individuals supplying specialized assistance are 
 acknowledged and given an opportunity to review 
 text. 
 
 3. Illustrations, tables, and references 
 
 a. Figures are adequately notated with preferred 
 SI Units and are consistent with units used in the 
 text. Caption is a complete statement of the 
 significance of the data displayed in the figure. 
 
 b. Tables are concise but informative. Column 
 headings are adequate and data is properly treated 
 statistically when applicable. Footnotes are 
 adequate. Title is a complete statement of the 
 significance of the data listed in the table. 
 
 c. Citations are adequate and correctly presented. 
 
 4. Title, abstract, and key words 
 
 a. Title is informative and well phrased. 
 
 b. Chemical names are spelled out when appropri- 
 ate; abbreviations and acronyms are not used unless 
 definitions are quite clear to the intended audience. 
 
 c. Abstract is suitable for publishing separately 
 from the paper; it indicates the purpose of the 
 investigation, the type of approach (experimental or 
 theoretical), results, and conclusions. 
 
 d. Units and symbols used are approved for NBS 
 publications (see exhs 2-D and 2-F). 
 
 e. Key words are suitable for separate subject 
 indexing of the paper. (Note: Bureau publication 
 records include the abstract and key words for all 
 publications, including non-NBS media having 
 formats that do not require these elements.) 
 
 5. Policy matters 
 
 a. SI unit names and symbols are used (see exh. 
 2-D). 
 
 b. Trade names are used only when necessary. 
 When they are used, NBS policy requirements are 
 satisfied (see sees. 1.4.11 to 1.4.12). 
 
 c. Document is free of statements that extend 
 beyond the authority of the Bureau, the 
 Department, or the Federal Government. 
 
 6. Medium of Publication 
 
 a. Publication 
 considered. 
 
 in an 
 
 NBS series has been 
 
 b. The journal chosen reaches 
 audience in the United States. 
 
 its intended 
 
 c. If a foreign journal is chosen, approval of the 
 center director or the Director NBS/Boulder has 
 been obtained. 
 
 d. For a book chapter, the author has provided 
 details of the invitation, claimed an honorarium or 
 royalty on behalf of NBS, arranged for 
 complimentary reprints for NBS, and included a 
 statement that this material cannot be copyrighted 
 (see sec. 1.4.6). 
 
 7. Accompanying forms 
 
 a. The manuscript is accompanied by the appropri- 
 ate forms including Forms NBS- 114 and 114A 
 (original and one copy of each), and Form NBS- 
 214, a form used primarily by the Editorial Review 
 Board reader and sponsor. In Boulder, Form BL- 
 7 A replaces Form NBS-214. 
 
 b. The title on Forms NBS- 114 and 114A is 
 identical to that appearing on the manuscript text. 
 Likewise the authors' names are identical to those 
 on the manuscript and are listed in the same order. 
 
 c. Form NBS-114A is properly completed, 
 including the sections for the abstract and key 
 words or phrases. 
 
 d. The forms have signatures appropriate for the 
 state of review that the manuscript has reached, and 
 the Manuscript Custody Transfer Record (printed 
 on Form NBS- 114) is used to give additional 
 indication of the review history of the manuscript. 
 
 Exhibit 2-A (cont.) 
 
2-14 
 
 Exhibit 2-B. Sample Scientific Paper 
 
 This work was the basis for the 1962 Nobel Prize for physiology or medicine. It is written in a clear and concise style that 
 is suitable for scientific and technical papers. (In format it is, of course, both shorter and simpler than many such papers.) 
 
 No, 43S6 
 
 April 25, 1953 
 
 NATURE 
 
 737 
 
 MOLECULAR STRUCTURE OF 
 NUCLEIC ACIDS 
 
 A Structure for Deoxyribose Nucleic Acid 
 
 WE wisli to suggest a structure for the salt 
 of deoxyribose nucleic acid (D.X.A.). This 
 structure has novel features which are of considerable 
 biological interest. 
 
 A structure for nucleic acid has already been 
 proposed by Pauling and Corey". They kindly made 
 their manuscript available to us in advance of 
 publication. Their model consists of three inter- 
 twined chains, with the phosphates near the fibre 
 axis, and the bases on the outside. In our opinion, 
 this structure is unsatisfactory for two reasons : 
 (1) We believe that the material which gives the 
 X-ray diagrams is the salt, not the free acid. Without 
 the acidic hydrogen atoms it is not clear what forces 
 would hold the structure together, especially as the 
 negatively charged phosphates near the axis will 
 repel each other. (2) Some of the van der Waals 
 distances appear to be too small. 
 
 Another three-chain structure has also been sug- 
 gested by Fraser (in the press). In his model the 
 phosphates are on the outside and the bases on the 
 inside, linked together by hydrogen bonds. This 
 structure as described is rather ill-defined, and for 
 this reason we sha! I not comment 
 on it. 
 
 We wish to put forward a 
 radically different structure for 
 the salt of deoxyribose nticleic 
 acid. This strxicture has two 
 helical chains each coiled round 
 the same axis (.see diagram). We 
 have made the usual chemical 
 assumptions, namely, that each 
 chain coiasists of phosphate di- 
 ester groups joining p-D-deoxy- 
 ribofuranose residues with 3', 5' 
 linkages. The two chains (but 
 not their bases) are related by a 
 dyad perpendicular to the fibre 
 axis. Both chains follow right- 
 handed helices, but owing to 
 the dyad the sequences of the 
 atoms in the two chains run 
 in opposite directions. Each 
 chain loosely resembles Fur- 
 berg's* model No. 1 ; that is, 
 the bases are on the inside of 
 the helix and the phosphates on 
 the outside. The configuration 
 of the sugar and the atoms 
 near it is close to Furberg's 
 'standard configuration', the 
 sugar being roughly perpendi- 
 cular to the attached base. There 
 is a residue on each chain e\ery 3-4 A. in the z-direc- 
 tion. We have assumed an angle of 36° between 
 adjacent residues in the same chain, so that the 
 structure repeats after 10 residues on each chain, that 
 is, after 34 A. The distance of a phosphorus atom 
 from the fibre axis is 10 A. As the phosphates are on 
 the outside, cations have easy access to them. 
 
 The structure is an open one, and its water con*^ent 
 is rather high. At lower water contents we would 
 expect the bases to tilt so that the structure could 
 become more compact. 
 
 The novel feature of the structure is the manner 
 in which the two chains are held together by the 
 purine and pyrimidine bases. The planes of the bases 
 are perpendicular to the fibre axis. They are joined 
 
 Tins rtgnre is purely 
 fUrtgranitnatic. The two 
 ribbons symbolize the 
 two phosphate — siisar 
 chains, and the hori- 
 zontal rods the pairs of 
 bases holding tlie chains 
 together. The vertical 
 line marlis the fibre axis 
 
 together in pairs, a single base from one chain being 
 hydrogen-bonded to a single base from the other 
 chain, so that the two lie side by side with identical 
 2-co-ordinates. One of the pair must be a purine and 
 the other a pyrimidine for bonding to occur. The 
 hydrogen bonds are made as follows : purine position 
 1 to pyrimidine position 1 ; purine position 6 to 
 pyrimidine position 6. 
 
 If it is assumed that the bases only occur in the 
 structure in the most plausible tautomeric forms 
 (that is, with the keto rather than the enol con- 
 figurations) it is found that only specific pairs of 
 bases can bond together. These pairs are : adenine 
 (purine), with thymine (pyrimidine), and guanine 
 (purine) with cytosine (pyrimidine). 
 
 In other words, if an adenine forms one member of 
 a pair, on either chain, then on these assvunpt ions 
 the other member must be thymine ; similarly for 
 guanine and cytosine. The sequence of bases on a 
 single chain does not appear to be restricted in any 
 way. However, if only specific pairs of bases can be 
 formed, it follows that if the sequence of bases on 
 one chain is given, then the sequence on the other 
 chain is automatically determined. 
 
 It has been found experimentally^-* that the ratio 
 of the amounts of adenine to thymine, and the ratio 
 of guanine to cytosine, are always very close to unity 
 for deoxyribose nucleic acid. 
 
 It is probably impossible to build this structure 
 with a ribose sugar in place of the deoxyribose, as 
 the extra oxygen atom would make too close a van 
 der Waals contact. 
 
 The previously published X-ray data'-' on deoxy- 
 ribose nucleic acid are insufficient for a rigorous test 
 of our structure. So far as we can tell, it is roughly 
 compatible with the experimental data, but it must 
 be regarded as unproved until it has been checked 
 against more exact results. Some of these are given 
 in the following communications. We were not aware 
 of the details of the results presented there when we 
 devised our structure, which rests mainly though not 
 entirely on published experimental data and stereo- 
 chemical arguments. 
 
 It has not escaped our notice that the specific 
 pairing we have postulated immediately suggests a 
 possible copying mechanism for the genetic material. 
 
 Full details of the structure, including the con- 
 ditions assumed in building it, together with a set 
 of co-ordinates for the atoms, will be published 
 elsewhere. 
 
 We are much indebted to Dr. Jerry Donohue for 
 constant advice and criticism, especially on inter- 
 atomic distances. We have also been stimulated by 
 a knowledge of the general nature of the unpublished 
 experimental results and ideas of Dr. M. H. F. 
 Wilkins, Dr. R. E. Franklin and their oo-workera at 
 King's College, London. One of us (J. D. W.) htks been 
 aided by a fellowship from the National Foxuidation 
 for Infantile Paralysis. 
 
 J. D. Watson 
 F. H. C. Crick 
 Medical Research Council Unit for the 
 Study of the Molecular Structure of 
 Biological Systems, 
 
 Cavendish Laboratory, Cambridge. 
 April 2. 
 
 ' Pauling. I,., and Corey, R. B., Natiirf. 171, 346 (1953) ; Piw. U.S. 
 
 Nat. Arad. Sci.. 39, 84 (1953). 
 ' Furberg, S.. .4c(o Chem. Scaiid.. 6, 634 (1952). 
 ' ChargafT, E., for references see Zanienhof, S., Brawerroan, G.. and 
 
 Chargaff, E., Bioc/tim. et Biaphyt. Acta, 9, 402 (1052). 
 ' \Vy.-»tt O. R.. J. Oen. Phijiiol.. 36. 201 (19.''>2). 
 ' Astbury, W. T., Syinp. Soc. Exp. Biol. I, Nucleic Acid. 66 (Cnmb- 
 
 Univ. Press, 1947). 
 •Wilkins, M. H. F., and Randall, J. T., Biochim. tt Biophi/f. A'ia, 
 
 10, 192 (1953). 
 
 From "Nature", Vol. 171, pp 737-8, 1953. 
 Exhibit 2-B 
 
2-15 
 
 Exhibit 2-C. Proofreader's Symbols 
 (from DoC handbook of publishing and printing) 
 
 
 
 PROOFREADER MARKS 
 
 
 Corrections in Text 
 
 !/ 
 
 Exclamation point 
 
 / 
 
 Delete or take out 
 
 v/0 
 
 Quotations 
 
 
 
 7y\l 
 
 Em dash 
 
 A 
 
 Caret; something to be 
 
 
 inserted 
 
 ^1 
 
 En dash (used to join figures, 
 
 ^/ 
 
 Reel 
 
 or letters and figures) 
 
 
 
 (/) 
 
 Parentheses 
 
 <!k/^,MtC»ff 
 
 Copy omitted (encircle copy 
 
 
 
 omitted; mark it "set" and 
 return with proof to printer) 
 
 
 
 Brackets 
 
 ^^^ tn^j 
 
 Let it stand 
 
 
 Style and Type 
 
 ^^A^jQ 
 
 Encirclement means to 
 change: Spelling to figures; 
 
 J^a^ P 
 
 Lowercase 
 
 
 figures to spelling; or spell out, 
 as in abbreviations, signs, and 
 
 c^<^f 
 
 Capital 
 
 
 symbols 
 
 C<1^ 
 
 Capitals and lowercase 
 
 / 
 
 Use diphthong 
 
 .x^ <y^~^ 
 
 Small capitals 
 
 ^/^ 
 
 Superior or inferior (letter or 
 figure) 
 
 C<J^ 
 
 Capitals and small capitals 
 
 ^ 
 
 Asterisk 
 
 HMf 
 
 Wrong font (a character of 
 wrong face or size of type) 
 
 / 
 
 Diagonal 
 
 /v9'r>V 
 
 Roman 
 
 -^ 
 
 Indicate unusual characters by 
 
 yOiyJb 
 
 Italic 
 
 marking above 
 
 
 
 
 Punctuation 
 
 -^ 
 
 Boldface (mark case number 
 or kind and size of display type 
 on proofs) 
 
 o 
 
 Period 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Lightface 
 
 ^ 
 
 Comma 
 
 9 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 Paragraph 
 
 -/ 
 
 Hyphen 
 
 
 
 :/ 
 
 
 ■TW<ff 
 
 No paragraph — set flush or run 
 
 Colon 
 
 
 in 
 
 ;/ 
 
 Semicolon 
 
 
 
 
 
 Space and Position 
 
 N^ 
 
 Apostrophe 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Close up 
 
 ?/ 
 
 Question mark (or query, when 
 
 
 
 encircled ) 
 
 t 
 
 Flush left or right as indicated 
 
 Exhibit 2-C 
 
2-16 
 
 Exhibit 2-C. Proofreader's Symbols — Continued 
 
 ^ Move to right 
 
 [Z, Move to left 
 
 n u Move up or dov^rn 
 
 _<^*>L(^ Center 
 
 /^:^ 
 
 ZTA 
 
 Delete and close up, or delete 
 and leave space (important to 
 use when deleting hyphen to 
 indicate whenever the correc- 
 tion is one word or two words) 
 
 /^^ Delete Space 
 
 ;zX 
 
 ^ 
 
 (/ 
 
 ^if 
 
 Transpose; change position 
 (letters, words, paragraphs, 
 etc.) 
 
 Space; a normal space 
 between words; a line space 
 between lines (or indicate the 
 space wanted: 2-pt. #, 10-pt. #, 
 etc.) 
 
 Less Space 
 
 Equal space between words 
 
 Aline words or figures (vertical- 
 ly or horizontally)] 34 
 
 I 56 
 
 75 
 
 o 
 
 Pl7 
 
 Indent or use 1-em space 
 
 Indent or use 2-em space, or 
 the number of squares shown 
 
 Generally means 2-point ad- 
 ditional space between lines 
 
 No extra space between lines 
 
 Insert lead 
 
 Take out lead 
 
 Run over to next [line 
 
 Run/up to line above 
 
 OK with corrections; show next 
 action; initial and date when 
 returned to printer 
 
 Exhibit 2-C (cont.) 
 
2-17 
 
 Exhibit 2-D. NBS Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) 
 
 REPRINTED FROM 
 
 December 1979 DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 
 (with revised Appendix 3, August 1980) 
 
 LC1120 
 
 Actions at the 1979 General Conference 
 on Weights and Measures (CGPIM)* 
 
 Since the last publication of the NBS guide- 
 lines for the use of the International Systenn of 
 Units (SI) in 1977, three important actions con- 
 cerning SI have been taken by the General Con- 
 ference on Weights and Measures. This revised 
 version of the NBS guidelines reflects these 
 decisions. 
 
 At their meeting in Paris, France, October 8-12, 
 1979, the General Conference: 
 
 (1) Redefined the base SI unit candela to read — 
 The candela is the luminous intensity, in a 
 given direction, of a source that emits 
 monochromatic radiation of frequency 540 
 X 10" hertz and of which the radiant in- 
 tensity in that direction is 1/683 watt per 
 steradian, 
 
 (2) Adopted the special name sievert, symbol 
 Sv, for the SI unit of dose equivalent in the 
 field of radiological protection. The sievert 
 is equal to one joule per kilogram. 
 
 (3) Adopted I and L as alternative symbols for 
 the unit liter. 
 
 Ernest Ambler 
 Director 
 
 • f. Ambler was the U.S. delegate to (he CCPM, accom- 
 panied by advisors Francis X. Cunningham (Department 
 ol State), Edward L. Brady (NBS), and Abraham S. fried- 
 man (American Embassy, Paris). 
 
 Guidelines 
 
 ftirLke 
 of the 
 
 JVI0DERISIZED 
 METRIC SYSTEM 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 f 
 
 ^ — 
 
 =^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ r 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 J 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 r\ 
 
 \l 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 r^ 
 
 k 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 III 
 
 The International System of Units 
 
 THE following Guidelines have been adopted 
 by the National Bureau of Standards of the 
 U.S. Departnnent of Commerce for use of 
 the International System of Units (SI)/ informally 
 called the metric system. 
 
 These Guidelines' reflect the decisions of the 
 General Conference on Weights and Measures 
 (CGPM) and its subordinate Committees which de- 
 fined the modernized metric system and gave offi- 
 
 ' The International System of Units (SI) was initially defined 
 and given official status by the Titti General Conference on 
 Weights and Measures, 1960. A complete listing of the SI 
 units is presented in NBS Special Publication 330, 1977 Edi- 
 tion. A summary of the SI is given in Appendix 1 of this 
 document. 
 
 ' These Guidelines supersede LC 1056 dated November 1977 
 and those that appeared in DIMENSIONS/NBS, October 1977. 
 
 Exhibit 2-D 
 
2-18 
 
 cial status to SI in 1960. The United States holds a 
 place on these international bodies by virtue of its 
 adherence to the Treaty of the Meter, signed in 
 1875. The National Bureau of Standards acts as the 
 official U.S. representative to the various interna- 
 tional bodies formed by the Treaty. 
 
 The National Bureau of Standards, in light of the 
 Metric Conversion Act of 1975, recommends the 
 use of metric units except in contexts where the 
 exclusive use of metric units would needlessly 
 confuse the intended audience. In these cases, the 
 dual use of metric and inch-pound (customary) 
 units may serve the two purposes of not only com- 
 municating the contents but also familiarizing 
 the readers with the new metric system. 
 
 In all cases, NBS recommends a common-sense 
 approach to metric conversion. These Guidelines 
 are meant to provide NBS recommendations on the 
 use of the modernized metric system while recog- 
 nizing the evolving nature of metric practice in 
 the U.S. 
 
 For further information concerning metric con- 
 version in the United States, the reader should con- 
 tact the U.S. Metric Board, 1815 N. Lynn Street, 
 Suite 600, Arlington, VA 22209. For further informa- 
 tion about the metric system, contact the NBS 
 Office of Technical Publications, Washington, D C 
 20234. 
 
 The Metric System: SI 
 
 The SI is constructed from seven base units for 
 independent quantities plus two supplementary 
 units for plane angle and solid angle. (See table 1). 
 Units for all other quantities are derived from these 
 nine units. In table 2 are listed 19 SI derived units 
 with special names. These units are derived from 
 the base and supplementary units in a coherent 
 manner, which means they are expressed as prod- 
 ucts and quotients of the nine base and supplemen- 
 tary units without numerical factors. All other SI de- 
 rived units, such as those in tables 3 and 4, are 
 similarly derived in a coherent manner from the 28 
 base, supplementary, and special-name SI units. For 
 use with the SI units, there is a set of 16 prefixes 
 (see table 5) to form multiples and submultiples of 
 these units. For mass, the prefixes are to be applied 
 to the gram instead of to the SI base unit, the 
 kilogram. 
 
 The SI units together with the SI prefixes pro- 
 vide a logical and interconnected framework for 
 measurements in science, industry, and commerce. 
 NBS encourages the use of SI in the United States. 
 
 Fundamental Constants/ Natural Units 
 
 In some cases, quantities are commonly expressed 
 in terms of fundamental constants of nature, and 
 use of these constants or "natural units" is ac- 
 ceptable. The author, however, should state clearly 
 which natural units are being used; such broad 
 terms as "atomic units" should be avoided when 
 there is danger of confusion. 
 
 Typical examples of natural units are: 
 
 Unit 
 
 Symbol 
 
 elementary charge e 
 
 electron mass rrie 
 
 proton mass mp 
 
 Bohr radius ao 
 
 electron radius re 
 Compton wavelength of electron Ac 
 
 Bohr magneton fi^ 
 
 nuclear magneton /An 
 
 speed of light c 
 
 Planck constant h 
 
 Units Acceptable for Use with SI 
 
 Certain units which are not part of the SI are 
 used so widely that it is impractical to abandon 
 them. The units that are accepted for continued 
 use with the International System are listed in 
 table 6. It is likewise necessary to recognize, out- 
 side the International System, the following units 
 which are used in specialized fields: 
 
 Unit 
 
 Symbol 
 
 electron volt 
 
 unified atomic mass unit 
 
 astronomical unit 
 
 parsec 
 
 eV 
 u 
 
 AU 
 pc 
 
 The units shown with an asterisk in table 7 are 
 used in limited fields and have been authorized by 
 the International Committee for Weights and Meas- 
 ures (CIPM), the international committee that 
 guides the technical work of the Treaty of the 
 Meter, for temporary use in those fields. 
 
 The short names for compound units (such as 
 "coulomb" for "ampere second" and "pascal" for 
 "newton per square meter") exist for convenience, 
 and either form is correct (see table 2). For example, 
 communication sometimes is facilitated if the au- 
 thor expresses magnetic flux in the compound term 
 volt seconds (instead of using the synonym, webers) 
 because of the descriptive value implicit in the 
 compound phrase. 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cont.) 
 
2-19 
 
 Special Considerations 
 
 The kelvin (K) is the SI base unit of temperature; 
 this unit is properly used for expressing tempera- 
 ture and temperature intervals. However, wide use 
 is also made of the degree Celsius (°C) for ex- 
 pressing temperature and temperature intervals. 
 The Celsius scale (formerly called centigrade) is 
 related directly to thermodynamic temperature 
 (kelvins) as follows: 
 
 The temperature interval one degree Celsius 
 
 equals one kelvin exactly. 
 
 Celsius temperature (t) is related to thermody- 
 namic temperature (T) by the equation: 
 
 t = T - To 
 
 where To = 273.15 K by definition. 
 
 Words and symbols should not be mixed. If 
 mathematical operations are indicated, for ex- 
 ample, only symbols should be used. Any of the 
 forms "joules per mole," "J/mol," "J'mol"'" is con- 
 sidered good usage, but the forms "joules/mole" 
 and "joules'mol"'" are not. See Appendix 2 for 
 additional rules. 
 
 Logarithmic measures such as pH, dB (decibel), 
 and Np (neper) are acceptable. 
 
 Over the years the term weight has been used 
 to designate two quantities: mass and force. NBS 
 generally supports the recommendation in the 
 American National Standard for Metric Practice 
 (Z 210.1-1976), that the term weight should be 
 avoided except under circumstances in which its 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 "^ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [\ 
 
 \l 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 r^ 
 
 k 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 meaning is completely clear. (For further discussion, 
 see Appendix 3.) 
 
 It is also recommended that the terms atomic 
 weight and molecular weight be replaced by 
 relative atomic mass and relative molecular mass 
 in accordance with established international 
 practice.^ 
 
 Descriptive and Essential Data 
 
 Descriptive data describe arrangements, environ- 
 ments, noncritical dimensions and shapes of ap- 
 paratus, and similar measurements not affecting 
 calculations or results. Such data should be ex- 
 pressed in SI units unless this makes the expression 
 excessively complicated. For example, commercial 
 gauge designations, commonly used items identi- 
 fied by nominal dimensions, or other commercial 
 nomenclatures (such as drill sizes, or standards for 
 weights and measures) expressed in inch-pound 
 units are acceptable. 
 
 Essential data express or interpret the quantitative 
 results being reported. All such data shall be ex- 
 pressed solely in SI units except in those fields 
 where (a) the sole use of SI units would create a 
 serious impediment to communications, or (b) Si 
 units have not been specified. Exceptions may also 
 occur when dealing with commercial devices, 
 standards, or units having some legal definition, 
 such as commercial weights and measures. Even in 
 such instances, SI units should be used when prac- 
 tical and meaningful; for example, this may be 
 done by adding non-SI units in parentheses after 
 SI units, in tables, SI and inch-pound units may be 
 shown in parallel columns. If coordinate markings 
 in non-SI units are included in graphs, they should 
 be displayed on the top and right-hand sides of 
 the figure. 
 
 Additional References 
 
 For additional information on the use of SI units, 
 the reader is directed to the following publications: 
 
 NBS SP 330, 1977 Edition, "The International 
 System of Units: SI," the translation of the official 
 text, "Le Systeme International d'Unites," (1977). 
 
 ISO International Standard 1000 (1973 Edition) 
 "SI Units and Recommendations for Use of Their 
 Multiples." 
 
 American National Standard Z210.1-1976, Ameri- 
 can Standard for Metric Practice. 
 
 Examples of conversion factors from non-SI units 
 to SI are provided in table 7. 
 
 ' ISO 31/VIII "Quantities and Units of Physical Chemistry 
 and Molecular Physics." 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cont.) 
 
2-20 
 
 APPENDIX 1 
 
 Units and 
 
 Conversion 
 
 Factors 
 
 TABLE 1 . SI base and supplementary units 
 
 SI base units 
 
 Quantity* 
 
 Unit 
 Name 
 
 SI supplementary units 
 
 solid angle 
 
 steradian 
 
 Unit 
 Symbol 
 
 length 
 
 meter 
 
 m 
 
 mass' 
 
 kilogram 
 
 kg 
 
 time 
 
 second 
 
 s 
 
 electric current 
 
 ampere 
 
 A 
 
 thermodynamic temperature 
 
 kelvin 
 
 K 
 
 amount of substance 
 
 mole 
 
 mol 
 
 luminous intensity 
 
 candela 
 
 cd 
 
 plane angle 
 
 radian 
 
 rad 
 
 sr 
 
 ' See Appendix 3 for a discussion of the terms "mass" and "weight." 
 * Quantity here and in Tables 2, 3, 4, and 7 means a measurable attribute. 
 
 TABLE 2. SI derived units with special names 
 
 SI Unit 
 
 Quantity 
 
 Name 
 
 Symbol 
 
 Expression 
 in terms 
 of other 
 units 
 
 (•I See Special Considerations, p. 15. 
 
 ">> In this expression the steradian (sr) Is treated as a base unit. 
 
 Expression 
 in terms 
 of SI base 
 units 
 
 frequency 
 
 hertz 
 
 Hz 
 
 
 s-' 
 
 force 
 
 newton 
 
 N 
 
 • 
 
 m*kg*s"' 
 
 pressure, stress 
 
 pascal 
 
 Pa 
 
 N/m' 
 
 m-'-kg-s-' 
 
 energy, work, quantity of heat 
 
 joule 
 
 J 
 
 N-m 
 
 m^-kg-s-' 
 
 power, radiant flux 
 
 watt 
 
 W 
 
 J/s 
 
 m'^'kg'S"' 
 
 quantity of electricity, electric charge 
 
 coulomb 
 
 C 
 
 A-s 
 
 s-A 
 
 electric potential, 
 potential difference, electromotive force 
 
 volt 
 
 V 
 
 W/A 
 
 m^-kg-s-'-A-' 
 
 capacitance 
 
 farad 
 
 F 
 
 C/V 
 
 m-^-kg-'-s*-A' 
 
 electric resistance 
 
 ohm 
 
 n 
 
 V/A 
 
 m^-kg-s-^-A-^ 
 
 conductance 
 
 Siemens 
 
 S 
 
 A/V 
 
 m-'-kg-'-s'-A^ 
 
 magnetic flux 
 
 weber 
 
 Wb 
 
 V-s 
 
 m'-kg-s-'-A-' 
 
 magnetic flux density 
 
 tesia 
 
 T 
 
 Wb/m' 
 
 kg-s-'-A-' 
 
 inductance 
 
 henry 
 
 H 
 
 Wb/A 
 
 m^-kg-s-^-A-' 
 
 Celsius temperature'"' 
 
 degree Celsius 
 
 °C 
 
 
 K 
 
 luminous flux 
 
 lumen 
 
 Im 
 
 
 cd-sr'^' 
 
 illuminance 
 
 lux 
 
 Ix 
 
 Im/m^ 
 
 m-^-cd-sr'^' 
 
 activity (of a radionuclide) 
 
 becquerel 
 
 Bq 
 
 
 S-' 
 
 absorbed dose, specific 
 energy imparted, kerma, 
 absorbed dose index 
 
 gray 
 
 Gy 
 
 J/ kg 
 
 m'-s' 
 
 dose equivalent, dose 
 equivalent index 
 
 sievert 
 
 Sv 
 
 J/kg 
 
 m'-s' 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cont.) 
 
2-21 
 
 TABLE 3. Some SI derived units expressed in terms of base units 
 
 
 Quantity 
 
 SI Unit 
 
 Unit 
 Symbol 
 
 area 
 
 square meter 
 
 m* 
 
 volume 
 
 cubic meter 
 
 m' 
 
 speed, velocity 
 
 meter per second 
 
 m/s 
 
 acceleration 
 
 meter per second squared 
 
 m/s' 
 
 wave number 
 
 1 per meter 
 
 m' 
 
 density, mass density 
 
 kilogram per cubic meter 
 
 kg/m^ 
 
 current density 
 
 ampere per square meter 
 
 A/m' 
 
 magnetic field strength 
 
 ampere per meter 
 
 A/m 
 
 concentration (of amount 
 of substance) 
 
 mole per cubic meter 
 
 mol/m^ 
 
 specific volume 
 
 cubic meter per kilogram 
 
 mVkg 
 
 luminance 
 
 candela per square meter 
 
 cd/m' 
 
 TABLE 4. Some SI derived units expressed by means of special names 
 
 SI Unit 
 
 Expression 
 in terms of 
 
 Quantity 
 
 Name 
 
 Symbol 
 
 SI base units 
 
 dynamic viscosity 
 
 pascal second 
 
 Pa-s 
 
 m'-kg-s-' 
 
 moment of force 
 
 newton meter 
 
 N-m 
 
 m'-kg-s"' 
 
 surface tension 
 
 newton per meter 
 
 N/m 
 
 kg-s-^ 
 
 power density, heat flux density, 
 irradiance 
 
 watt per square meter 
 
 W/m' 
 
 kg-s-^ 
 
 heat capacity, entropy 
 
 joule per kelvin 
 
 J/K 
 
 m^-kg-s-^-K-' 
 
 specific heat capacity, 
 specific entropy 
 
 joule per kilogram kelvin 
 
 J/(kg-K) 
 
 m'-s-^-K-' 
 
 specific energy 
 
 joule per kilogram 
 
 J/kg 
 
 m^-s-^ 
 
 thermal conductivity 
 
 watt per meter kelvin 
 
 W/(m-K) 
 
 m-kg-s-'-K-' 
 
 energy density 
 
 joule per cubic meter 
 
 J/m' 
 
 m-'-kg-s-' 
 
 electric field strength 
 
 volt per meter 
 
 V/m 
 
 m-kg-s-'-A-' 
 
 electric charge density 
 
 coulomb per cubic meter 
 
 C/m^ 
 
 m^^'S'A 
 
 electric flux density 
 
 coulomb per square meter 
 
 C/m^ 
 
 m-^'S'A 
 
 permittivity 
 
 farad per meter 
 
 F/m 
 
 m-'-kg-'-s-'-A^ 
 
 permeability 
 
 henry per meter 
 
 H/m 
 
 m'kg'S'^'A"^ 
 
 molar energy 
 
 joule per mole 
 
 J/mol 
 
 m'-kg-s-'-mol-' 
 
 molar entropy, molar heat capacity 
 
 joule per mole kelvin 
 
 J/(mol-K) 
 
 m'-kg-s-^-K'-mol' 
 
 exposure (x and 7 rays) 
 
 coulomb per kilogram 
 
 C/kg 
 
 kg-'-s-A 
 
 absorbed dose rate 
 
 gray per second 
 
 Gy/s 
 
 m^-s-' 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cont.) 
 
2-22 
 
 TABLE 5. SI prefixes 
 
 Factor Prefix Symbol 
 
 w 
 
 exa 
 
 E 
 
 10'' 
 
 peta 
 
 P 
 
 10" 
 
 tera 
 
 T 
 
 10' 
 
 giga 
 
 G 
 
 10' 
 
 mega 
 
 M 
 
 10' 
 
 kilo 
 
 k 
 
 10^ 
 
 hecto 
 
 h 
 
 10' 
 
 deka da 
 
 Factor Prefix Symbol 
 
 10-' 
 
 deci 
 
 d 
 
 10-' 
 
 cent! 
 
 c 
 
 10' 
 
 milli 
 
 m 
 
 10-' 
 
 micro 
 
 M 
 
 10-' 
 
 nano 
 
 n 
 
 10'^ 
 
 pico 
 
 P 
 
 10-" 
 
 feinto 
 
 f 
 
 10-" 
 
 atto 
 
 TABLE 6. 
 System 
 
 Units in use with the international 
 
 Name 
 
 Symbo 
 
 Value in SI Unit 
 
 minute 
 
 min 
 
 1 min =60 s 
 
 hour 
 
 h 
 
 1 h =60 min=3 600s 
 
 day 
 
 d 
 
 1 d =24h=86 400s 
 
 degree 
 
 ° 
 
 1° =(7r/180)rad 
 
 minute 
 
 / 
 
 V =(1/60r=(7r/10 800)rad 
 
 second 
 
 // 
 
 1" =(1/60)' = (tt/ 648 000) rad 
 
 liter 
 
 L* 
 
 1 L =1 dm' = 10-'m' 
 
 metric tor 
 
 t 
 
 1 t =10' kg 
 
 hectare 
 
 ha 
 
 1 ha =10* m' 
 
 * An alternative symbol for liter is "I". Since "I" can be 
 easily confused witfi the numeral "1," the symbol "L" is 
 recommended for United States use. 
 
 TABLE 7. Examples of conversion factors from non-SI units to SI 
 
 Quantity 
 
 Name of Unit 
 
 Symbol 
 for 
 Unit 
 
 Definition in 
 SI Units 
 
 length 
 
 inch 
 
 in 
 
 2.54 X 10-' m 
 
 length 
 
 nautical mile* 
 
 nmi 
 
 1852 m 
 
 length 
 
 # angstrom* 
 
 X 
 
 10'° m 
 
 velocity 
 
 knot* 
 
 kn 
 
 (1852/3600) m/s 
 
 cross section 
 
 barn* 
 
 b 
 
 10-" m' 
 
 acceleration 
 
 #gal* 
 
 Gal 
 
 10-' m/s' 
 
 mass 
 
 pound (avoirdupois) 
 
 lb 
 
 0.453 592 37 kg 
 
 force 
 
 kilogram-force 
 
 kgf 
 
 9.806 65 N 
 
 pressure 
 
 millimeter of 
 mercury at 0°C 
 
 mmHg 
 
 133.322 Pat 
 
 pressure 
 
 atmosphere 
 
 atm 
 
 101 325 Pa 
 
 pressure 
 
 torr 
 
 Torr 
 
 (101 325/760) Pa 
 
 pressure 
 
 #bar* 
 
 bar 
 
 10' Pa 
 
 stress 
 
 pound-force per sq in 
 
 Ibf/in' 
 
 6 894.757 Pat 
 
 energy 
 
 British thermal unit (Int. Table) 
 
 Btu 
 
 1055.056 Jt 
 
 energy 
 
 kilowatt hour 
 
 kWh 
 
 3.6x10' J 
 
 energy 
 
 calorie (thermochemical) 
 
 cal 
 
 4.184 J 
 
 activity (of a radionuclide) curie* 
 
 Ci 
 
 3.7x10"'Bq 
 
 exposure (x or 7 rays) 
 
 roentgen* 
 
 R 
 
 2.58x10*C-kg-' 
 
 absorbed dose 
 
 rad* 
 
 rd 
 
 1 X 10' Gy 
 
 dose equivalent 
 
 rem* 
 
 rem 
 
 1 xlO'Sv 
 
 * The CIPM has sanctioned the temporary use of these units. #The use 
 t Approximate; all other conversion factors are eixact. National 
 
 of these units 
 Standard for 
 
 is discouraged in the American 
 Metric Practice, Z210.1 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cont.) 
 
2-23 
 
 APPENDIX 2 
 
 Writing Style Guides 
 
 1. CAPITALS 
 
 Units: When written in full, the names of all 
 units start with a lowercase letter, except at the 
 beginning of a sentence or in capitalized material 
 such as a title. Note that in degree Celsius the 
 unit "degree" is lowercase but the modifier "Cel- 
 sius" is capitalized. The "degree centigrade" is 
 obsolete. 
 
 Symbols: Unit symbols are written with lower- 
 case letters except that (1) the first letter is upper- 
 case when the name of the unit is derived from 
 the name of a person and (2) the symbol for liter is 
 capital L. 
 
 Prefixes: The symbols for numerical prefixes for 
 exa(E), peta(P), tera(T), giga(G), and mega(M) are 
 written with uppercase letters, all others with 
 lowercase letters. All prefixes are written in lower- 
 case letters when written out in full, except where 
 the entire unit name is written in uppercase letters. 
 
 2. PLURALS 
 
 a. When written in full, the names of units are 
 made plural when appropriate. Fractions both com- 
 mon and decimal are always singular. 
 
 b. Symbols for units are the same in singular 
 and plural (no "s" is ever added to indicate a 
 plural). 
 
 3. PERIODS 
 
 A period is NOT used after a symbol, except at 
 the end of a sentence. 
 
 4. THE DECIMAL MARKER 
 
 The dot (point) is used as the decimal marker 
 and is placed on the line. In numbers less than one, 
 a zero must be written before the decimal point. 
 
 5. GROUPING OF DIGITS 
 
 a. Digits should be separated into groups o1 
 three, counting from the decimal marker. The 
 comma should not be used. Instead, a space is left 
 to avoid confusion, since many countries use a 
 comma for the decimal marker. 
 
 b. In numbers of four digits, the space is not 
 recommended, unless four-digit numbers are 
 grouped in a column with numbers of five digits 
 or more. 
 
 6. SPACING 
 
 a. In symbols or names for units that have pre- 
 fixes, no space is left between letters making up 
 the symbol or the name. 
 
 b. When a symbol follows a number to which 
 it refers, a space must be left between the number 
 and the symbol (except for degree, minute, and 
 second of angle). 
 
 7. COMPOUND UNITS 
 
 In the symbol for a compound unit that is 
 formed by the multiplication of two or more units, 
 a centered dot is used. For example, N'm. 
 
 In the name of such a unit, a space is recom- 
 mended (or a hyphen is permissible) but never a 
 centered dot. For example, newton meter or 
 newton-meter. 
 
 APPENDIX 3 
 
 Recommended Use of 
 Mass and Weight 
 
 There is no explicit SI unit for weight but the 
 word is in very common use. Ambiguity exists in the 
 use of the term weight as a quantity to mean either 
 force or mass. In commercial and everyday use, the 
 term weight usually refers to amount of matter; 
 thus, when one speaks of a person's weight, the 
 quantity referred to is that designated as mass in 
 science and technology, for which the SI unit is the 
 kilogram. 
 
 In science and technology, the term weight of a 
 body usually means the force that, if applied to the 
 body, would give it an acceleration equal to the 
 local acceleration of free fall. The adjective local in 
 the phrase local acceleration of free fall usually 
 means a location on the surface of the earth, but 
 may be extended to other locations such as the 
 moon. The designation free fall refers to motion in 
 vacuum thus eliminating air resistance and buoyancy 
 effects. In this context the local acceleration of free 
 fall has the symbol g (sometimes referred to as 
 acceleration of gravity) with observed values of g 
 differing by over 0.5% at various points on the 
 earth's surface and having an internationally ac- 
 cepted assigned standard value of 9.806 65 m'S"^ 
 (CGPM (1901)). it is recommended that one use the 
 term force of gravity instead of using the term 
 w/eight, when force of gravity is intended. If, how- 
 ever, one chooses to use the term weight to mean 
 force of gravity, this should be explicitly stated. It is 
 further recommended that in publications and other 
 communications intended primarily for technical 
 audiences, when one means mass one should use 
 the term mass and avoid the term weight, though it 
 must be recognized that in certain technical fields 
 weight has been used as a synonym for mass. 
 
 The dual use of the term weight will probably 
 persist in everyday life. Therefore, when the term 
 is used under ordinary circumstances, it is important 
 to differentiate between mass and force by using 
 SI units properly; i.e., by using kilograms for mass 
 and newtons for force. 
 
 Exhibit 2-D (cant.) 
 
2-24 
 
 Exhibit 2-E. Expression of the Uncertainties of Final Results 
 
 EXPRESSIONS OF IMPRECISION, 
 
 SYSTEMATIC ERROR, 
 
 AND 
 
 UNCERTAINTY ASSOCIATED 
 
 WITH A REPORTED VALUE 
 
 HARRY H. KU, National Bureau of Standards 
 (Reprinted in part from NBS Publication 300, Volume 1, February 1969.) 
 
 The work of a calibration laboratory 
 may be thought of as a sequence of 
 operations that result in the collection, stor- 
 age, and transmittal of information. In mak- 
 ing a statement of uncertainty of the result 
 of calibration, the calibration laboratory 
 transmits information to its clients on the 
 particular item calibrated. 
 
 It is logicEil, then, to reqviire the trans- 
 mitted information to be meaningful and 
 unambiguous, and to contain all the rele- 
 vant information in the possession of the 
 laboratory. The information content of the 
 statement of uncertainty determines, to a 
 large' extent, the worth of the calibrated 
 value. 
 
 A common deficiency in many statements 
 of uncertainty is that they do not convey 
 aU the information a calibration laboratory 
 has to offer, information acquired through 
 much ingenuity and hard work. This defi- 
 ciency usually originates in two ways: 
 
 1. Loss of information through oversim- 
 plification, and 
 
 2. loss of information through the inability 
 of the laboratory to take into account in- 
 formation accumulated from its past ex- 
 perience. 
 
 With the increasingly stringent demands 
 for improved precision and accuracy of cali- 
 bration work, calibration laboratories as a 
 whole just cannot afford such luxury. 
 
 Traceability to the national standards, 
 accuracy ratios, and class tolerance require- 
 ments are simplified concepts that aim to 
 achieve different degrees of accuracy re- 
 quirements. These concepts and the result- 
 
 ing statements are useful on certain occa- 
 sions, but faU whenever the demarid is 
 exacting. The general practice of obliterat- 
 ing all the identifiable components of un- 
 certainty, by combining them into an over- 
 all uncertainty, just for the sake of simplicity, 
 is another case in point. After aU, if the 
 calibration laboratory reports all the per- 
 tinent information in separate components, 
 the user can always combine them or use 
 them individually, as he sees fit. On the 
 other hand, if the user is given only one 
 number, he can never disentangle this num- 
 ber into its vgurious components. Since the 
 information buried under these oversimpli- 
 fied statements is available, and may well 
 be useful to sophisticated customers, such 
 practices result in substantial waste of ef- 
 fort and resources. 
 
 In calibrating an item by repeating the 
 same calibration procedure, the calibration 
 laboratory gains increments of information 
 about its calibration system. These incre- 
 ments of information are quantified and ac- 
 cumulated for the benefit of the calibration 
 laboratory. If the precision of the calibra- 
 tion process remains unchanged, the sta- 
 tistical measure of dispersion (s) - i.e., 
 the standard deviations computed from these 
 sets of data - can be pooled together, 
 weighted by their respective degrees of 
 freedom. When many such increments of 
 information are combined, an accepted or 
 canoniced value of standard deviation ( o ) 
 is established. This established (canonicEil) 
 value of standard deviation characterizes 
 the precision of the calibration process, and 
 is treasured information in any calibration 
 laboratory. 
 
 Exhibit 2-E 
 
2-25 
 
 Hence, the canonical value of standard 
 deviation is the quantification of informa- 
 tion accumvilated from past experiences of 
 the calibration laboratory, and is an essen- 
 tial element of the statement of uncertainty. 
 The standard deviation (s) computed from 
 the current calibration is used to check the 
 precision of current work, and to add to the 
 pool of information on the process, but cer- 
 tainly does not represent all the informa- 
 tion available in the possession of an es- 
 tablished calibration laboratory. Only by 
 passing its accumulated information to the 
 users is the calibration laboratory perform- 
 ing a complete service. 
 
 STATEMENT OF UNCERTAINTY 
 
 In the preparation of a statement 
 of xincertainty, it is helpful to bear in mind 
 that: 
 
 1. The derivation of a statement of un- 
 certainty has as its foundation the work 
 done in the laboratory, and is based on 
 information accumulated from past experi- 
 ence, and 
 
 2. In general, information is lost through 
 oversimplification, and demands for im- 
 proved precision and accuracy cannot be 
 met with simplified statements of uncer- 
 tainty. 
 
 Unless a statement of uncertainty is weU 
 formulated and supported, it is difficult to 
 say what is meant by the statement, a dif- 
 ficulty frequently encountered. Since the 
 evaluation of uncertainty is part and par- 
 cel of the high standard of work of a cali- 
 bration laboratory, the statement of uncer- 
 
 tainty deserves all the attention required 
 to make the statement both realistic and 
 useful. To this end, Tables 1, 2 and 3 give 
 terms and expressions compiled as a ready 
 reference for those who are searching for 
 some appropriate format or wording, to car- 
 ry out the thoughts expressed. They sum- 
 marize the recommended practices on 
 expression of uncertainties as given in 
 Chapter 23 of NBS Handbook 91. A re- 
 vised version of this chapter with the title 
 "Expression of Uncertainties of Final Re- 
 sults" by Churchill Eisenhart may be found 
 in NBS Special Publication 300-1. Figure 1 
 gives a condensed summary of this 
 material. Tables 1, 2, and 3 give details of 
 forms of imprecision, systematic error, 
 and uncertainty statements. 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-26 
 
 TABLE 1 - IMPRECISION STATEMENTS 
 
 Value 
 reported 
 
 Index or Measure of Error 
 
 Remarks 
 
 Precision of a mea- 
 surement (calibra- 
 tion) process 
 
 (o). Standard deviation [<r) of 
 a single determination (ob- 
 servation) 
 
 <r(or s with the associated degrees of freedom') is of 
 main interest as an index of precision of the mea- 
 surement process. If the average of n such measure- 
 ments is also reported, see (b) below. 
 
 Arithmetic mean 
 (Xn) of n numbers 
 
 (b). Standard error ((rZ-y/n) of the 
 reported value 
 
 In is of main interest; the number n is also essential 
 information; (Tassumed known.' 
 
 (c). 2 sigma limits 
 (d). 3 sigma limits 
 
 Commonly used bounds of imprecisions; usually used 
 when (T known, or when n large. 
 
 (e). Confidence interval (indicate 
 one- or two-sided) 
 
 Data points assumed to be normally distributed; report 
 confidence coefficient (level) 100 (1 - a)% . ' 
 
 (f). Half-width of confidence inter- 
 val (or confidence limits) 
 
 Same as (e) above; for symmetrical two-sided intervals; 
 an index to bounds of imprecision. ' 
 
 (g). Probable error of the reported 
 value 
 
 Probable error = .6745 -^/^ for normally distributed 
 data points when a known. Use of a/\/n preferred. 
 Incorrect if o" not known. 
 
 (h). Mean deviation, or average 
 deviation, of a measurementfrom 
 the mean calculated from the 
 sample 
 
 Limiting mean of mean deviation =-\y-=- "V ~ff -"^ ' 
 
 normally distributed data points when <r known. 
 Use of a usually preferred. 
 
 (i). Any of the above expressed 
 in percent, or ppm of x^- 
 
 State what is being expressed in percent, eg., (<T/v/n) 
 (1 00/ in ), In being a fairly constant value. 
 
 m means each com- 
 puted from n mea- 
 surements 
 
 (j). (b), (c), (d) and (f) above 
 
 If the measurements are of equal precision and a un- 
 known, use 
 
 s_' =_L 2 S'l^ as estimate of (r^. The no. of de- 
 
 i = l 
 grees of freedom associated with sp is m(n-l). 
 
 (k). Sample coefficient of variation 
 
 or relative percent 
 (vx 100) 
 
 Appropriate when the m means cover a wide range 
 and where the v's computed for the m sets ore about 
 the same magnitude. Give range of v's for the m 
 sets. The means must be positive and bounded away 
 from zero. 
 
 Weighted mean 
 w,x, +Wjij 
 
 I w . + W- 
 
 Standard error (ff~') of the 
 
 weighted mean 
 
 If w, = l/cTj/ ond w, = l/(7-Xj'. fhen <rj = ^^^^^ 
 
 Not recommended when the ff's are not known and 
 ore estimated by s computed from small number of 
 measurements. 
 
 An equation (theo- 
 retical or empirical) 
 fitted to data points 
 by the method of 
 least squares 
 
 (m). Standard deviation computed 
 from the deviations (residuals) of 
 data points from the fitted curve 
 
 Report n, the number of data points, and k, the num- 
 ber of constants fitted, 
 
 5'=£ (y, _9.)V(n-k), 
 i=l 
 
 where y- is the value on the fitted curve for the 
 
 particular X\.^ Value of s usually given in computer 
 print-out. 
 
 Constants (coeffi- 
 cients) in the equa- 
 tion fitted to the 
 data points by the 
 me th od of least 
 squares 
 
 (n). Standard errors of the coeffi- 
 cients based on the standard de- 
 viation computed under (m) 
 
 Standard errors usually given in computer print-out. 
 Report n and k as above. '■ 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-27 
 
 TABLE 1 - IMPRECISION STATEMENTS - (Confinued) 
 
 Value 
 reported 
 
 Index or Measure of Error 
 
 Remarks 
 
 A predicted point on 
 the curve y for a 
 particular x,, 
 
 (o). Standard error (s* ) of the pre- 
 dicted point 
 
 For the straight line case, the computer print-out gives 
 the variance-covariance matrix ( ' ). 
 
 sj' = S,, -1- 2s,2Xo + S„Zo'.' 
 
 Report n and k. 
 
 A predicted observ- 
 ed value for a par- 
 ticular Xq 
 
 (p). Standard error of the predict- 
 ed value of y 
 
 For the straight line case, Sy' = Sy' +s' where Sy' 
 and s' are that given in (o) and (m) respectively.' 
 Report n and k 
 
 Value of function of 
 ffie arithmetic 
 means of several 
 measured variables 
 
 (q). Standard error calculated by 
 the use of propagation of error 
 formulas 
 
 Appropriate when errors of measurements ore small 
 compared to the values of variables measured. Use 
 standard error of the means of the variables in the 
 formulas. * Report number of measurements from 
 which these standard errors are computed. 
 
 Percentage or pro- 
 portion (r/ n), r and 
 n being counts 
 
 (r). Confidence limits of the true 
 proportion P 
 
 Procedures for obtaining exact and approximate confi- 
 dence limits are discussed in Chapter 7, NBS Hand- 
 book 91 . State one-sided or two-sided. 
 
 TABLE 2 -SYSTEMATIC ERROR ^ (BIAS) STATEMENTS 
 
 Value 
 reported 
 
 Index or Measure of Error 
 
 Remarks 
 
 Numerical value re- 
 sulting from a mea- 
 surement process 
 
 Reasonable bounds ascribed to 
 the value originating from: 
 (i). systematic error reliably es- 
 tablished 
 
 Detailed discussions of systematic errors are always 
 
 helpful. 
 
 Positive wording is appropriate: 
 
 ". . . is not in error by more than . . ." 
 
 ". . . Is accurate within ± . . ." 
 
 (ii). systematic error estimated 
 from experience or by judgment 
 
 Use modifier such as "believed", "estimated", "consider- 
 ed", to signify the conjectural nature of the statement. 
 
 (iii). combination of a number of 
 elemental systematic errors 
 
 State explicitly the method of combination such as 
 "the simple sum of the bounds" or "the square root of 
 the sum of squares". 
 
 (iv). uncertainty in some funda- 
 mental constant 
 
 Give reference to the value of constant used. 
 
 (v). uncertainty in calibrated 
 values 
 
 Ascertain the meaning of the systematic and random 
 components of the uncertainty from the calibration 
 laboratory so that decisions on the uses of these com- 
 ponents con be mode from the correct interpretations. 
 
 (vi). bias in the method of cor 
 putotion 
 
 Correct if feasible, or give the magnitudei. 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (com.) 
 
2-28 
 
 TABLE 3 - UNCERTAINTY STATEMENTS 
 
 Value 
 
 
 
 reported 
 
 Index or Measure of error 
 
 Remarks 
 
 Numerical value re- 
 
 Bounds to inaccuracy: 
 
 Explicit expression of correctness to the last significant 
 
 sulting from a mea- 
 
 (1). Systematic error and impre- 
 
 figure, interpreted as being accurate within ±'/2 units 
 
 surement process 
 
 cision both negligible 
 
 in the last significant figure given. 
 
 
 (2). Imprecision negligible. Bounds 
 
 Sentence form preferred such as given under remark 
 
 
 on inaccuracy given to no more 
 
 for (i) and (ii). Footnote needed if bounds are given 
 
 
 than two significant figures. 
 
 in tabular form. 
 
 
 (3). Systematic error negligible. 
 
 State explicitly the index used and give essential in- 
 
 
 Index of precision (b), (g), (h), (i), 
 
 formation associated with the index. Qualify index cal- 
 
 
 (k), or (n) stated to no more than 
 
 culoted by the word "computed". Avoid using expressions 
 
 
 two significant figures 
 
 of the form a ± b unless the meaning of b is explained 
 fully immediately following or in footnote. 
 
 
 (3'). Systematic error negligible. 
 
 Same as under (3). 
 
 
 Bounds to imprecision (c), (d), (e), 
 
 
 
 or (f) stated to no more than two 
 
 
 
 significant figures. 
 
 
 
 (4). Neither systematic error nor 
 
 (2j and (3) above separately stated. 
 
 
 imprecision negligible. Two nu- 
 
 
 
 merics indicating bounds to sys- 
 
 
 
 tematic error and index of im- 
 
 
 
 precision respectively 
 
 
 
 (4'). Bounds to systematic error 
 
 (2) and (3') above where the two components either 
 
 
 and imprecision combined, indi- 
 
 have been previously described, or explained im- 
 
 
 cating the likely inaccuracy of the 
 
 mediately following (or in footnote). 
 
 
 value 
 
 
 
 (5). Quoted from literature 
 
 State reference and give author's interpretation of the 
 uncertainty; odd remark if meaning unknown or 
 ambiguous. 
 
 If (T Is not known, use the computed standard deviation s based on k measurements as an estimate of a, where 
 
 s^ = -i- 2 {^\ ~^l,)'' The number (k-1 ) is the degrees of freedom associated with s. 
 
 '*"' i=l 
 For Interpretation see Chapter 1, NBS Handbook 91, Experimental Statistics, by M. G. Natrello, 1963. 
 
 For details see Chapter 5 (straight line), and Chapter 6 (multivariate and polynomial), NBS Handbook 91 . 
 
 For details see "Notes on the use of propagation of error formulas", by Harry H. Ku, NBS Journal of Research, Vol. 
 70C, No. 4, October-December, 1966. 
 
 See "Reolistic Evaluation of the Precision and Accuracy of Instrument Calibration Systems" by Churchill Eisenhart, 
 NBS Journal of research. Vol. 67C, No. 2, April-June, 1963, and "Systemotic Errors in Physical Constants" by W. J. 
 Youden, Physics Today 1 4, 1 961 . 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-29 
 
 FIGURE 1 - SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDATIONS ON 
 EXPRESSIONS OF THE UNCERTAINTIES OF FINAL RESULTS 
 
 SYSTEMATIC ERROR AND 
 IMPRECISION BOTH NEGLIGIBLE 
 
 (CASE 1) 
 
 In this case, the reported result shovild 
 be given correct to the number of signifi- 
 cant figures consistent with the accuracy 
 requirements of the situation, together with 
 an explicit statement of its accuracy or 
 correctness. 
 
 SYSTEMATIC ERROR NOT 
 NEGLIGIBLE, IMPRECISION 
 NEGLIGIBLE (CASE 2) 
 
 (a) Qualification of a reported result 
 should be limited to a single quasi-absolute 
 type of statement that places bounds on its 
 inaccuracy; 
 
 (b) These bounds should be stated to no 
 more than two significant figures; 
 
 (c) The reported result itself should be 
 given (i.e., rounded) to the last place af- 
 fected by the stated bounds, unless it is 
 desired to indicate and preserve such rela- 
 tive accuracy or precision of a higher order 
 that the result may possess for certain par- 
 ticular uses; 
 
 (d) Accuracy statements should be given 
 in sentence form in all cases, except when 
 a number of results of different accuracies 
 are presented, e.g., in tabular arrangement. 
 If it is necessary or desirable to indicate 
 the respective accuracies of a number of 
 results, the results should be given in the 
 
 form a ± b (or a^ °, if necessary) with an 
 
 appropriate explanatory remark (as a foot- 
 note to the table, or incorporated in the 
 accompanying test) to the effect that the 
 
 ± b, or ^ ^ , signify bounds to the errors 
 
 which the a's may be subject. 
 
 (e) The fact that the imprecision is negli- 
 gible should be stated explicity. 
 
 NEITHER SYSTEMATIC ERROR NOR 
 IMPRECISION NEGLIGIBLE (CASE 3) 
 
 (a) A reported result should be qualified 
 by: (1) a quasi-absolute type of statement 
 that places bounds on its systematic error; 
 and, (2) a separate statement of its stan- 
 dard error or of an upper bound thereto, 
 whenever a reliable determination of such 
 value or bound is available — otherwise, a 
 computed value of the standard error so 
 designated should be given, together with 
 a statement of a number of degrees of free- 
 dom on which it is based; 
 
 (b) The bounds to its systematic error 
 and the measure of its imprecision should 
 be stated to no more than two significant 
 figures; 
 
 (c) The reported result itself should be 
 stated, at most, to the last place affected 
 by the finer of the two qualifying state- 
 ments, unless it is desired to indicate and 
 preserve such relative accuracy or preci- 
 sion of a higher order that the result may 
 possess for certain particular uses; 
 
 (d) The qualification of a reported result, 
 with respect to its imprecision and syste- 
 matic error, should be given in sentence 
 form, except when results of different preci- 
 sion or with different bounds to their sys- 
 tematic errors Eire presented in tabular ar- 
 rangement. If it is necessary or desirable 
 to indicate their respective imprecisions or 
 bounds to their respective systematic errors, 
 such information may be given in a parallel 
 column or columns, with appropriate iden- 
 tification. 
 
 SYSTEMATIC ERROR NEGLIGIBLE, 
 IMPRECISION NOT NEGLIGIBLE 
 (CASE 4) 
 
 (a) Qualification of a reported value should 
 be limited to a statement of its standard 
 error or of an upper bound thereto, when- 
 ever a reliable determination of such value 
 or bound is available. Otherwise, a com- 
 puted vedue of the standard error so desig- 
 nated should be given, together with a state- 
 ment of the number of degrees of freedom 
 on which it is based; 
 
 (b) The standard error, or upper bound 
 thereto, should be stated to not more than 
 two significant figures; 
 
 (c) The reported result itself should be 
 stated, at most, to the last place affected 
 by the stated value or bound to its impre- 
 cision, unless it is desired to indicate and 
 preserve such relative precision of a higher 
 order that the result may possess for cer- 
 tain particular uses; 
 
 (d) The qualification of a reported result 
 with respect to its imprecision should be 
 given in sentence form, except when results 
 of different precision are presented in tabu- 
 lar arrangement and it is necessary or de- 
 sirable to indicate their respective impre- 
 cisions, in which event such information may 
 be given in a parallel column or columns, 
 with appropriate identification. 
 
 (e) The fact that the systematic error is 
 negligible should be stated explicitly. 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-30 
 
 POSTSCRIPT 
 
 Over the intervening years since the publication of 
 Eisenhart 's and Ku 's articles, it has become apparent that a 
 few additional comments may be useful. It is equally 
 apparent that a complete revision is neither necessary nor 
 de^rable inasmuch as the major thrust and content of the 
 articles remain as valid and as appropriate as when first 
 written. For this reason, these comments are made as a 
 postscript. 
 
 Uncertainty Assessments Must Be Complete 
 
 The uncertainty of a reported value is meant to be a 
 credible estimate of the likely limits to its actual error, i.e., 
 the magnitude and sign of its deviation from the truth. As 
 such, uncertainty statements must be based on as nearly 
 complete an assessment as possible. This assessment 
 process must consider every conceivable source of 
 inaccuracy in the result. 
 
 A measurement process generally consists of a very 
 complicated sequence of many individual unit operations 
 or steps. Virtually every step in this sequence introduces 
 a conceivable source of inaccuracy whose magnitude 
 must be assessed. These sources include: 
 
 • Inherent stochastic variability of the measurement 
 
 process; 
 
 • Uncertainties in standards and calibrated apparatus; 
 
 • Effects of environmental factors, such as variations in 
 temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, and power 
 supply voltage; 
 
 • Time-dependent instabilities due to gradual and subtle 
 changes in standards or apparatus; 
 
 • Inability to realize physical model because of 
 instrument limitations; 
 
 • Methodology procedural errors, such as incorrect 
 logic, or misunderstanding what one is or should be 
 doing; 
 
 • Uncertainties arising from interferences, impurities, 
 inhomogeneity, inadequate resolution, incomplete 
 discrimination, etc.; 
 
 • Metrologist errors, such as misreading of an 
 instrument; 
 
 • Malfunctioning or damaged apparatus; 
 
 • Laboratory practice including handling techniques, 
 cleanliness, etc.; and 
 
 • Computational uncertainties as well as errors in 
 transcription of data, and other calculational or arithme- 
 tical mistakes. 
 
 This list should not be interpreted as exhaustive, but 
 rather as illustrative of the most common generic sources 
 of inaccuracy that may be present. 
 
 The various sources of inaccuracy are generally 
 classified into sources of imprecision (random 
 components) and sources of bias (fixed offsets). To which 
 category a particular source should be properly assigned 
 is often difficult and troublesome. In part, this is because 
 many experimental procedures or individual steps in the 
 overall measurement process embody both systematic and 
 
 stochastic (random) elements. (For an alternative 
 discussion that questions the need for a clear cut 
 distinction between random and systematic components 
 of uncertainty, see [7].) One practical approach is to 
 classify the sources of inaccuracy according to how the 
 uncertainty is estimated. In this way, sources of 
 imprecision are considered to be those components which 
 can be and are estimated by a statistical analysis of 
 replicate determinations. For completeness, the systematic 
 uncertainty components can be considered to be the 
 residual set of conceivable sources of inaccuracy that are 
 biased and not subject to random variability, and those 
 that may be due to random causes but cannot be or are not 
 assessed by statistical methods. The systematic category 
 includes sources of inaccuracy other than biases in order 
 to obtain a complete accounting of all sources of 
 inaccuracy in the measurement process. Hence, it is 
 meaningful to report a random uncertainty contribution, 
 only if one has a computed statistic for the magnitude of 
 its imprecision or random variation. Many sources of 
 inaccuracy may exist consisting of several components 
 from both the random and systematic categories and can 
 be assessed only after consideration of the more funda- 
 mental processes involved. The uncertainty in the 
 calibration of an instrument with a standard reference 
 material, for example, would have not only components 
 from the uncertainty in the standard itself, but also 
 uncertainty components arising from the use of the 
 standard in performing the calibration. 
 
 Assessment of Imprecision (Random Uncertainties) 
 
 Although the treatment and expressions of reporting 
 the imprecision of measurement results were adequately 
 covered in the original article, a number of points are of 
 sufficient importance to deserve reemphasis. 
 
 The only way to assess realistically the overall 
 imprecision is to make direct — or preferably, when 
 possible, indirect — replicate determinations [1] and 
 calculate an appropriate statistic such as the standard 
 error of the mean. It is extremely important to be definite 
 on what constitutes a "replicate determination" because 
 the extent to which conditions are allowed to vary freely 
 over successive "repetitions" of the measurement process 
 determines the scope of the statistical inferences that may 
 be drawn from measurements obtained [2, sec. 4.1]. When 
 measurements of a particular quantity made on a single 
 occasion exhibit closer mutual agreement than 
 measurements made on different occasions so that 
 differences between occasions are indicated, the value of 
 the computed standard error of the mean of all the 
 measurements obtained by lumping all of the 
 measurements together will underestimate the actual 
 standard error of the mean. A more realistic value is 
 given by taking the arithmetic means of the 
 measurements obtained on the respective occasions as the 
 replicate determinations and calculating the standard error 
 of their mean in the usual way [3, sec. 3.5]. 
 
 In many situations, it may not be possible or feasible 
 because of time and cost constraints to perform a 
 sufficient number of completely independent determina- 
 tions of the measurement result. For results derived from 
 several component quantities, the individual imprecision 
 estimates must be propagated to obtain the imprecision of 
 the final result. It must be emphasized, however, that 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-31 
 
 these estimates of imprecision should not be based 
 exclusively on the information derived from just the 
 present measurements. Presently derived information 
 should be added to the information accumulated in the 
 past on the imprecision of the measurement process. In 
 this way, more realistic and reliable canonical values of 
 the imprecision statistics may be established over time. 
 Ideally, every major step or component of the 
 measurement process should be independently assessed. 
 This would include not only the variability inherent in 
 the particular measurement of concern, but also the 
 imprecision arising from corrections, calibration factors, 
 and any other quantities that make up the final result. 
 
 Assessment of Systematic Uncertainties 
 
 Although a general guideline for the approach to the 
 assessment of systematic uncertainties can be formulated, 
 there are, unfortunately, no rules to objectively assign a 
 magnitude to them. For the most part, it is a subjective 
 process. Their magnitudes should preferably be based on 
 experimental verification, but may have to rely on the 
 judgment and experience of the metrologist. In general, 
 each systematic uncertainty contribution is considered as 
 a quasi-absolute upper bound, overall or maximum limit 
 on its inaccuracy. Its magnitude is typically estimated in 
 terms of an interval from plus to minus S about the mean 
 of the measurement result. By what method then should 
 the magnitude of these maximum limits be assigned? It 
 may be based on comparison to a standard, on 
 experiments designed for the purpose [4], or on 
 verification with two or more independent and reliable 
 measurement methods. Additionally, the limits may be 
 based on judgment, based on experience, based on 
 intuition, or based on other measurements and data. Or 
 the limits may include combinations of some or all of the 
 above factors. Whenever possible, they should be 
 empirically derived or verified. The reliability of the 
 estimate of the systematic uncertainty will largely depend 
 on the resourcefulness and ingenuity of the metrologist. 
 
 logically should be added to an imprecision estimate at a 
 similar confidence level. That is, for example, the overall 
 uncertainty u may be given by 
 
 u = [t,(a)]s + 
 
 9 
 
 y=i 
 
 where s is the computed standard error based on v 
 degrees of freedom, t^,{a) is the Student-/ value 
 corresponding to a two-tail significance level of a =0.05, 
 0.01, or 0.001 (depending on the practice in the 
 measurement field concerned), and Sj is the magnitude of 
 the estimated systematic uncertainty for each of the 
 identified q systematic uncertainty components. This 
 approach probably overestimates the inaccuracy, but can 
 be considered as an estimate of the maximum possible 
 limits. For example, if someone estimated that five contri- 
 butions of about equal magnitude made up the total 
 systematic error, that person would have to be very 
 unlucky if all five were plus, or all five were minus. Yet, 
 if there was one dominant contributor, it might be a very 
 valid approximation. 
 
 Two other approaches have also been widely used. 
 These methods add in quadrature all of the systematic 
 uncertainty components, and either add the resulting 
 quantity linearly to the standard error estimate. 
 
 s + V 1 Sj 
 
 y=i 
 
 or add it in quadrature to the standard error estimate. 
 
 ? + 1 s; 
 
 7=1 
 
 The Need for an Overall Uncertainty Statement 
 
 Without deprecating the perils of shorthand expres- 
 sions, there is often a need for an overall uncertainty 
 statement which combines the imprecision and systematic 
 uncertainty components. Arguments that it is incorrect 
 from a theoretical point of view to combine the 
 individual components in any fashion are not always 
 practical. First, an approach which retains all details is 
 not amenable for large compilations of results from 
 numerous sources. And second, this approach shifts the 
 burden of evaluating the uncertainties to users. Many 
 users need a single uncertainty value resulting from the 
 combination of all sources of inaccuracy. These users 
 believe, and rightly so, that this overall estimate of 
 inaccuracy can be most appropriately made by the person 
 responsible for the measurement result. It must be 
 emphasized, however, that there is no one clearly 
 superior appropriate method for reporting an overall 
 uncertainty, and that the choice of method is somewhat 
 arbitrary. Several methods are commonly employed [5,6]. 
 
 One method is to add linearly all components of the 
 systematic uncertainty and linearly add the total to the 
 imprecision estimate. Since the individual systematic un- 
 certainties (Sy) are considered to be maximum limits, it 
 
 These are frequently considered (erroneously) to 
 correspond to a confidence level with P=68%. 
 
 In another method, often termed the PTB approach [6], 
 the component systematic uncertainties are assumed to be 
 independent and distributed such that all values within 
 the estimated limits are equiprobable (rectangular or 
 uniform distribution) [8]. With these assumptions, the 
 rectangular systematic uncertainty distributions can be 
 convoluted to obtain a combined probability distribution 
 for which the variance may be computed. This may then 
 be combined in quadrature with that for the random 
 uncertainty. In its simplest form, the uncertainty 
 components are combined to form an overall uncertainty 
 by 
 
 kVi + (1/3) 2 
 
 where k is customarily taken as 2 or 3. The above simple 
 form is not appropriate when one of the component Sy's is 
 much larger than the others; in such a case it will be 
 more informative to keep that component separate from 
 the others and add it linearly. 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (cont.) 
 
2-32 
 
 A Concluding Thought 
 
 If there is one fundamental proposition for the expres- 
 sion of uncertainties, it is 
 
 The information content of the statement of 
 uncertainty determines, to a large extent, the worth of 
 the fmal result. 
 
 This information content can be maximized by following 
 a few simple principles: 
 
 BE EXPLICIT 
 PROVIDE DETAILS 
 DON'T OVERSIMPLIFY 
 
 When an overall uncertainty is reported, one should 
 explicitly state how the separate components were 
 combined. In addition, for results of primary importance, 
 a detailed discussion and complete specification of all of 
 the separate uncertainty components is still required. In 
 this way, some users will benefit from having the 
 metrologist's estimate of the overall uncertainty, while 
 more sophisticated users will still have access to all of the 
 information necessary for them to evaluate, combine, or 
 use the uncertainties as they see fit. 
 
 REFERENCES AND NOTES 
 
 [1] Youden, W. J. Statistical aspects of analytical 
 determinations. The Analyst 77: 874-878; 1952, 
 Dec: Reprinted in Journal of Quality Technology 
 4: 45-49; 1972, Jan: Youden, W. J., Connor, W. S., 
 Making one measurement do the work of two; 
 Chemical and Engineering Progress 49: 549-552; 
 1953, Oct. Reprinted in Journal of Quality 
 Technology 4: 25-28; 1972, Jan. 
 
 [2] Eisenhart, Churchill. Realistic evaluation of the 
 precision and accuracy of instrument calibration 
 systems. J. Res. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) 67C (2): 
 161-187; 1963; Reprinted as paper 1.2 in NBS 
 Special Publication 300-1. 
 
 [3] Eisenhart, Churchill. Contribution to panel 
 
 discussion of adjustments of the fundamental 
 physical constants. Langenberg, D. N., Taylor, B. 
 N., eds. Precision Measurement and Fundamental 
 Constants, Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Spec. Publ. 343: 
 509-518; 1971. 
 
 [4] Youden's burette experiment. Journal of Quality 
 Technology 4: 20-23 1972, Jan. Youden, W. J., 
 Systematic errors in physical constants. Physics 
 Today, 14, 32-34, 36, 38, 40, 43; 1961, Sept. 
 Reprinted as paper 1.4 in NBS Special Publication 
 300-1. Youden, W. J., Enduring values, 
 Technometrics 14: 1-11; 1972, Feb. 
 
 [5] Campion, P. J.; Burns, J. E.; Williams, A. A code of 
 practice for the detailed statement of accuracy. 
 National Physical Laboratory. London: Her 
 Majesty's Stationery Office. 1953. 11-57. 
 
 [6] Wagner, Siegfried R. On the quantitative 
 
 characterization of the uncertainty of experimental 
 results in metrology: PTB-Mitteilungen 89: 83-89; 
 1979, Feb. 
 
 [7] MUller, Jorg G. Some second thoughts on error 
 statements. Nuclear Instruments and Methods 163, 
 241-251; 1979. 
 
 [8] A numerical comparison of uncertainty limits 
 resulting from these assumptions with those 
 implied by several alternative distributional 
 assumptions is provided by table 1 on page 184 of 
 [2], and discussed on the same and following page. 
 
 Churchill Eisenhart 
 
 Ronald Colle 
 
 July 1980 
 
 Exhibit 2-E (com.) 
 
Exhibit 2-F. Abbreviations and Symbols 
 
 2-33 
 
 Abbreviations for technical terms conserve space 
 in drawings, specifications, and tables. Ordinarily 
 abbreviations and symbols for units should be used 
 in the text only when preceded by numerals; but 
 when a long word or phrase is repeated many times 
 in an article, it may be replaced by an abbreviation 
 that is explained when it first occurs, for example, 
 electron spin resonance (esr). In general, an 
 abbreviation that is not well known to the reading 
 audience for which the paper is designed should be 
 written out in full the first time, with the 
 abbreviation following in parentheses. No periods 
 are used in abbreviations except in a few special 
 instances. Symbols for units are written in the same 
 way for both singular and plural. 
 
 The following list of selected abbreviations and 
 symbols is included here for the convenience of 
 NBS staff members; note that it includes some 
 terms that are being replaced by SI units. For a 
 complete list of units and symbols of the 
 International System of Units (SI) see exhibit 2-D. 
 Some outside journals, such as those of the 
 American Physical Society and the American 
 Chemical Society, publish their own list of 
 abbreviations which should be followed in papers 
 for those journals. 
 
 absolute abs 
 
 acre-foot acre-ft 
 
 alternating current ac 
 
 altitude alt 
 
 ambient amb 
 
 ampere-hour Ah 
 
 amplitude modulation AM 
 
 angstrom A 
 
 anhydrous anhyd 
 
 antilogarithm antilog 
 
 approximate approx 
 
 aqueous aq 
 
 arc tangent arctan 
 
 arc cotangent arc cot 
 
 atmosphere atm 
 
 atmosphere, standard A^ 
 
 atomic weight at. wt 
 
 audiofrequency af 
 
 average av 
 
 avoirdupois avdp 
 
 azimuth az or a 
 
 barrel bbl 
 
 Baume Be 
 
 board foot fbm 
 
 boiling point bp 
 
 brake horsepower bhp 
 
 Brindell hardness number Bhn 
 
 British thermal unit Btu 
 
 calorie cal 
 
 calculated calc 
 
 candlepower cp 
 
 cathode ray oscilloscope CRO 
 
 centipoise cP 
 
 chemical chem 
 
 chemically pure CP 
 
 circa ca 
 
 circular circ 
 
 circular mils cmil 
 
 coefficient coeff 
 
 cologarithm colog 
 
 compound compd 
 
 concentrate cone 
 
 conductivity cond 
 
 constant const 
 
 contact potential difference cpd 
 
 continuous wave cw 
 
 cosecant esc 
 
 cosine cos 
 
 cotangent cot 
 
 crystalline cryst 
 
 cubic cu 
 
 cubic centimeter cm^ 
 
 cubic foot ft' 
 
 cubic feet per second ftVs 
 
 cubic inch in' 
 
 cubic yard yd' 
 
 decibel dB 
 
 degree deg 
 
 degree Fahrenheit °F 
 
 diameter diam 
 
 differential thermal analysis dta 
 
 direct current dc 
 
 efficiency eff 
 
 electric elec 
 
 electromagnetic units emu 
 
 electromotive force emf 
 
 electron spin resonance esr 
 
 electron volt eV 
 
 electrostatic units esu 
 
 equation eq 
 
 equivalent weight equiv wt 
 
 external ext 
 
 experiment expt 
 
 experimental exptl 
 
 exponential exp 
 
 face-centered cubic fee 
 
 feet per minute ft/min or fpm 
 
 feet per second ft/s or fps 
 
 figure fig. 
 
 fluid fl 
 
 foot ft 
 
 foot-candle fc 
 
 foot-lambert fL 
 
 freezing point fp 
 
 frequency modulation FM 
 
 function fn 
 
 gallon gal 
 
 gallons per minute gal/min or gpm 
 
 gallons per second gal/s or gps 
 
 giga-electron volt GeV 
 
 horsepower hp 
 
 hour h 
 
 hyperbolic cosecant csch 
 
 hyperbolic cosine cosh 
 
 hyperbolic cotangent coth 
 
 hyperbolic secant sech 
 
 hyperbolic sine sinh 
 
 hyperbolic tangent tanh 
 
 Exhibit 2-F 
 
2-34 
 
 hyperfine structure hfs 
 
 inch in 
 
 inches per second in/s or ips 
 
 indicated horsepower ihp 
 
 infrared ir 
 
 inside diameter i.d. 
 
 insoluble insol 
 
 intermediate frequency i-f 
 
 internal int 
 
 International Critical Tables ICT 
 
 kilocalorie kcal 
 
 kiloelectron volt keV 
 
 kilowatthour kWh 
 
 kinetic energy KE 
 
 lambert L 
 
 latitude lat 
 
 limit lim 
 
 linear foot lin ft 
 
 liquid liq 
 
 logarithm (common) log 
 
 logarithm (natural) In or (logj) 
 
 longitude long. 
 
 magnetomotive force mmf 
 
 mathematics, mathematical math 
 
 maximum max 
 
 mean effective pressure mep 
 
 mean horizontal candlepower mhcp 
 
 melting point mp 
 
 meter-kilogram-second mks 
 
 microinch ;j,in 
 
 miles per hour mi/h or mph 
 
 miles per hour per second mphps 
 
 millilambert mL 
 
 minimum min 
 
 minute min 
 
 minute (angular measure) 
 
 molar M 
 
 molecular weight mol wt 
 
 negative neg 
 
 nuclear magnetic resonance nmr 
 
 number No. 
 
 observed obs 
 
 ounce oz 
 
 outside diameter o.d. 
 
 page p. 
 
 pages pp. 
 
 parts per million ppm 
 
 peak pk 
 
 pint pt 
 
 positive pos 
 
 potential difference PD 
 
 potentiometer pot 
 
 pound lb 
 
 pounds per brake horsepower-hour Ib/bhp-hr 
 
 pounds per square foot Ib/ft^ 
 
 pounds per square inch Ib/in^ 
 
 power factor PF 
 
 precipitate ppt 
 
 pressure- volume-temperature PVT 
 
 probability prob 
 
 probable error pe 
 
 quart qt 
 
 radiofrequency rf 
 
 relative humidity rh 
 
 revolutions per minute r/min or rpm 
 
 revolutions per second r/s or rps 
 
 root mean square rms 
 
 secant sec 
 
 second (angular measure) " 
 
 sensitivity sens 
 
 sine sin 
 
 soluble sol 
 
 solution soln 
 
 specific gravity sp gr 
 
 specific heat sp ht 
 
 specific volume sp vol 
 
 spherical candlepower scp 
 
 square sq 
 
 square foot ft 
 
 square inch in^ 
 
 standard std 
 
 standard deviation SD 
 
 standard temperature and pressure STP 
 
 standing wave ratio SWR 
 
 symmetrical sym 
 
 synchronous sync 
 
 tangent tan 
 
 temperature temp 
 
 ultrahigh frequency uhf 
 
 ultraviolet uv 
 
 United States Pharmacopoeia USP 
 
 vacuum-tube voltmeter VTVM 
 
 vapor pressure vp 
 
 variable frequency oscillator VFO 
 
 versed sine vers 
 
 versus vs 
 
 very high frequency vhf 
 
 vibrations per minute vpm 
 
 weight wt 
 
 yard yd 
 
 year yr 
 
 Abbreviations for States and Provinces 
 
 UNITED STATES 
 
 AL 
 
 Alabama 
 
 AK 
 
 Alaska 
 
 AZ 
 
 Arizona 
 
 AR 
 
 Arkansas 
 
 CA 
 
 California 
 
 CO 
 
 Colorado 
 
 CT 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 DE 
 
 Delaware 
 
 FL 
 
 Florida 
 
 GA 
 
 Georgia 
 
 HI 
 
 Hawaii 
 
 ID 
 
 Idaho 
 
 IL 
 
 Illinois 
 
 IN 
 
 Indiana 
 
 lA 
 
 Iowa 
 
 KS 
 
 Kansas 
 
 KY 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 LA 
 
 Louisiana 
 
 ME 
 
 Maine 
 
 MD 
 
 Maryland 
 
 MA 
 
 Massachusetts 
 
 MI 
 
 Michigan 
 
 MN 
 
 Minnesota 
 
 MS 
 
 Mississippi 
 
 MO 
 
 Missouri 
 
 MT 
 
 Montana 
 
 NE 
 
 Nebraska 
 
 Exhibit 2-F (cont.) 
 
2-35 
 
 NV 
 
 Nevada 
 
 NH 
 
 New Hampshire 
 
 NJ 
 
 New Jersey 
 
 NM 
 
 New Mexico 
 
 NY 
 
 New York 
 
 NC 
 
 North CaroHna 
 
 ND 
 
 North Dakota 
 
 OH 
 
 Ohio 
 
 OK 
 
 Oklahoma 
 
 OR 
 
 Oregon 
 
 PA 
 
 Pennsylvania 
 
 RI 
 
 Rhode Island 
 
 SC 
 
 South Carolina 
 
 SD 
 
 South Dakota 
 
 TN 
 
 Tennessee 
 
 TX 
 
 Texas 
 
 UT 
 
 Utah 
 
 VT 
 
 Vermont 
 
 VA 
 
 Virginia 
 
 WA 
 
 Washington 
 
 WV 
 
 West Virginia 
 
 WI 
 
 Wisconsin 
 
 WY 
 
 Wyoming 
 
 CZ 
 
 Canal Zone 
 
 DC 
 
 District of Columbia 
 
 GU 
 
 Guam 
 
 PR 
 
 Puerto Rico 
 
 VI 
 
 Virgin Islands 
 
 CANADA 
 
 AB 
 
 Alberta 
 
 BC 
 
 British Columbia 
 
 MB 
 
 Manitoba 
 
 NB 
 
 New Brunswick 
 
 NF 
 
 Newfoundland 
 
 NT 
 
 Northwest Territories 
 
 NS 
 
 Nova Scotia 
 
 
 ON 
 
 Ontario 
 
 
 PE 
 
 Prince Edward Island 
 
 PQ 
 
 Quebec 
 
 
 SK 
 
 Saskatchewar 
 
 I 
 
 YT 
 
 Ukon Territory 
 
 LB 
 
 Labrador 
 
 
 Greek Alphabet 
 
 
 Caps. 
 
 L.C. 
 
 Name 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 Alpha 
 
 B 
 
 fi 
 
 Beta 
 
 r 
 
 y 
 
 Gamma 
 
 A 
 
 s 
 
 Delta 
 
 E 
 
 £ 
 
 Epislon 
 
 Z 
 
 ^ 
 
 Zeta 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 Eta 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 Theta 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 Iota 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 Kappa 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 Lambda 
 
 M 
 
 i* 
 
 Mu 
 
 N 
 
 V 
 
 Nu 
 
 ff 
 
 € 
 
 Xi 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 Omicron 
 
 n 
 
 TT 
 
 Pi 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 Rho 
 
 2 
 
 or 
 
 Sigma 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 Tau 
 
 Y 
 
 V 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 <I> 
 
 <!> 
 
 Phi 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 Chi 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 Psi 
 
 a. 
 
 0) 
 
 Omega 
 
 Exhibit 2-F (cont.) 
 
2-36 
 
 Bibliography 2-A. Aids to Scientific and Technical Writing 
 
 Copies of all of these aids are available in the 
 NBS Library. Those marked with an asterisk (*) are 
 also available from the NBS storerooms. 
 
 *American National Standards Institute. Prepara- 
 tion of scientific papers for written or oral presenta- 
 tion (Z39. 16-1979). New York: American National 
 Standards Institute; 1979. 16 p. 
 
 This publication details guidelines for style and 
 internal organization, which increase the 
 probability of a scientific or technical paper being 
 accepted for publication and being noticed, read, 
 and understood by the intended readers. It is a 
 valuable and authoritative guide. 
 
 •American National Standards Institute. Writing 
 abstracts (Z39. 14-1979). New York: American 
 National Standards Institute; 1979. 15 p. 
 
 This publication provides guidelines for writing 
 abstracts acceptable to many Government, 
 scientific, and technical organizations. 
 
 Barrass, R. Scientists must write: A guide to 
 better writing for scientists, engineers, and students. 
 New York: Wiley; 1978. 176 p. 
 
 Written by a scientist who knows both how 
 difficult it is to write well and how important it is 
 for scientists and engineers to do so. Where 
 appropriate the advice given is consistent with 
 ANSI. The book includes exercises, which make 
 it suitable for self-instruction. 
 
 Bowman, William J. Graphic communication. New 
 York: John Wiley and Sons; 1968. 210 p. 
 
 One of the better-prepared books concerned with 
 clear presentation of ideas through various types 
 of illustrations. 
 
 CODATA Bulletin #9. Guide for the presentation 
 in the primary literature of numerical data derived 
 from experiments (Dec. 1973). 
 
 Ebbitt, D. R. Writer's guide and index to English, 
 6th ed. Glenview, 111: Scott, Foresman, and 
 Company; 1978. 715 p. 
 
 This is a standard handbook for any kind of 
 writer. Part I, "The Writer's Guide," has 
 thorough discussions of style, grammar, 
 punctuation, usage, and mechanics. Part II, "The 
 Index to English," is an alphabetical arrangement 
 of the subjects in Part I. 
 
 Fowler, H. W. Dictionary of modern English 
 usage, 2d ed. Gowens, E. ed. New York: Oxford 
 University Press; 1965. 742 p. 
 
 This is probably the most influential book on 
 English usage. It is written in a vigorous, witty 
 style. 
 
 Mills, G. H.; Walter, J. A. Technical writing, 4th 
 ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston; 1978. 
 587 p. 
 
 More detailed than Ulman's book and less easy to 
 use for reference, but highly readable with a very 
 sensible approach. There is a good section on 
 publishing in professional journals. 
 
 Rathbone, R. R. Communicating technical 
 information: A guide to current uses and abuses in 
 scientific and engineering writing. Reading, Mass.: 
 Addison- Wesley Publishing Company; 1966. 104 p. 
 
 A paperback geared for the person who wishes a 
 short review of writing problems in science and 
 engineering. It is readable and well done. 
 
 Strunk, W.; White, E. B. The elements of style, 3d 
 ed. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co.; 1979. 85 
 P- 
 
 This little paperback was originally a 
 composition handbook used at Cornell; it has 
 been revised and added to by W. B. White. It is 
 short, to the point, and witty. However, not all 
 the advice given is suitable for scientific writing. 
 
 Tichy, H. J. Effective writing for engineers, 
 managers, scientists. New York: John Wiley and 
 Sons; 1966. 337 p. 
 
 Excellent coverage of the general field of 
 scientific and technical writing. The author has a 
 very readable style; she provides a useful analysis 
 of common errors and weaknesses in the writing 
 of professionals. 
 
 Trelease, S. F. How to write scientific and 
 technical papers. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press; 
 1969. 185 p. 
 
 A handbook for research workers. Detailed 
 directions for assembling reports and journal 
 articles. Takes up treatment of data, outlining, 
 draft revision, use of libraries, and documenta- 
 tion. Carefully written. 
 
 Ulman, J. N., Jr.; Gould, J. R. Technical reporting, 
 3d ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston; 
 1972. 419 p. 
 
 Very well organized for quick reference. 
 Contains several complete reports illustrating 
 good practice plus an extensive section on 
 sentence revision. 
 
 Bibliography 2-A 
 
2-37 
 
 Bibliography 2-B. Standards for Symbols, Units, and Nomenclature 
 
 All of these standards are available in the NBS 
 Standards Information Library. 
 
 American National Standards Institute. Graphic 
 symbols for electrical and electronics diagrams 
 (Y32.2). New York: American National Standards 
 Institute; 1975. Ill p. 
 
 American National Standards Institute. Letter 
 symbols for quantities used in electrical science and 
 electrical engineering (Y10.5). New York: 
 American National Standards Institute; 1968. 30 p. 
 
 American National Standards Institute. Letter 
 symbols for units in science and technology 
 (Y10.19). New York: American National Standards 
 Institute; 1969. 15 p. 
 
 Instrument Society of America. Instrumentation 
 symbols and identification, Standard (ISA S5.1). 
 1973. 54 p. 
 
 McGlashan, M. L. Manual of symbols and 
 terminology for physicochemical quantities and 
 units. London: Pergamon Press; 1979. 41 p. 
 
 Bibliography 2-C. Books on Treatment of Data 
 
 American Society for Testing and Materials. 
 ASTM manual on presentation of data and control 
 chart analysis (STP 15 D); 1976. 162 p.' 
 
 American Society for Testing and Materials. 
 ASTM standard on precision and accuracy for 
 various applications; 1977. 249 p. 
 
 Box, G. E. P.; Hunter, W. G.; Hunter, J. S. 
 Statistics for experimenters, an introduction to 
 design, data analysis, and model building. New 
 York: John Wiley and Sons; 1978. 575 p.' 
 
 Cox, D. R. Planning of experiments. New York: 
 John Wiley and Sons; 1958. 308 p.' 
 
 Daniel, C; Wood, F. S. Fitting equations to data, 
 computer analysis of multifactor data, 2d ed. New 
 York: John Wiley and Sons; 1979. 342 p.' 
 
 Deming, W. E. Statistical adjustment of data. New 
 York: John Wiley and Sons; 1943. 261 p.' 
 
 Draper, N. R.; Smith, H. Applied regression 
 analysis. New York: John Wiley and Sons; 1966. 
 407 p.' 
 
 Himmelblau, D. M. Process analysis by statistical 
 methods. New York: John Wiley and Sons; 1970. 
 463 p.' 
 
 Ku, H. H., ed. Precision measurement and 
 calibration: Statistical concepts and procedures. 
 Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Spec. Publ. 300; 1969. v.p.'^ 
 
 Mandel, J. The statistical analysis of experimental 
 data. New York: Interscience; 1964. 410 p.' 
 
 Mosteller, F.; Tukey, J. W. Data analysis and 
 regression, a second course in statistics. Reading, 
 Mass.: Addison-Wesley; 1977. 588 p.' 
 
 Natrella, M. G. Experimental statistics. Nat. Bur. 
 Stand. (U.S.) Handb. 91; 1963. v.p.'-' 
 
 Wilson, E. B. An introduction to scientific research. 
 New York: McGraw-Hill; 1952. 375 p.' 
 
 Youden, W. J. Statistical methods for chemists. 
 New York: John Wiley and Sons; 1951. 126 p.' 
 
 'NBS Library has a copy. 
 
 ' NBS Library has a copy. 
 '' V. p. -various pagination. 
 
 Bibliography 2-B & Bibliography 2-C 
 
2-38 
 
 Bibliography 2-D. Style Manuals 
 
 Listed below are style manuals that may prove 
 beneficial to NBS authors and editors, as well as 
 manuals used most often by the Technical 
 Information and Publications Division staff. When 
 an author is preparing a manuscript for publication 
 in an outside journal, the style of that particular 
 journal should be followed. 
 
 U.S. Government Printing Office. Style manual. 
 Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing 
 Office; 1973. 548 p. 
 
 A good guide for authors, editors, and typists on 
 form and style of Government publishing. 
 Available in NBS storeroom. 
 
 American Chemical Society. Handbook for authors 
 of papers in American Chemical Society 
 publications, 3d ed. Washington, D.C.: American 
 Chemical Society; 1978. 122 p.' 
 
 Used for many years as an NBS guide for both 
 NBS and ACS publications. 
 
 American Institute of Physics, Inc. Style manual for 
 guidance in the preparation of papers for journals, 
 3d ed. New York: American Institute of Physics; 
 1978. 56 p. 
 
 Used for many years as an NBS guide for both 
 NBS and AIP publications. Available in the NBS 
 storeroom. 
 
 Coss, T., ed. Handbook of publishing and printing. 
 Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Commerce; 
 1978. 38 p. 
 
 Primarily a handbook for DoC publication 
 offices, but also contains useful information for 
 authors and editors. Available from the Technical 
 Information and Publications Division. 
 
 International Union of Pure and Applied 
 Chemistry. Manual of symbols and terminology for 
 physicochemical quantities and units. Elmsford, 
 New York: Pergamon Press; 1973. 41 p.' 
 
 Metric nomenclature — See "NBS Guidelines for 
 Use of the International System of Units (SI)," 
 exhibit 2-D. 
 
 American Chemical Society. Chemical Abstracts 
 Service source index (CASSI) 1907-1974 
 cumulative. Columbus, Ohio: Chemical Abstract 
 Service, Ohio State University; 1975."'^ 
 
 American Mathematical Society. Manual for 
 authors, 6th ed.; 1978. Reprint from American 
 Mathematical Society Bulletin 68(5); 1962 
 September." 
 
 American National Standards Institute. Basic 
 criteria for indexes (Z39.4). New York: American 
 National Standards Institute; 1974. 12 p." '^ 
 
 American National Standards Institute. Guidelines 
 for format and production of scientific and 
 technical reports (Z39.18) New York: American 
 
 National Standards Institute; 
 available in NBS storeroom.) 
 
 1974. 16 p.' (Also 
 
 Council of Biology Editors. Council of Biology 
 Editors style manual, 4th ed. Arlington, Va.: 
 American Institute of Biological Science; 1978. 265 
 p.' 
 
 Fieser, L. E. Style guide for chemists. Huntington, 
 N.Y.: Robert Krieger; 1972. 116 p.' 
 
 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. 
 Information for IEEE authors. Reprint of 
 information for IEEE authors. Spectrum 2(115): 
 111-116; 1965 August. A supplement to information 
 for IEEE authors. Spectrum 3(91): 91-92; 1966 
 May."'" 
 
 Journal of American Chemical Society. Notice to 
 authors of papers. (Following the table of contents 
 in the first journal issue each year.)' 
 
 National Bureau of Standards. Editorial format for 
 voluntary product standards. Washington, D.C.: 
 National Bureau of Standards; 1977.^ 
 
 Skillin, M.; Gay, R. Words into type, a guide in the 
 preparation of manuscripts, 3d ed. Englewood 
 Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall; 1974. 585 p." 
 
 Steenrod, N. E.; Halmos, R. How to write 
 mathematics. Providence, R.I.: American 
 Mathematical Society; 1974. 64 p." 
 
 University of Chicago. A manual of style, 12th ed. 
 Chicago: University of Chicago Press; 1969. 546 p. 
 
 While the preceding manuals are of primary 
 importance to NBS authors, the following manuals 
 may be of help when writing for outside 
 publications. 
 
 'NBS Library has a copy. 
 
 ' NBS Library has a copy. 
 
 ^ Important source for abbreviations. 
 
 ' Available in NBS Standards Information Library. 
 
 "NBS Library subscribes to the journal in which this guide was 
 
 originally printed. 
 
 Bibliography 2-D 
 
3-1 
 
 Chapter 3 
 
 Selecting a Publication Medium 
 and Method of Composition 
 
 Page 
 
 3.1 Selecting a Publication Medium 3-3 
 
 3.2 Publication Outlets Available to NBS Staff 3-3 
 
 3.3 Bibliographic Subscription Services (To be discontinued, December, 1980) 3-12 
 
 3.4 Duplicate Publication 3-12 
 
 3.5 Issuance Procedures of Grant/Contract Reports Prepared Under NBS Contract 3-12 
 
 3.6 Selecting a Method of Composition 3-13 
 
 3.7 Typeset Publications 3-13 
 
 3.7.1 Procedures for Electronic Typesetting Using In-House Capability 3-13 
 
 3.7.2 Procedures for Typesetting by GPO or Under a GPO Contract 3-14 
 
 3.8 Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy Publications 3-14 
 
 3.9 Cost Comparisons 3-15 
 
 Table 3-1. Publication Outlets Available to the NBS Staff: Types and Characteristics 3-4 
 
 Table 3-2. Cost Estimates for Standard Publishing 3-15 
 
 Table 3-3. Effects of Nonstandard Requirements on Publishing Costs 3-15 
 
 Exhibit 3-A. Sample Cover, Title Page, and Bibliographic Data Sheet for Grant or 
 
 Contract Reports 3-16 
 
 Exhibit 3-B. Samples of Typeset Copy and Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 3-18 
 
 Chapter 3 — Contents 
 
3-3 
 
 Chapter 3 
 
 Selecting a Publication Medium 
 and Method of Composition 
 
 This chapter provides guideUnes to assist authors, 
 managers, editors, and reviewers to select the pubh- 
 cation medium and composition method best suited 
 for the results being reported and the intended 
 audiences. 
 
 3.1 Selecting a Publication Medium 
 
 NBS programs cover a wide range of research 
 and technical services in physics, chemistry, 
 engineering, mathematics, computer sciences, and 
 other areas of science and technology. Bureau publi- 
 cations provide the important method for 
 transmitting results of these activities to the 
 Bureau's diverse external audiences. 
 
 This chapter describes the various publication 
 outlets available to Bureau authors and managers. It 
 provides a basis for selecting that outlet most appro- 
 priate for the specific subject and best calculated to 
 reach the intended audiences. The publication 
 medium, once selected, may influence the actual 
 writing of a paper, its review, and its effectiveness. 
 Its choice is subject to review during the editorial 
 process (see sec. 1.3). 
 
 NBS publications consist of 3 NBS periodicals, 
 10 nonperiodical series, interagency/internal 
 reports, grant/contract reports, and staff-written 
 articles in the books and journals of professional 
 and technical societies, associations, and trade and 
 commercial organizations. 
 
 Available to NBS authors in the NBS publication 
 series and non-NBS media are specific subject- 
 matter channels: (a) that report major NBS 
 programs to specific audiences; (b) that are suitable 
 for detailed reports on NBS research and serve as 
 long-range references; and (c) that are suitable for 
 interim or limited-scope reports to other agencies. 
 A means is also provided for reporting and making 
 public significant results of work performed by 
 outside organizations under contract to NBS. In 
 addition, computer-readable files of NBS developed 
 programs and technical data bases can be made 
 available to NBS user audiences through the 
 National Technical Information Service. 
 
 3.2 Publication Outlets Available to NBS 
 Staff 
 
 The 17 publication outlets presently issued by the 
 Bureau are listed below. Also given is the page number 
 of the table on the following pages where each publica- 
 tion outlet is described in terms of its purpose, 
 audience, contents, distribution, method of composi- 
 tion, turnaround time, and who is responsible for 
 coordinating its production. 
 
 Series 
 
 Abbr. or 
 Acronym 
 
 Page 
 
 No. 
 
 NBS Papers in Non-NBS 
 Media 
 
 
 3-4 
 
 NBS Periodicals 
 
 
 
 Journal of Research 
 
 NBS JRES 
 
 3-4 
 
 Journal of Physical and 
 Chemical Reference Data 
 
 JPCRD 
 
 3-4 
 
 Dimensions/NBS 
 
 DIM/NBS 
 
 3-4 
 
 NBS Nonperiodicals 
 
 Monographs 
 Handbooks 
 
 NBSMN 
 NBSHB 
 
 3-6 
 3-6 
 
 Building Science Series 
 
 NBS BSS 
 
 3-6 
 
 Technical Notes 
 
 NBSTN 
 
 3-6 
 
 Special Publications 
 
 NBSSP 
 
 3-6 
 
 National Standard Reference 
 Data Series 
 
 NBS NSRDS 
 
 3-8 
 
 Applied Mathematics Series 
 
 NBS AMS 
 
 3-8 
 
 Federal Information Processing 
 Standards Publications 
 
 ' NBS FIPS 
 
 3-8 
 
 Voluntary Product Standards 
 
 NBS VPS 
 
 3-8 
 
 Consumer Information Series 
 
 NBS CIS 
 
 3-8 
 
 NBS Interagency and Internal 
 Reports 
 
 Grant/Contract Reports 
 
 NBSIR 
 NBS GCR 
 
 3-10 
 3-10 
 
 NBS Data Files 
 
 
 
 NBS Magnetic Tapes 
 
 NBSMT 
 
 3-10 
 
 
 sections 3.1-3.2 
 
3-4 
 
 Table 3-1. Publication Outlets Available to NBS Staff: Types and Characteristics 
 
 SERIES TITLE 
 ABBR. OR ACRONYM 
 
 PURPOSE/ AUDIENCE 
 
 CONTENT 
 
 PAPERS IN NON-NBS 
 MEDIA 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Reports NBS work in outside media best cal- 
 culated to reach the intended audiences. Ap- 
 propriate place of publication is selected by the 
 author & approved during the editorial review 
 process. 
 
 The results of Bureau research, development, 
 & service activities. Also staff-written book 
 chapters in areas of NBS expertise. (See also 
 sec. 1.4.6.) 
 
 Audience: 
 
 The subscribers & other readers of the journals 
 & books published by professional organiza- 
 tions, technological associations and commer- 
 cial publishers. 
 Special considerations: 
 Domestic media — (a) All official papers by the staff must indicate that the materials is not subject to copyright. See sec. 1.4.2. 
 
 (b) Before agreeing to prepare a book chapter in your official capacity, consult the instructions in sec. 1.4.6. 
 
 (c) Before agreeing to write in a private (nonofficial) capacity, consult the instructions in sec. 1.4.5. 
 
 NBS PERIODICALS 
 Journal of Research 
 NBS JRES 
 
 Purpose : 
 
 Reports research & development in those dis- 
 ciplines of the physical & engineering sciences 
 in which the Bureau is active. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily scientists, engineers, technical spe- 
 cialists, academia, & research laboratories. 
 
 Disciplines covered include physics, chemistry, 
 engineering, mathematics, & computer sciences. 
 Papers cover a broad range of subjects, with 
 major emphasis on measurement methodologies 
 & the basic technology underlying standardiza- 
 tion. Also included are survey articles on topics 
 closely related to the Bureau's technical & 
 scientific programs. Each issue contains cita- 
 tions to recent publications by the staff in NBS 
 & non-NBS media. 
 
 Journal of Physical and 
 Chemical Reference Data 
 JPCRD 
 
 DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 DIM/NBS 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides the principal source of the evaluated 
 data output of the National Standard Refer- 
 ence Data System. (See also NBS NSRDS 
 p. 3-8) 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily scientists, engineers, technical spe- 
 cialists, academia, & research laboratories. 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Communicates results of NBS research to both 
 
 technical experts & interested lay persons. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily researchers, research lab. managers, 
 corporate executives, teachers, consumers, State 
 and local govt, officials. 
 
 Critically evaluated physical & chemical data 
 of material properties that are fully documented 
 as to sources & criteria for evaluation. Also 
 critical reviews of measurement techniques for 
 assessing the accuracy of available data in a 
 given technical area. 
 
 Contains general feature articles usually pre- 
 pared by public information specialists, & tech- 
 nical articles written by researchers. 
 
 ' Prices are as of 1980 and are subject to change. 
 
 'See sec. 3.10 for cost comparison according to 1980 prices. 
 
 ^ From receipt of final copy by TIPD (In Boulder, PIG): 
 
 Typeset publications: Time determined by workload, responsiveness of printing procurement process, 
 
 and approval of galleys and page proofs. 
 
 complexity of text, and promptness of review 
 
 section 3.2 (com.) 
 
SEE ABBREVIATION ON PAGE 3-11 
 
 3-5 
 
 DISTRIBUTION^ 
 
 METHOD OF 
 COMPOSITION ■ 
 
 TURNAROUND TIMEV 
 COORDINATING 
 RESPONSIBILITY 
 
 Sold by the publisher. Reprints are often dis- As prescribed by the publisher. Many publishers 
 
 tributed by & available from author or originat- 
 ing unit. All papers are cataloged & promoted 
 by NBS & are abstracted & cited by NTIS & 
 other bibliographic services. 
 
 typeset from manuscript copy provided by the 
 author; others require camera-ready copy pre- 
 pared to specific specifications. Complete infor- 
 mation appears in the publication or is available 
 from the editor. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 
 Varies with the journal; usually 
 
 from 3-18 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 The NBS author. 
 
 Foreign media — (a) There is no general prohibition against publishing in a foreign publication when such a medium is the 
 best choice for reaching the appropriate scientific & technical community; is widely accessible in the United 
 States; does not originate in a Soviet-bloc or unrecognized country; and is approved by the Center Director (or 
 designee) . 
 
 (b) The regulations of the Office of Export Control, U.S. Department of Commerce, prohibit sending to 
 Soviet-bloc & unrecognized countries unpublished technical information that can be used or adapted for use in 
 connection with any manufacturing or production process. 
 
 Sold by subscription from the SupDoc. Issued 
 six times a yr at $13 (domestic) & $16.25 (for- 
 eign). Single copies from SupDoc domestic 
 ($3.00) & foreign ($3.75). Microfiche copies 
 available for $3.50 from NTIS. Official distribu- 
 tion to Govt. Depository Libraries, to selected 
 Govt. & other research laboratories worldwide, 
 & to national & international scientific & tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreement. 
 Also reproduced & distributed by microfilm 
 services & others, & is abstracted & cited by 
 most bibliographic services, including Chemical 
 Abstracts & Current Contents. Avg. total NBS 
 distribution is 3,800 copies, plus 200 reprints of 
 each article for author's use. 
 Published quarterly for NBS by the American 
 Chemical Society (ACS) & the American In- 
 stitute of Physics (AIP) & available on a sub- 
 scription basis from ACS & AIP (members $29, 
 others $115). Recent total quarterly distribution 
 1,250 copies. Supplements are published at ir- 
 regular intervals & are sold separately. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publication Turnaround time: 
 
 produced either from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. Printing costs are supported by TIPD. 
 
 Avg. from 3^/4-4 mo. 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 
 Journal's 
 TIPD. 
 
 Board of Editors & 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publication Turnaround time: Avg. 
 
 produced either from adaptable automated Avg. from 4-6 mo. 
 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 
 to GPO. Composition costs are supported by 
 
 OSRD; final negatives are submitted to the 
 
 American Institute of Physics for printing & 
 
 distribution. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Office of Standard Reference 
 Data & TIPD. 
 
 Sold by subscription from SupDoc. Issued 11 
 times a yr at $11 (domestic) & $13.75 (foreign). 
 Official distribution to Govt. & other research 
 laboratories worldwide, & to national & inter- 
 national scientific & technical publishers on 
 Library exchange agreement. Avg. monthly dis- 
 tribution 13,200 copies. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publication 
 produced from manuscript copy submitted to 
 GPO. Printing costs are supported by PID. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. 3-4 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Editor, DIMENSIONS/NBS, 
 Public Information Division. 
 
 ;u jtj<tK^q& iif-.£ 
 
 section 3.2 (com.) 
 
3-6 
 
 Table 3-1. Publication Outlets — Continued 
 
 SERIES TITLE 
 ABBR. OR ACRONYM 
 
 PURPOSE/AUDIENCE 
 
 CONTENT 
 
 NBS NON PERIODICALS 
 
 Monographs 
 NBS MN 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Reports major contributions to technical litera- 
 ture resulting from the Bureau's scientific & 
 technical activities. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily scientists, engineers, technical spe- 
 cialists, academia, & research laboratories. 
 
 Complete and extensive report on a research 
 project or a major subject of interest in any 
 areas of NBS research. 
 
 Handbooks 
 NBS HB 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides recommended engineering & indus- 
 trial practice (including safety codes) developed 
 in cooperation with interested industries, pro- 
 fessional organizations, & regulatory bodies. 
 Also provides reference information and guide- 
 lines. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily scientists, engineers, academia, stand- 
 ards writing organizations, & technical spe- 
 cialists. 
 
 Information of a specialized nature dealing 
 directly with scientific & engineering disciplines. 
 Subject matter varies from handbook practices 
 for weights & measures officials to recom- 
 mended guidelines for radiation protection, 
 noise control, & energy conservation. 
 
 Building Science Series 
 NBS BSS 
 
 Purpose : 
 
 Provides technical information developed at the 
 Bureau on building materials, components & 
 whole structures. 
 
 Research results, test methods, & performance 
 criteria related to the structural & environ- 
 mental functions & the durability & safety 
 characteristics of building elements & systems. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily technical professions or technical 
 
 workers in the building industry & related fields. 
 
 Technical Notes 
 NBS TN 
 
 Special Publications 
 NBS SP 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides studies or reports which are complete 
 
 in themselves. May serve as a report to a 
 
 sponsor. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily scientists, engineers, technical spe- 
 cialists, academia, research laboratories, & NBS 
 sponsor (s) when applicable. 
 
 Purpose : 
 
 Reports technical & programmatic information 
 
 not suitable for other NBS publication series. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Ranges from general public to specialized sub- 
 ject-oriented audiences. 
 
 Similar to monographs but not always as com- 
 prehensive in scope or definitive in treatment 
 of the subject area. Often serve as a vehicle for 
 final reports of work performed at NBS under 
 the sponsorship of other Govt, agencies. Spe- 
 cialized subject matter subseries include Se- 
 lected Values of Chemical Thermodynamic 
 Properties (TN270-), Optical Radiation Meas- 
 urements (TN594-), & Self Calibrations Man- 
 ual for Optical Radiation (TN910-). 
 
 Proceedings of conferences sponsored by NBS, 
 NBS annual reports, & other special publica- 
 tions such as wall charts, pKx:ket cards, & bib- 
 liographies. Specialized subject-matter subseries 
 include Semiconductor Measurement Technol- 
 ogy (SP400-), Standard Reference Materials 
 (SP260-), Precision Measurement & Calibration 
 (SP300-), Law Enforcement Technology (SP- 
 480-), & Computer Science & Technology 
 (SP500-). 
 
 1.2,3 See footnote on p. 3-4. 
 section 3.2 (com.) 
 
3-7 
 
 DISTRIBUTION^ 
 
 METHOD OF 
 COMPOSITION = 
 
 TURNAROUND TIME'/ 
 COORDINATING 
 RESPONSIBILITY 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on Library exchange agree- 
 ments. Sales figures vary with subject matter, 
 typically 1,000 copies & for wide interest sub- 
 jects up to 10,000 copies. Official distribution 
 averages 2,7(X) copies. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to 
 selected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreements 
 Sales figure vary with subject matter, typically 
 1,0(X) copies & for wide interest subjects up to 
 10,000 copies. Official distribution averages 
 2,700 copies. 
 
 Usually typeset into top graphic quality publica- 
 tions produced from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. When speed is required & graphic 
 quality is not a major consideration, may be 
 produced from typewritten camera-ready copy 
 prepared by the originating unit. Printing costs 
 are supported by the originating unit. 
 
 Usually typeset into top graphic quality publica- 
 tions produced from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. When speed is required & graphic 
 quality is not a major consideration, may be 
 produced from typewritten camera-ready copy 
 prepared by the originating unit. Printing costs 
 are supported by the originating unit. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 4-6 mo. for typeset 
 publication; from 4—6 wk. for 
 typewritten publication. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 4-6 mo. for typeset 
 publication; from 4-6 wk. for 
 typewritten publication. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreements. 
 Sales figures vary with subject matter, typically 
 1,000 copies & for wide interest subjects up to 
 12,(XX) copies. Official distribution averages 
 3,000 copies. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreements- 
 Sales figures vary with subject matter, typically 
 500 copies & for wide interest subjects up to 
 4,500 copies. Official distribution averages 1,200 
 copies. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreements. 
 Sales figures vary with subject matter, typically 
 1,(X)0 copies & for wide interest subjects up to 
 100,000 copies. Official distribution averages 
 2,200 copies. 
 
 Usually typeset into top graphic quality publica- 
 tions produced from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. When speed is required & graphic 
 quality is not a major consideration, may be 
 produced from typewritten camera-ready copy 
 prepared by the originating unit. Printing costs 
 are supported by the originating unit. 
 
 Usually typewritten camera-ready copy pre- 
 pared by the originating unit. Printing cost is 
 chargeable to the appropriate cost center within 
 the originating unit. 
 
 Usually typeset into top graphic quality publica- 
 tions produced either from adaptable automated 
 manuscript using in-house conversion capability 
 or from manuscript copy submitted to GPO. 
 When speed is required & graphic quality is not 
 a major consideration, may be produced from 
 typewritten camera-ready copy prepared by 
 originating unit (often used for NBS-sponsored 
 proceedings). Printing costs are supported by 
 the originating unit (for conference proceed- 
 ings see sec. 5.1.7.) 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 4-6 mo. for typeset 
 publication; from 4-6 wk. for 
 typewritten publication. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD. 
 
 Turnaround time: from 
 4-6 wk. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 from 4-6 mo. for typeset pub- 
 lication; from 4-6 wk. for type- 
 written publication. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD; PID for certain general 
 publications. 
 
 section 3.2 (cont.) 
 
3-8 
 
 Table 3-1. Publication Outlets — Continued 
 
 SERIES TITLE 
 ABBR. OR ACRONYM 
 
 PURPOSE/AUDIENCE 
 
 CONTENT 
 
 NBS NONPERIODICALS (Con't.) 
 
 National Standard Reference 
 Data Series 
 NBS NSRDS 
 
 Applied Mathematics Series 
 NBS AMS 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides an alternate source of evaluated data 
 
 output of the National Standard Reference Data 
 
 System under the authority of the National 
 
 Standard Data Act (PL 90-396). (See also 
 
 JPCRD.) 
 
 Audience: 
 Primarily 
 
 scientists, engineers, technical spe- 
 
 cialists, academia, & research laboratories. 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides mathematical material compiled as 
 
 part of the Bureau's work. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily physicists, engineers, chemicals, biol- 
 ogists, mathematicians, computer programmers, 
 & others engaged in scientific & technical work. 
 
 Critically evaluated physical & chemical prop- 
 erty data of material properties fully docu- 
 mented as to original sources & the criteria that 
 are used for evaluation. Also included are crit- 
 ical reviews of measurement techniques, whose 
 aim is to assess the accuracy of available data 
 in a given technical area. 
 
 Mathematical tables, manuals, & studies of 
 special interest. 
 
 Federal Information Processing 
 Standards Publications 
 NBS FIPS 
 
 Voluntary Product Standards 
 NBS VPS 
 
 Consumer Information Series 
 NBS CIS 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides standards for implementation by Fed- 
 eral Agencies in the acquisition, development, 
 & use of automated information systems; & 
 in the interchange of data among agencies & 
 with the public. Such standards are adopted 
 after extensive review by Federal agencies, in- 
 dustry, & the public. Their use is intended to 
 reduce Govt, costs & improve the effectiveness 
 of Govt, services. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily individuals & managers of ADP ac- 
 tivities in the Federal Govt. Also ADP per- 
 sonnel in State and local Govt., business, & 
 manufacturers of ADP equipment & services. 
 
 Purpose : 
 
 Provides all concerned interests with a basis for 
 common understanding of the characteristics of 
 products. Developed under procedures published 
 by the DoC in Part 10, Title 15, of the Code 
 of Federal Regulations to establish nationally- 
 recognized requirements for products. NBS ad- 
 ministers this program as a supplement to the 
 activities of the private standards-writing or- 
 ganizations. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily producers, distributors, consumer/ 
 users, & other Govt, agencies having an interest 
 in the particular subject standard. 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides practical consumer information, based 
 
 on NBS research & experience. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily the general public. 
 
 Standards & guidelines for improving utilization 
 of ADP systems in the Federal Govt. 
 
 Note: This series constitutes the FIPS Register 
 per Public Law 89-306 (79 Stat. 1127), Execu- 
 tive Order 11717 (38 FR 12315, May 11, 1973), 
 and Part 6 of Title 15 CFR. 
 
 Includes classifications, definitions, require- 
 ments, & inspection & testing procedures used 
 in manufacturing, marketing & purchasing of 
 products, processes, or procedures. 
 
 Easily understandable text & illustrations pro- 
 vide useful background knowledge for shopping 
 & living in today's technological world. 
 
 1.2.3 See footnote on p. 3-4. 
 
 section 3.2 (cont.) 
 
3-9 
 
 DISTRIBUTION ' 
 
 METHOD OF 
 COMPOSITION = 
 
 TURNAROUND TIME'/ 
 COORDINATING 
 RESPONSIBILITY 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc. & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agreements. 
 Official distribution averages 375 copies. Sales 
 figures vary with subject matter, typically 4,000 
 copies & for wide interest subjects up to 25,000 
 copies. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publications 
 produced either from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. Printing costs are supported by OSRD. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 4-6 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Office of Standard Reference 
 Data & TIPD. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries, to se- 
 lected Govt. & other research laboratories 
 worldwide, & to national & international tech- 
 nical publishers on library exchange agree- 
 ments. Sales figures vary with subject matter, 
 typically 1,500 to 2,000 copies. (ASC55 on 
 mathematical functions has reached 132,(X)0 
 by SupDoc; 100,000 by a private contractor.) 
 
 Sold individually or by subscription from NTIS. 
 Initial agency distribution about 4,0(X) copies. 
 NTIS subscription and individual sales range 
 from 1,000 to 4,000. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publications 
 produced either from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. Printing costs are supported by the 
 originating unit. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publications 
 produced either from adaptable automated 
 manuscript copy using in-house conversion 
 capability or from manuscript copy submitted 
 to GPO. Proposed FIPS Federal Standards are 
 published in the Federal Register for public 
 comment & review prior to final publication. 
 Printing costs are supported by the originating 
 unit. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 4-6 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 TIPD. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 311'— 4 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Stds. Adm. Office of ICST & 
 TIPD. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc. Appropriate VPS are listed 
 as American National Standard by ANSI. Dis- 
 tribution up to 10,000 copies is made by pro- 
 ponent organizations to promote use of the 
 standard. NBS distribution & SupDoc sales 
 range from 1,0(X) to 5,000 copies. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publications 
 produced either from adaptable auto- 
 mated manuscript copy using in-house conver- 
 sion capability or from manuscript copy sub- 
 mitted to GPO. Printing costs are supported by 
 proponent organizations. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 3i/{;— 4 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 NBS Office of Engineering 
 Standards & TIPD. 
 
 Sold by the SupDoc & in microfiche ($3.50) or 
 photocopy (cost varies) by NTIS. Official dis- 
 tribution to Govt. Depository Libraries & liberal 
 official distribution by NBS, cooperating spon- 
 sor agencies, & others. Total distribution figures 
 for CIS range from tens of thousands to hun- 
 dreds of thousands of copies. 
 
 Typeset into top graphic quality publications 
 with excellent illustrations & produced in 2 or 
 more colors. Printing costs are supported by 
 the originating unit & by cooperating agencies. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 Avg. from 31/2-5 mo. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Public Information Division & 
 TIPD. 
 
 section 3.2 (cont.) 
 
3-10 
 
 Table 3-1. Publication Outlets — Continued 
 
 SERIES TITLE 
 ABBR. OR ACRONYM 
 
 PURPOSE/ AUDIENCE 
 
 CONTENT 
 
 NBS NONPERIODICALS (Con't.) 
 
 NBS Interagency and Internal Purpose: 
 
 Reports 
 
 NBSIR 
 
 Grant/Contract Reports 
 NBS GCR 
 
 NBS DATA FILES 
 NBS Magnetic Tapes 
 NBS MT 
 
 Primarily provides a medium for interim or 
 final reports on work performed by NBS for 
 outside sponsors (both Govt. & non-Govt.). 
 Also used to report results of NBS projects of 
 transitory or limited interest, or that will be sub- 
 sequently published in more comprehensive 
 form. NOTE: Technical Notes & other series 
 are also used for this purpose when acceptable 
 to the sponsor. (See sec. 1.5.1.) 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Initially, the sponsor & others as specified by 
 the sponsor, plus the technical community 
 served by other similar subject-matter series. 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Reports work of an outside person or organiza- 
 tion working under grant or contract from 
 NBS. This series is used when the scientific 
 project officer decides that a contract report has 
 sufficient technical merit to be made publicly 
 available through NTIS. When justified & so 
 recommended by the project officer, grant/con- 
 tract reports can be incorporated into a formal 
 NBS series. (See sec. 3.6.) 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily technical audiences served by NBS 
 
 series of similar subject matter. 
 
 Purpose: 
 
 Provides the results of NBS computer programs 
 
 and data files in computer-machine readable 
 
 form, when a demand for such information is 
 
 foreseen. 
 
 Audience: 
 
 Primarily data centers, scientists, engineers, 
 
 scientists, academia, and research laboratories. 
 
 Progress & final reports of results of NBS work 
 performed for other Govt, agencies or under 
 the industrial research associate plan. This 
 series is also used for less comprehensive re- 
 sults of the Bureau's scientific and technical 
 work. 
 
 Results of work performed under grant or con- 
 tract to NBS. 
 
 Technical data compilations; including Standard 
 Reference Data and Federal Information Proc- 
 essing Standards, and well-documented com- 
 puter programs. 
 
 1.2,3 See footnote on p. 3-4. 
 
 section 3.2 (cont.) 
 
3-11 
 
 DISTRIBUTION' 
 
 METHOD OF 
 COMPOSITION ' 
 
 TURNAROUND TIME'/ 
 COORDINATING 
 RESPONSIBILITY 
 
 Initial distribution handled by NBS and/or the 
 sponsor by mutual agreement. Public distribu- 
 tion, if any, is handled by NTIS, in paper copy 
 or microfiche form. Report may receive re- 
 stricted distribution due to proprietary informa- 
 tion, preliminary results, or policy recommenda- 
 tions (see sec. 1.5.3(2)). Sponsor & author 
 distribution avgs. 75-100 copies; sales by NTIS 
 avg. 75 copies. 
 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy publications 
 prepared by the originating unit & submitted 
 directly to NBS Printing & DupHcating Unit 
 (PIO in Boulder) for reproducing in-house, by 
 DoC, or by a printing contractor. In-house re- 
 production costs (within authorized limitations) 
 are supported by the Printing & Duplicating 
 Unit; when outside, reproduction costs are 
 borne by the originating unit. 
 
 Turnaround time: 
 3-6 wk. 
 
 from 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Printing & Duplicating Unit 
 (PIO in Boulder) & 
 author/originating unit. 
 
 Initial distribution handled by the NBS scientific 
 project officer; public distribution by NTIS in 
 paper copy or microfiche form. Entry into 
 NTIS is handled by TIPD. Sales by NTIS avg. 
 50 copies. 
 
 Usually produced by the contractor or grantee 
 & provided to the scientific project officer in 
 quantities specified by the contract. Alter- 
 nately, the project officer may prepare final 
 camera-ready copy & submit it to NBS' Printing 
 & Duplicating Unit for reproduction in-house 
 or by the DoC; in Boulder submit to PIO. 
 
 Turnaround time: from 
 2-3 wk. from receipt by Print- 
 ing & Duplicating Unit; in 
 Boulder, from 2-6 wk. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 Scientific Project Officer 
 Printing & Duplicating, & TIPD 
 (PIO in Boulder). 
 
 Magnetic tapes are sold by NTIS in one or IBM-compatible tape reel in 2,400 or 600-foot Turnaround time: Avg. from 
 
 more tape recording modes, or as part of a 
 tape and documentation parcel. Entry into 
 NTIS is handled by TIPD, following clearance 
 by the appropriate ERB. 
 
 lengths, fully described by accompanying Form 
 NTIS-231 "NTIS Computer Products Catalog 
 Data Sheet" or Standard Form 277 "Computer 
 Magnetic Tape File Properties." These forms 
 and complete instructions for submitting tapes 
 are available from TIPD. 
 
 4-6 wk. from receipt of tape 
 and forms by TIPD. 
 
 Coordinating responsibility: 
 author/ originating unit and 
 TIPD. 
 
 Abbreviation Key: 
 
 GPO — Government Printing Office 
 
 NTIS — National Technical Information Service 
 
 PID — Public Information Division 
 
 PIO — Program Information Office (Boulder) 
 
 SupDoc — Superintendent of Documents 
 
 TIPD — Technical Information and Publications Division 
 
 sections 3.2 (cont.) 
 
3-12 
 
 3.3 Bibliographic Subscription Services 
 
 The Cryogenic Data Center of NBS-Boulder has 
 developed specialized bibliographic services 
 designed to provide interested audiences with infor- 
 mation on latest developments in certaja\fields. The 
 periodicals listed below are avail^ 
 tion from the National Bi 
 Cryogenic Data Center 
 80303. 
 
 Cryogenic Data 
 Publication^nd 
 literature &$^tey 
 tion: domestic, $ 
 
 subscrip- 
 
 Standards, 
 
 Colorado 
 
 [wareness Service 
 fterest in cryogenics. A 
 jiweekly. Annual subscrip- 
 loreign, $45. 
 
 Liquefied Natural Gas 
 
 A literature survey issued quarterly. Annual sub- 
 scription: $30. 
 
 Superconducting Devices and Materials 
 A literature survey issued quarterly. Annual sub- 
 scription: $45. 
 
 3.4 Duplicate Publication 
 
 In general, it is Bureau policy to discourage 
 duplicate publication of papers by NBS staff 
 members. However, a paper published by NBS is in 
 the public domain, and outside publishers are free 
 to reprint the paper in whole or in part if they wish. 
 
 The Bureau recognizes that duplicate publication 
 may sometimes be desirable or necessary as a means 
 of increasing the dissemination of technical informa- 
 tion. Preferably, the more detailed version is 
 published in the Journal of Research or in one of the 
 Bureau's other publication series. A shorter paper 
 may be published elsewhere which omits details of 
 methods, procedures, and analysis of investigations, 
 but which contains a footnote citing the original 
 NBS publication for those readers who may want 
 more details. Also, a number of NBS papers 
 reporting parts oT a long-range investigation may, 
 upon completion of the investigation, be 
 consolidated into one paper and then submitted for 
 publication in a different NBS series. In general, 
 when an original research paper appears in 
 conference proceedings vvith restricted circulation 
 (particularly in foreign publications), the NBS 
 author is encouraged to submit the material for pub- 
 lication in a medium of wider distribution, such as 
 one of the NBS publication series or an appropriate 
 domestic journal. 
 
 3.5 Issuance Procedures of 
 Grant/Contract Reports Prepared Under 
 NBS Contract 
 
 The scientific project officers who administer 
 NBS grants or contracts should encourage publica- 
 tion of significant results. If publication is 
 
 warranted by the quality of the work performed, 
 the place of publication is determined by 
 negotiation between the NBS sponsor and the 
 contractor. Where applicable, the contractor 
 reports should follow the procedures and format 
 prescribed for NBSIRs in section 4.4 and exhibits 
 4-B and 4-C. Publications should be in English and 
 available to the U.S. public. 
 
 Scientific project officers should review manu- 
 scripts for general conformance to NBS policies 
 (use of trade names, etc.). In addition, they should 
 make sure that the manuscript is appropriately 
 labeled as work performed under sponsorship of (or 
 under contract to) the National Bureau of 
 Standards and is in the public domain and not 
 subject to copyright if the contract so specifies (see 
 sec. 1.4.3). Scientific project officers should provide 
 the Technical Information and Publications 
 Division (TIPD) with 14 copies (for official use) of 
 all reports resulting from such programs. 
 
 When the publication is intended for a non-NBS 
 medium, NBS scientific project officers determine 
 the need for technical review by NBS. When appro- 
 priate, they may recommend that significant results 
 be published in the Bureau's series. Manuscripts 
 slated for publication in the NBS series must be 
 reviewed and approved by both the scientific 
 project officer and the appropriate ERB. 
 
 When a grant/contract report is not published in 
 an NBS series, the scientific project officer may 
 submit the report, as received from the contractor, 
 directly to TIPD (ERB review is not required) for 
 entry into the National Technical Information 
 Service (NTIS) for public announcement and sale. 
 To do so, the scientific project officer should: 
 
 (1) Request a grant/contract report (GCR) 
 number from TIPD (in Boulder, the Program Infor- 
 mation Office (PIO)). TIPD (or PIO) records the 
 report title, author, author's organization, the 
 project and contract numbers under which the 
 work was performed, and the report date. 
 
 (2) Enter the assigned GCR number in ink on the 
 upper right corner of the report cover of all copies 
 of the report. 
 
 (3) Prepare Form NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data 
 Sheet) filling in all appropriate boxes (see exh. 3-A). 
 
 (4) Verify that all pages are numbered 
 consecutively. Do not affix numbers to blank pages, 
 but count them. 
 
 (5) Submit up to 14 copies to TIPD for official 
 use and entry into NTIS inventory. In Boulder, 
 submit up to 10 copies to PIO for transmittal to 
 TIPD. TIPD and PIO will notify the originating 
 NBS unit when the NTIS order number and price 
 are known. 
 
 When a scientific project officer decides to have 
 additional copies of a contractor report reproduced 
 by Gaithersburg or Boulder Printing and 
 
 sections 3.3-3.5 
 
3-13 
 
 Duplicating, the format guidelines for NBSIRs 
 should be followed for the main body of the text 
 (see sec. 4.4 and ex. 4-B). Typewritten copy 
 submitted to Printing and Duplicating for 
 photosetting the covers and title pages should 
 identify such documents as grant/contract reports 
 prepared for NBS. A sample cover, title page, and 
 bibliographic data sheet are shown in exhibit 3-A. 
 
 3.6 Selecting a Method of Composition 
 
 If the method of composition is not established 
 by the specific publication medium selected and 
 approved as the most appopriate, (see sec. 3.2), the 
 composition method that best suits the nature, 
 significance, and archival consideration of the paper 
 should be selected. Authors should recommend the 
 highest quality method that circumstances permit. 
 The quality is especially relevant when the NBS 
 paper is likely to be used and referenced by peers 
 and the public for years to come. In making a 
 decision, authors are encouraged to consult with 
 their manager or with TIPD (in Boulder, PIO). 
 
 For NBS publications, the two methods of com- 
 position most commonly used are typesetting 
 (accomplished in two ways) and typewritten 
 camera-ready copy. A typeset publication is 
 produced either by converting an automated or 
 computerized manuscript into an electronically 
 typeset form using TIPD's in-house capability, or 
 by submitting a TIPD-edited manuscript to the Gov- 
 ernment Printing Office (GPO) for conversion into 
 a typeset form. A typewritten camera-ready copy 
 publication is produced from clean typewritten 
 copy prepared by the originating unit and submitted 
 to TIPD, except for an NBSIR which is submitted 
 in camera-ready form to Gaithersburg Printing and 
 Duplicating (in Boulder, PIO). See exhibit 3-B for 
 sample pages showing the appearance of both 
 methods of composition. 
 
 3.7 Typeset Publications 
 
 3.7.1 Procedures for Electronic Typesetting Using 
 In-House Capability 
 
 Electronic typesetting (also called phototypeset- 
 ting and photocomposition) requires that original 
 manuscript typing (keystrokes) be recorded in some 
 retrievable form for further processing and typeset- 
 ting. The high-quality appearance achieved by this 
 process is equivalent to that of hot-metal typesetting 
 but involves much less time and cost. (The use of 
 hot metal to set type is declining in favor of modern 
 printing technologies that use a computer-assisted 
 typesetting process.) 
 
 Early contact with TIPD/Electronic Typesetting 
 (in Boulder, through PIO) is recommended when a 
 
 typeset publication is required or desired. 
 Electronic typesetting requires that the manuscript 
 be recorded in one of the following eight forms for 
 reading into the NBS computer: 
 
 (1) paper tapes, 
 
 (2) magnetic cards, 
 
 (3) magnetic tapes, 
 
 (4) punched cards, 
 
 (5) ATS files, 
 
 (6) DEC System 10/11 files, 
 
 (7) EdText files, or 
 
 (8) mass storage files. 
 
 Even though recorded in one of these eight 
 forms, some manuscripts may not be candidates for 
 this process. Other important factors in using this 
 in-house capability are scheduling, budgeting, and 
 stylistic requirements. 
 
 Once a decision has been made to use electronic 
 typesetting and the necessary editorial review is 
 completed, the publication process continues as 
 follows: 
 
 (1) The approved final manuscript copy, its 
 recorded form and bibliographic data sheet (Form 
 NBS-114A) (or, if a computer file, the name of 
 the file), are forwarded to TIPD/Electronic 
 Typesetting (in Boulder, through PIO). 
 
 (2) The manuscript is reviewed by TIPD for 
 conformity to Bureau policies, practices, and other 
 editorial matters. The format is determined, illustra- 
 tions are checked and sized, and requirements for 
 covers, artwork, paper stock, binding, and number 
 of copies are determined in consultation with the 
 author or the originating unit. Detailed printing 
 specifications are prepared. 
 
 (3) The manuscript's recorded form is embedded 
 with typesetting codes which specify to the 
 computer such things as type faces, type sizes, 
 column widths, and special characters. Using 
 special computer programs these codes are then 
 translated, and a magnetic tape is produced. 
 
 (4) The magnetic tape containing the coded manu- 
 script is sent to GPO through the Department of 
 Commerce (DoC). Illustrations, if any, are 
 forwarded at the same time. 
 
 (5) The magnetic tape is processed on the GPO 
 photocomposition equipment which produces 
 typeset paper-positive masters in galley form. 
 
 (6) The photocopy proofs of the galleys are sent 
 to TIPD where two sets are forwarded to the 
 author for review (in Boulder, through PIO). Since 
 the automated manuscript as received from the 
 originating unit has not been rekeyboarded 
 (retyped), a minimal amount of detailed 
 proofreading' is required. Any required corrections 
 should, of course, be indicated; however, 
 nonessential changes are not allowed at this time 
 because of the high cost of making changes (see 
 exh. 2-C for proofreading symbols). 
 
 sections 3.6-3.7.1 
 
3-14 
 
 (7) One set of marked-up galley proofs indicating 
 changes is returned to TIPD/Electronic 
 Typesetting (in Boulder, through PIO) where the 
 changes are reviewed and transferred to a master 
 galley proof for GPO. At this time, a "dummy" 
 copy may be prepared to show placement of the 
 artwork combined with the text. This copy is 
 reviewed by the author and any necessary 
 adjustments made. 
 
 (8) The marked-up master galley proof and 
 dummy copy are then submitted to GPO through 
 DoC for corrections and final page make up. 
 
 (9) The photocopy proofs of the pages of the 
 final copy are forwarded to TIPD/Electronic 
 Typesetting. Two sets are sent to the author (in 
 Boulder, through PIO) for review. 
 
 (10) One set of marked-up page proof is returned 
 to TIPD/Electronic Typesetting (in Boulder, 
 through PIO) with an approval for printing. 
 
 3.7.2 Procedures for Typesetting by GPO or Under 
 a GPO Contract 
 
 Producing a typeset publication through GPO 
 offers the same high-quality typeset output as that 
 using the TIPD in-house capability, but involves 
 somewhat different procedures and requires more 
 time and expense. This method is used when a 
 typeset publication is required or desired and (1) the 
 manuscript is not in automated form or (2) style, 
 scheduling, and other requirements can not be met 
 using TIPD's in-house capability, including 
 instances when the manuscript may be in automated 
 form. 
 
 After deciding to use GPO typesetting and 
 editorial review is completed, the publication 
 process continues as follows:' 
 
 (1) The approved final manuscript copy and biblio- 
 graphic data sheet (Form NBS-114A) are 
 forwarded to TIPD (in Boulder, through PIO). 
 (See sec. 4.2 for complete information regarding 
 typing procedures.) 
 
 (2) The manuscript is reviewed by TIPD for 
 conformity to Bureau policies, practices, and other 
 editorial matters. The format is determined, illustra- 
 tions are checked and sized, and requirements for 
 covers, artwork, paper stock, binding, and number 
 of copies, are determined in consultation with the 
 author. Detailed printing specifications are 
 prepared. 
 
 (3) The manuscript is marked by TIPD with 
 detailed instructions to the printer for conversion 
 into a typeset form. Instructions include such things 
 as type faces, type sizes, column widths, and special 
 characters. 
 
 (4) The marked-up manuscript is sent to GPO 
 through DoC. Illustrations, if any, are sent at the 
 same time. 
 
 (5) The manuscript is converted into a typeset 
 galley form by the printer. The actual typesetting 
 may be done using hot type, but more likely, will 
 be done using electronic typesetting. 
 
 (6) The photocopy proofs of the master galleys 
 are sent to TIPD where two sets are forwarded to 
 the author (in Boulder, through PIO) for review. 
 Since the manuscript as received from the 
 originating unit has been converted to type, detailed 
 proofreading is required. Any required corrections 
 should, of course, be indicated; however, 
 nonessential changes are not allowed at this time 
 because of the high cost of making changes. (See 
 ex. 2-C for proofreading symbols.) 
 
 (7) One set of marked-up galley proofs indicating 
 changes is returned to TIPD (in Boulder, through 
 PIO) where the changes are reviewed and 
 transferred to a master galley proof for GPO. At 
 this time, a "dummy" copy may be prepared to 
 show placement of the artwork combined with the 
 text. This copy is reviewed by the author and any 
 necessary adjustments made. 
 
 (8) The marked-up galley proof and dummy copy 
 are then submitted to the GPO through DoC for 
 corrections and final page make up. 
 
 (9) The photocopy proofs of the pages of the final 
 copy are forwarded to TIPD. Two sets are sent to 
 the author (in Boulder, through PIO) for review. 
 
 (10) One set of marked-up page proofs is returned 
 to TIPD (in Boulder, through PIO) with an 
 approval for printing. 
 
 3.8 Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy Pub- 
 lications 
 
 For typewritten camera- ready copy publications, 
 authors must furnish TIPD (in Boulder, PIO) with 
 a clean, typed copy of the entire document, 
 including a bibliographic data sheet (Form NBS- 
 114A). It is directly from this typewritten copy that 
 the negatives for reproduction are made. The final 
 publication will not have the graphic quality 
 achieved by typesetting, but with careful selection 
 of typing elements and carefully planned formats 
 the final appearance can be enhanced. (See sec. 4.4 
 for complete instructions regarding typing 
 procedures.) 
 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy publications 
 require more pages for a given paper than typeset 
 publications, resulting in a higher sales price for the 
 publication. TIPD can assist in initial planning to 
 reduce the number of pages. However, preparation 
 of the final error-free copy rests exclusively with 
 the author and the originating unit. 
 
 sections 3.7.2-3.8 
 
3-15 
 
 3.9 Cost Comparisons 
 
 Production costs for a publication will be mainly 
 determined by the method of composition and by 
 other related considerations, such as special paper 
 requirements, use of color, desired schedules, and 
 hard or soft cover. The production methods for all 
 NBS publication series are described in table 3-1 in 
 section 3.2. The costs are supported by the Bureau's 
 overhead fund, by the originating units, by outside 
 sponsors, or by conference fees, depending on the 
 type of the publication. 
 
 For planning purposes, originating units may use 
 tables 3-2 and 3-3 in estimating printing costs for 
 publications. The figures are based on an initial run 
 of 1000 copies. A portion of the copies will be used 
 to meet NBS official requirements, and the balance 
 will be for the use of the originating division. If a 
 larger print run is required, costs will increase. 
 
 Costs in the tables are determined on the basis of 
 January 1980 data, and are subject to change. In 
 table 3-2, straight copy means plain text only. 
 Moderately difficult copy consists of plain text that 
 includes a small number of equations or other 
 symbols, or a small number of text pages 
 incorporating artwork and tables. Difficult copy 
 consists of complex technical material including 
 many equations or other special symbols, or 
 including a substantial amount of text pages 
 incorporating artwork and tables. 
 
 The cost estimates in table 3-2, should permit the 
 originating unit to make an initial estimate for a 
 
 standard publication having no unusual features or 
 requirements. Table 3-3 lists some nonstandard 
 requirements that increase the cost of the publica- 
 tion, and how such requirements could affect the 
 total publishing cost. 
 
 In addition, the use of more than one color, or 
 the use of special nonstandard paper stock requires 
 special written justification by the originating 
 division for TIPD endorsement and transmittal to 
 DoC for approval. In some cases, DoC will seek 
 the approval of the Joint Committee on Printing. 
 The justification memo from the division must meet 
 the criteria specified by the DoC Handbook of 
 Publishing and Printing (p. 4). The memo should 
 include: 
 
 (1) Title of publication and NBS publication 
 series. 
 
 (2) Number of colors to be used. 
 
 (3) Number of color illustrations. 
 
 (4) Sample copies of the color illustrations. 
 
 (5) Strong justification for the use of color. 
 
 When a completed manuscript is submitted to 
 TIPD or PIO, in Boulder, the specifications and 
 cost estimate are reviewed and, if necessary, 
 revised. If it is necessary to modify the estimate by 
 10 percent or more, the originating unit is notified, 
 and the reasons explained by TIPD or PIO 
 production personnel. 
 
 Table 3-2. Cost Estimates for Standard Publishing(1980) 
 
 Method of Composition 
 
 Cost of Publishing ($ per page) 
 
 Straight Moderately Difficult 
 
 Copy Difficult Copy Copy 
 
 Electronic typesetting using in-house capability 
 Typesetting by GPO or under a GPO contract 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 20 
 50 
 10 
 
 40 
 
 60 
 
 75 
 
 125 
 
 10-12" 
 
 12-15' 
 
 ^Cost varies with number and type of halftones and other illustrations that the printer must incorporate into the text pages. 
 
 Table 3-3. Effects of Nonstandard Requirements on Publication Costs (1980) 
 
 Nonstandard Requirement 
 
 Approximate Effect on Total Publishing Costs 
 
 Use of two colors 
 Use of four colors 
 Nonstandard paper 
 Special quality control 
 Hard cover 
 Expedited delivery 
 
 Add 1/3 to total estimate 
 
 Request individual estimate from TIPD 
 
 Add 10-20% or more to original estimate 
 
 Add 25-100% to original estimate 
 
 Add $1.50 per copy 
 
 Add 25-100% to original estimate 
 
 section 3.9 
 
3-16 
 
 Exhibit 3-A. 
 
 Sample Cover, Title Page, and Bibliographic Data Sheet for Grant 
 or Contract Reports 
 
 GCR Cover 
 
 NBS-GCR-80-191 
 
 An Examination and Analysis of the 
 Dynamics of the Human Behavior in 
 the Fire Incident at the University 
 Nursing Home on April 13, 1979 
 
 U.S. Department of Commerce 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Washington. DC 20234 
 
 U.S. Department of Health, Education 
 
 and Welfare 
 Washington, DC 20201 
 
 Report number 
 
 Assigned by TIPD or PIO 
 
 (ERB Approval not required for GCRs) 
 
 Title and Subtitle (if any) 
 
 Author(s) 
 
 Date 
 
 Sponsoring Agencies 
 (NBS, Others) and Address 
 
 GCR Title Page 
 
 NBS GCR 80.1! 
 
 AN EXAMINATION AND ANALYSIS OF THE 
 DYNAMICS OF THE HUMAN BEHAVIOR IN 
 THE FIRE INCIDENT AT THE UNIVERSITY 
 NURSING HOME ON APRIL 13, 1979 
 
 January 1980 
 NBS Grant 7.9014 
 
 Center for Fire Research 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Washington, DC 20234 
 
 US Department of Health, Educalpoi 
 
 and Welfare 
 Washington, DC 20201 
 
 Report number 
 
 Assigned by TIPD or PIO 
 
 (ERB Approval not required for GCRs) 
 
 — Title and Subtitle (if any) 
 
 Author(s) 
 
 Organization and Address 
 (Title Page Only) 
 
 Date 
 
 Contract number, if desired 
 
 Sponsoring Agencies 
 (NBS, Others) and Address 
 
 (Omit masthead information on GCRs) 
 
 Note: Grant/Contract Reports (GCRs) follow the same 
 format as for NBSIRs, except that the DoC/NBS 
 masthead information must be omitted. Show instead 
 that the report was "Prepared for the National Bureau 
 of Standards (address) and (other sponsoring agency, if 
 any, and address)". Submit cover and title pages as 
 typewritten copy; the NBS duplicating unit will convert 
 these to phototype. See next page for NBS Form-114A, 
 Bibliographic Data Sheet (Refer also to sec. 3.5) 
 
 Exhibit 3-A 
 
3-17 
 
 NBS-n4A (REV. 2*8C) 
 
 U.S. DEPT. OF COMM. 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA 
 
 SHEET (See instructions; 
 
 1. PUBLICATION OR 
 REPORT NO. 
 
 NBS-GCR-Rn-iqi 
 
 2. Performing Organ. Report No 
 
 3. Publication Date 
 
 January 1980 
 
 4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 
 
 An Examination and Analysis of the Dynamics of the Human Behavior in the Fire 
 Incident at the University Nursing Home on April 13, 1979 
 
 5. AUTHOR(S) 
 
 John L. Bryan and Philip J. DiNenno 
 
 6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other than NBS, see instructions) 
 
 University of flaryland 
 Fire Protection Curriculum 
 College Park, MD 20742 
 
 7. Contract/Grant No. 
 
 7-9014 
 
 8. Type of Report & Period Covered 
 
 9. SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS (Street, City. State, ZIP) 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Department of Commerce 
 Washington, DC 20234 
 
 10. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES 
 
 Sponsored by the HEW/NBS Life/Fire Safety Program 
 
 QJ3 Document describes a computer program; SF-185, FlPS Software Summary, is attached. 
 
 11. ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most significant information. If document includes a significant 
 bibliography or literature survey, mention it here) 
 
 At approximately 0833 hours on April 13, 1979, the smoke detector located on the ceil 
 ing of the lounge area at the south end of the corridor of the South Section of B wine 
 on the second floor activated in the University Nursing Home, 901 Areola Avenue, 
 Silver Spring, Maryland. This detector was activated by a flow of convected heat and 
 dark smoke from the door of patient room 27, 15 feet to the North. The activation 
 of this smoke detector automatically initiated the activation of the local alarm 
 system. The receptionist upon hearing the alarm notified the Montgomery County 
 Emergency Operations Center. The nursing staff were able to close the doors to all 
 the patient rooms in both the South and West Sections of B wing with the exception of 
 the door to the room of fire origin, room 27. The room experienced flashover and the 
 rapidly spreading heat and smoke forced the staff out of the area. The smoke barrier 
 doors closed with the activation of the local alarm system and prevented the spread o1 
 smoke extensively to the West Section and in particular to A wing. Approximately 21 
 patients were removed from rooms in the South Section by the fire department, 7 of 
 these down ladders. An additional 26 patients were evacuated from the West Section 
 of B wing. Seventeen patients were transported to hospitals for medical treatment 
 with eight staff members. Two of these patients subsequently died. The total fire 
 department response involved three alarms. The fire was extinguished within 5 minutes 
 of the arrival of the first engine and within 9 minutes of smoke detector activation 
 
 12. KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries; a/phabetico/ order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words ^y semicolons) 
 
 death; doors; egress; evacuation; fire alarm systems*, fire departments; fire 
 fighters; flashover; nursing homes; nursing staff; patients; room fires; smoke 
 detectors. 
 
 13. AVAILABILITY 
 
 QX] Unlimited 
 
 I I For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS 
 
 [~n Order From Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 
 20402. 
 
 QX] Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. 22161 
 
 14. NO. OF 
 
 PRINTED PAGES 
 
 36 
 
 15. Price 
 
 S6.00 
 
 USCOMM-DC 6043-P80 
 
 All GCRs submitted for NTIS availability must be accompanied by Form NBS-114A. See reverse of Form or exhibit 
 l-E(a) for instructions for completing form. 
 
 Exhibit 3-A (cont.) 
 
3-18 
 
 Exhibit 3-B. Samples of Typeset Copy and Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 Typeset 
 
 STUDY OF ORGANOMETAL SPECIATION IN WATER SAMPLES 
 
 USING LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY 
 
 WITH ELECTROCHEMICAL DETECTION 
 
 W. A. MacCrehan and R. A. Durst 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Washington, D.C. 20234 
 
 J. M. Bellama 
 
 University of Maryland 
 College Park, Maryland 20742 
 
 A new measurement technique for trace organometal analysis employing liquid chromatography with 
 electrochemical detection is described. Important considerations in the optimization of sensitivity and 
 selectivity of this detection approach are discussed. 
 
 A column preconcentration for methyl- and ethylmercury from water samples is outlined. 
 
 Key words: Electrochemical detection; liquid chromatography; methylmercury; organometals; water 
 preconcentration . 
 
 I. Introduction 
 
 Mounting concern over the presence and role of toxic substances in the environment and 
 living systems has created the need for selective and sensitive measurement techniques. 
 Methodology now exists for the analysis of heavy metals (an important class of pollutants) in a 
 variety of matrices, and considerable effort is being devoted to the collection of data on the levels 
 of these elements in biota and water samples. However, some toxic elements can be transformed 
 into organometals by biological and chemical processes. Organometallic species have different 
 properties from their inorganic counterparts. Thus, in order to fully understand the role of these 
 toxic materials, it is necessary to measure the exact chemical form of the element in the sample. 
 
 Exhibit 3-B 
 
3-19 
 
 Typewritten 
 
 STUDY OF ORGANOMETAL SPECIATION IN WATER SAMPLES 
 USING LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY 
 WITH ELECTROCHEMICAL DETECTION 
 
 W. A. MacCrehan and R. A. Durst 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Washington, D.C. 20234 
 
 J. M. Bel lama 
 
 University of Maryland 
 College Park, Maryland 20742 
 
 A new measurement technique for trace organometal anal- 
 ysis employing liquid chromatography with electrochemical 
 detection is described. Important considerations in the 
 optimization of sensitivity and selectivity of this detec- 
 tion approach are discussed. 
 
 A column preconcentration for methyl- and ethylmercury 
 from water samples is outlined. 
 
 Key words: electrochemical detection; liquid chromatogra- 
 phy; methyl mercury; organometal s; water preconcentration. 
 
 1. Introduction 
 
 Mounting concern over the presence and role of toxic substan- 
 ces in the environment and living systems has created the need for 
 selective and sensitive measurement techniques. Methodology now 
 exists for the analysis of heavy metals (an important class of 
 pollutants) in a variety of matrices, and considerable effort is 
 being devoted to the collection of data on the levels of these 
 elements in biota and water samples. However, some toxic elements 
 can be transformed into organometal s by biological and chemical 
 processes. Organometal lie species have different properties from 
 their inorganic counterparts. Thus, in order to fully understand 
 the role of these toxic materials, it is necessary to measure the 
 exact chemical form of the element in the sample. 
 
 Exhibit 3-B (cont.) 
 
Chapter 4 
 
 Mechanics of Manuscript Preparation 
 
 4-1 
 
 4.1 Preparing Manuscript Copy for Electronic Typesetting Using In-House Capability 
 
 4.2 Preparing Manuscript Copy for Typesetting by GPO, by DoC, or Under a GPO Contract 
 
 4.3 Preparing Manuscripts for the Journal of Physical and Chemical Reference Data 
 
 4.4 Preparing Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 4.4.1 Paper and Typewriter Requirements 
 
 4.4.2 Two-Column and Single-Column Copy 
 
 4.4.3 Spacing 
 
 4.4.4 Front Matter 
 
 4.4.5 Title 
 
 4.4.6 Author's Name 
 
 4.4.7 Abstract 
 
 4.4.8 Keywords 
 
 4.4.9 Headings 
 
 4.4.10 Acknowledgments 
 
 4.4.11 References 
 
 4.4.12 Appendixes 
 
 4.4.13 Footnotes 
 
 4.4.14 Equations 
 
 4.4.15 Tables 
 
 4.4.16 Figures 
 
 4.4.17 Page Numbers 
 
 4.5 Covers for NBS Publications 
 
 4.5.1 Interagency/Internal Reports (NBSIRs) 
 
 Exhibit 4-A. Sample Manuscript Copy for Typesetting 
 
 Exhibit 4-B. Sample of Single-Column Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 Exhibit 4-C. Sample of Two-Column Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 Exhibit 4-D. Sample Table of Contents for Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy . 
 
 Exhibit 4-E. Reference Style in NBS Publications 
 
 Exhibit 4-F. Sample Cover and Title Page for NBSIRs 
 
 Exhibit 4-G. Sample Bibliographic Data Sheet for NBSIRs 
 
 Page 
 
 4-3 
 4-3 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-4 
 4-5 
 4-5 
 4-5 
 4-5 
 4-5 
 4-6 
 4-6 
 4-6 
 4-6 
 4-6 
 4-7 
 4-7 
 4-8 
 
 4-10 
 4-12 
 4-14 
 4-16 
 4-17 
 4-20 
 4-21 
 
 Chapter 4 — Contents 
 
4-3 
 
 Chapter 4 
 
 Mechanics of Manuscript Preparation 
 
 The following instructions are designed to assist 
 secretaries, the clerical staff, and others in the 
 preparation of copy for in-house NBS publications 
 using one of the three methods of composition: elec- 
 tronic typesetting using in-house capability; typeset- 
 ting by the Government Printing Office (GPO), by 
 the Department of Commerce (DoC), or under a 
 GPO contract; and typewritten camera-ready copy. 
 Guidelines for selecting the appropriate method of 
 composition are given in sections 3.1 and 3.2. The 
 instructions in this section are necessarily general in 
 nature. For style issues not answered here, see the 
 U.S. Government Printing Office Style Manual or the 
 style guides of the American Institute of Physics 
 and the American Chemical Society available in the 
 NBS storeroom. (See also bibliography 2-C.) 
 Questions on individual papers and on special 
 problems may be referred to the Technical Informa- 
 tion and Publications Division (TIPD) and to the 
 Program Information Office (PIO) in Boulder. 
 
 For papers submitted to outside journals, use the 
 style manual of that journal. 
 
 4.1 Preparing Manuscript Copy for 
 Electronic Typesetting Using In-House 
 Capability 
 
 The use of automatic typewriters simplifies and 
 expedites the preparation and revision of manu- 
 script copy as it undergoes review and approval. If 
 a manuscript scheduled for publication in an NBS 
 series is in machine-readable form, it may be a 
 candidate for electronic typesetting using in-house 
 capability (see sec. 3.7.1). 
 
 The essential criterion is that the recorded form 
 be compatible with the TIPD electronic typesetting 
 equipment. That is, if a manuscript is recorded in 
 one of the eight forms listed in section 3.7.1, it can 
 be processed and converted into a typeset form by 
 TIPD/Electronic Typesetting. 
 
 To avoid the need for any rekeyboarding by 
 TIPD, the originating unit should be sure that the 
 recorded form exactly matches the manuscript copy 
 and is prepared in the same format prescribed for 
 
 manuscript copy for typesetting by GPO, by DoC, 
 or under a GPO contract as described in section 
 4.2. 
 
 4.2 Preparing Manuscript Copy for 
 Typesetting by GPO, by DoC, or Under a 
 GPO Contract 
 
 This section describes the proper format for 
 manuscript copy that will be processed for electron- 
 ic typesetting by TIPD or will be copy edited by 
 TIPD for typesetting by GPO, Commerce, or 
 under GPO contract. Though not intended as 
 camera-ready copy (see sec. 4.4), the manuscript 
 copy should be cleanly typed. Errors, if any, should 
 be neatly corrected on the manuscript copy, and, if 
 the material is also being provided in machine- 
 readable form for in-house electronic typesetting 
 (see sec. 4.1), the automated form must be corrected 
 to agree with the manuscript. 
 
 Use manuscript paper. Form NBS- 156, type 
 double spaced, and on one side only, beginning 
 each page with a new paragraph. Page 1 begins 
 with the title and author's name(s) centered, 
 followed by the organizational affiliations and 
 mailing address. (The affiliation and address may be 
 omitted here if the manuscript is for a separate, 
 monograph-type document.) The abstract and key 
 words follow, and the text begins on this same 
 page. (See exh. 4-A for a sample first page and sec. 
 4.4.4 for guidance on front matter, if any.) 
 
 Equations are centered on the page and separated 
 from the text by triple spacing above and below. If 
 equations are numbered, place the number in paren- 
 theses at the right-hand margin. When referring to 
 an equation by number in the text, write out the 
 word "equation" only when it begins a sentence; 
 otherwise, abbreviate it as "eq" with the number of 
 the equation following in parentheses. 
 
 Tables, figure captions, and lists of references are 
 typed on separate sheets because the printer sets 
 them separately. 
 
 A footnote is typed at the bottom of the page 
 where it is referenced, separated from the text by a 
 short rule. 
 
 sections 4.1-4.2 
 
4-4 
 
 Except for the special requirements mentioned 
 above for preparing manuscript copy for typeset- 
 ting (i.e., double spacing, full paragraphing, etc.), 
 the camera-ready copy guidelines in section 4.4 will 
 also be useful. 
 
 4.3 Preparing Manuscripts for the Journal 
 of Physical and Chemical Reference Data 
 
 Certain special instructions apply to this journal; 
 consult the NBS Office of Standard Reference Data 
 for details. 
 
 4.4 Preparing Typewritten Camera-Ready 
 Copy 
 
 The person preparing typewritten camera-ready 
 copy must exercise considerably more care than is 
 required when preparing manuscript copy for type- 
 setting as described in section 4.2. Camera-ready 
 copy must be clean, error-free typed copy of the 
 entire document, including a bibliographic data 
 sheet. Transparent mending tape should never be 
 placed over any portion of the image area. Because 
 negatives for reproduction are made directly from 
 this typewritten copy, the graphic quality of the 
 final publication will be enhanced if the procedures 
 in the following sections are adhered to. 
 
 4.4.1 Paper and Typewriter Requirements 
 
 If the publication is less than 50 pages, reduction 
 paper (Form CD- 135 and 135B) or NBS manuscript 
 paper (Form NBS- 156) may be used. However, pub- 
 lications longer than 50 pages should usually be 
 typed for "camera-ready" reduction. For a 12-pitch 
 (elite) typewriter, 16 percent reduction paper (CD- 
 135) is usually most desirable, and the "Letter 
 Gothic" element is recommended. For a 10-pitch 
 (pica) typewriter, 25 percent reduction paper (CD- 
 135B) is permissible, and the "Delegate" element is 
 recommended. The "Symbol 12" element is satisfac- 
 tory for all symbols, superscripts and subscripts. All 
 of the special paper (manuscript and reduction) 
 listed in this section can be found in the NBS 
 storeroom. 
 
 4.4.2 Two-Column and Single-Column Copy 
 
 If the majority of the text of the publication is 
 straight copy (e.g., very few figures, equations, or 
 tables) the publication may be typed in two-column 
 format; that is, two columns of equal length per 
 page. Two-column copy usually makes a more 
 
 visually appealing and more readable publication 
 than single-column copy. A special consideration 
 for two-column copy is the placement of figures 
 and tables (see sees. 4.4.15, 4.4.16, and exh. 4-C). 
 
 In cases where the text is more complex the publi- 
 cation may be typed in single-column format across 
 the full width of the paper (see exh. 4-B). 
 
 4.4.3 Spacing 
 
 All final copy should be single spaced with 
 double spacing between paragraphs, except those 
 papers with technical material requiring more than 
 two levels of spacing. In these cases, the text may 
 be typed space and a half. When in doubt, consult 
 with TIPD production personnel. In Boulder, 
 consult with PIO personnel. 
 
 The first line of each paragraph may be flush left, 
 or indented five spaces from the left margin. Other 
 spacing requirements are discussed in the following 
 sections and are also illustrated in exhibits 4-B and 
 4-C. 
 
 4.4.4 Front Matter 
 
 When preparing copy for publications, the 
 suggested order of the front-matter elements is: 
 cover, title page, foreword, preface, and table of 
 contents (with a list of tables or figures, if essential 
 to understanding or using the paper). Use lowercase 
 Roman numerals to identify the page number of 
 these elements (see also sec. 4.4.17) and make sure 
 that the table of contents exactly matches the 
 headings, subheadings, and page numbers in the text 
 (see exh. 4-D for sample table of contents). 
 
 Generally, the typewritten copy for the cover as 
 well as the title page will be converted to 
 phototype (or typeset) by TIPD or PIO Boulder. 
 When appropriate, TIPD or PIO will also prepare 
 the bibliographic citation information for the 
 reverse side of the title page. 
 
 Covers and front matter for NBS in-house publi- 
 cations are further discussed in section 4.5. 
 
 4.4.5 Title 
 
 On page 1, the title of the paper should be 
 centered 25 mm (about 1 in or 6 lines) below the 
 blue line at the top of the page and typed in capitals 
 and lowercase. If the title is long, it should be 
 broken into two or three separate lines, single 
 spaced, and centered. Do not underline the title or 
 place a period at the end of it (see exhs. 4-B and 
 4-C). 
 
 4.4.6 Author's Name 
 
 The author's name should be centered on a single 
 line, two lines below the title of the paper. The or- 
 ganizational affiliation (kept to a minimum), city, 
 state (Postal Service abbreviations preferred), ZIP 
 code, and country (if needed) should be centered 
 
 sections 4.3-4.4.6 
 
4-5 
 
 two lines below the author's name and single 
 spaced. Superscript footnote references may be 
 used to give added information including additional 
 organizational identity, if really needed (see sec. 
 2.2.9, exh. 4-B, or exh. 4-C). 
 
 4.4.7 Abstract 
 
 The abstract is typed on page 1, two lines below 
 the author's affiliation. Do not place a heading 
 above the abstract. Both margins of the abstract 
 should be indented five spaces, with the first line of 
 the abstract flush left or indented an additional five 
 spaces, consistent with the body of the text. The 
 abstract should be no longer than 200 words (see 
 exh. 4-B or 4-C). 
 
 Each paper for proceedings of a conference 
 should include an abstract typed on the first page as 
 above. The overall abstract for the proceedings is a 
 part of the front matter and usually follows the 
 foreword and preface, if any. 
 
 4.4.8 Key Words 
 
 Double space after the abstract and type the key 
 words or phrases. These range from 6 to 12 in 
 number and should be single spaced, alphabetized, 
 and separated by semicolons as shown in exhibits 
 4-B and 4-C. 
 
 Except for the heading Key words, only proper 
 nouns should be capitalized. 
 
 4.4.9 Headings 
 
 For ease in typing camera-ready copy, it is 
 recommended that all headings be flush left, 
 capitals and lowercase. However, the indentation 
 style for headings and subheadings may also be 
 used, so long as they are consistent throughout the 
 paper. Make headings and the degree of 
 subordination easily identifiable. Numbering of 
 headings is helpful for reference purposes, but is not 
 required for all papers. 
 
 When numbering headings and subheadings, use 
 Arabic numerals. Main headings are numbered 1., 
 2., etc. Double space between the headings and the 
 text. Subheadings are numbered 1.1, 1.2, ... 2.1, 2.2, 
 etc. If these subheadings have additional subhead- 
 ings, they are numbered 1.1.1, 1.2.1, ... 2.1.1, 2.2.1, 
 etc. If these in turn must be subdivided, numerals in 
 parentheses are recommended. 
 
 If authors and editors prefer a different 
 enumerating system, headings and subheadings can 
 be in outline form, e.g., primary headings 1., 2., 3., 
 etc. secondary headings A., B., C, etc., tertiary and 
 succeeding headings (1), (2); (a), (b), etc. 
 
 4.4.10 Acknowledgments 
 
 Acknowledgments, when appropriate, should be 
 the last section of the text, following the summary 
 or conclusion and preceding the references and 
 appendixes. This section should be separated from 
 
 the last line of text by three lines of spacing, a 
 centered rule 25 mm (about 1 in), and another three 
 lines of spacing (see exh. 4-B or 4-C). 
 
 Sponsorship (financial support) is usually 
 acknowledged on the title page or as a footnote on 
 the first page of the paper. 
 
 4.4.11 References 
 
 Bibliographic data of the types of works most 
 likely encountered are given in this section. The 
 citations conform to the comprehensive reference 
 style in the American National Standard for 
 Bibliographic References (Z39.29-1977), which is 
 available in the NBS storeroom. It is recommended 
 that the comprehensive reference style be used if 
 possible. (Of course, non-NBS publications may use 
 different styles, which should be followed when 
 papers are prepared for such publications.) 
 
 Consistency in the referencing method and in the 
 ordering of bibliographic data is essential within a 
 paper. Exhibit 4-E shows some specific examples 
 for various types of references, including NBS publi- 
 cations. Note that the authors' names are given first, 
 and that each author's last name precedes the first 
 name or initials. In citing publications in a foreign 
 language, always give the untranslated title; 
 however, the translated title may follow the 
 original title. 
 
 Reference numbers in the text should be enclosed 
 in square brackets on the line. The references as 
 typed in the reference section of the publication 
 should also have the numbers enclosed in brackets.' 
 The order of arrangement in the citation for various 
 published media should be as follows: 
 
 (1) For journal articles, citations should be in the 
 following order: 
 
 authors' names 
 title of article 
 title of periodical 
 volume number 
 issue number 
 inclusive page numbers 
 date of publication 
 
 See examples [1] and [2] in exhibit 4-E. 
 
 (2) For books, citations should be in the following 
 order: 
 
 authors' names 
 
 title of book 
 
 place of publication 
 
 publisher 
 
 date of publication 
 
 number of pages 
 
 See examples [3] through [13] and [15] in exhibit 
 4-E. 
 
 'For an alternative method, see section 2.20.3 
 
 sections 4.4.7-4.4.11 
 
4-6 
 
 (3) For chapters of books, citations should be in 
 the following order: 
 
 authors' names 
 
 chapter title 
 
 book title 
 
 editor of book 
 
 place of publication 
 
 publisher 
 
 date of publication 
 
 pages of chapter cited 
 
 See example [16] in exhibit 4-E. 
 
 (4) For conference proceedings, the citations 
 should be in the following order: 
 
 authors' names 
 
 title of paper 
 
 editor of entire proceedings 
 
 conference or proceedings title 
 
 date of proceedings 
 
 place of proceedings 
 
 place of publication 
 
 publisher 
 
 date of publication 
 
 pages of paper cited 
 
 See example [17] in exhibit 4-E. 
 
 4.4.12 Appendixes 
 
 Appendixes follow the acknowledgments and the 
 references. Appendixes may or may not have 
 headings like the other sections of the text. If 
 desired, they may simply appear as Appendix A, 
 Appendix B, etc. It is recommended that page 
 numbering of the appendixes be consecutive with 
 the rest of the report. Appendixes and their titles 
 should be cited in the table of contents. 
 
 4.4.13 Footnotes 
 
 Footnotes should be numbered consecutively in 
 the text by placing a superscript Arabic numeral 
 directly after the item(s) to which the footnote 
 applies. The numbered footnote is typed at the 
 bottom of the same page, separated from the text by 
 a short rule. 
 
 Footnoted items in tables are shown by raised 
 lowercase letters directly after the item(s) 
 concerned. For example, a footnoted value would 
 read: 
 
 001 002 003" 
 
 The footnote should appear at the bottom of the 
 table as: 
 
 * Extrapolated value. 
 
 Footnote examples are shown in exhibits 4-A, 
 4-B, and 4-C. 
 
 4.4.14 Equations 
 
 Equations should be typed. If equations are 
 numbered, number them consecutively and place 
 the number for each in parentheses at the right 
 margin. Refer to equations in the text as eq (1), etc., 
 but spell out the word "equation" when used at the 
 beginning of a sentence. Triple space above and 
 below all equations. Center equations by hning 
 them up on the equal ( = ) sign or other common 
 symbol. Break a long equation at the end of an 
 expression, and line up to the right of the equal ( = ) 
 sign (see exhs. 4-A, 4-B, and 4-C). Press type 
 (available in the NBS storeroom) should be used for 
 the larger mathematical symbols such as integral 
 signs, and for large brackets and parentheses. For 
 more detailed information, see the U.S. Government 
 Printing Office Style Manual or Technical Typing by 
 M. A. Kurtz (on file in TIPD). 
 
 4.4.15 Tables 
 
 Tables should be typed directly as part of the 
 text, separated from the text above and below by 
 triple spacing. They should be numbered consecu- 
 tively in Arabic, followed by a period. The table 
 title (only first word and proper nouns capitalized) 
 should follow the table number, on the same line. 
 Table titles should be single spaced and centered 
 two lines above the table. Avoid vertical and 
 horizontal lines wherever spacing can be used 
 effectively. See section 4.4.13 for guidelines for 
 handling footnotes in tables. 
 
 When a paper has been prepared in two-column 
 format and a table that spans both columns is to be 
 included, the table should be at the top or bottom 
 of the page whenever possible. If it is necessary that 
 the table appear in midpage, the text that reads 
 down the left column to the table should continue 
 to be read in the same column below the table. The 
 text then continues at the top of the right column 
 (see exh. 4-C). The word "table" should be spelled 
 out in the text in all lowercase letters except at the 
 beginning of the sentence. 
 
 4.4.16 Figures 
 
 Drawings and photographs should be originals or 
 glossy prints. The size of lettering on illustrations 
 should be of such a size to be readable when 
 reduced. 
 
 Photocopies, ozalids, halftone clippings from 
 magazines, and pencil drawings are not acceptable. 
 Color photographs may be used if the intent is to 
 have them reproduced in black and white. Special 
 approval is required from the Joint Committee on 
 Printing through the DoC Office of Publications 
 prior to printing if the photograph is to be 
 reproduced in color (see sec. 3.10). 
 
 sections 4.4.12-4.4.16 
 
4-7 
 
 The word "figure" is to be spelled out in the text 
 in all lowercase letters except at the beginning of a 
 sentence. If it appears in parentheses followed by a 
 number, it is to be abbreviated as: (fig. 1). 
 
 Several figures may appear on the same page, if 
 practical. However, if a figure is large and 
 reduction is impractical, it may be planned for a full 
 page. For shorter papers, figures may be assembled 
 at the end of the paper. Where a figure appears on 
 the same page as text, it should, whenever possible, 
 appear at the top or bottom of the page. When it 
 must appear in midpage, it should be separated 
 from the text by triple spacing both before the 
 figure and after the figure caption. The figure 
 caption (only first word and proper nouns 
 capitalized) should be centered and typed single 
 spaced two lines below the figure as shown in 
 exhibits 4-B and 4-C. Figures should be numbered 
 consecutively in Arabic followed by a period. 
 
 When a paper has been prepared in a two-column 
 format, and a figure that spans both columns is 
 placed in the middle of the text, the text should 
 read "through" the figure. That is, the text that 
 reads down the left column to the figure should 
 continue to be read in the same column below the 
 figure. The text then continues at the top of the 
 right column (see exh. 4-C). 
 
 Foldout illustrations should be avoided. Such use 
 increases the cost of printing, collating, and binding 
 and lengthens the time required for final printing 
 and delivery. If a foldout is an absolute require- 
 ment, contact TIPD (in Boulder, PIO) for 
 placement and pagination instructions. 
 
 4.4.17 Page Numbers 
 
 The front matter of a publication consisting of 
 those pages that precede the actual text (i.e., title 
 page, its reverse side, foreword, preface, table of 
 contents, lists of figures or tables) are assigned 
 lowercase Roman numerals beginning with "i" 
 centered at the bottom of the page. Some front 
 matter pages are not numbered even though they 
 are counted. Examples of such pages would include 
 the blank backs of any pages. 
 
 The actual text pages should be numbered consec- 
 utively in Arabic throughout the body of the report 
 (i.e., 1, 2, 3, etc.). On rare occasions and for special 
 reasons, however, the chapters or sections may be 
 individually numbered (i.e., 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, etc., 2-1, 
 2-2, 2-3, etc.). 
 
 Manuscript paper (Form NBS-156), 16 percent 
 reduction paper (Form CD-I 35), and 25 percent 
 reduction paper (Form CD-135B) have, centered 
 near the bottom of the page, a blue box or line 
 indicating where the page number must be 
 consistently placed. If these papers are not available 
 and plain bond paper is used, plan an image area 
 (including page number) that is (a) 150 mm x 220 
 mm (6 in X 9 in) for manuscript paper (Form NBS- 
 
 156), (b) 191 mm x 270 mm (7 3/4 in x 10 1/2 in) 
 for 16 percent reduction paper (Form CD- 135), or 
 (c) 220 mm x 300 mm (8 3/4 in x 12 in) for* 25 
 percent reduction paper (Form CD-135B). 
 
 4.5 Covers and Front Matter for NBS 
 Publications 
 
 The covers for NBS in-house publications receive 
 special attention by the NBS production staff 
 working closely with authors and editors. They are 
 designed in keeping with the nature and purpose of 
 the publications and, in the case of some NBS 
 nonperiodical series, to provide a continuity and 
 family appearance for specific subject matter 
 programs. Authors are encouraged to provide ap- 
 propriate and meaningful art work that can be 
 considered by the production and graphic staffs for 
 use in cover designs. 
 
 NBS covers must of course conform to the 
 guidelines prescribed by the Department of 
 Commerce and the Joint Committee on Printing. 
 Additional information on covers and front matter 
 is given in the DoC Handbook of Publishing and 
 Printing, which is available from TIPD and PIO. 
 For convenience and ready reference, a part of 
 chapter 5 of this Handbook is reprinted below: 
 
 A reader's first impression of a publication comes 
 from its cover. Covers should be designed in 
 keeping with both the purpose and inside 
 appearance of the publication. Their physical 
 specifications are dictated by considerations of 
 size of the publication, intended use, and 
 audience. Covers fall into two main categories, 
 self and separate. 
 
 Self-Cover Publications (Ed. Note: seldom used at 
 NBS) 
 
 These publications are printed from front to back 
 on the same paper stock. Usually they are short, 
 although they may run to more than 100 pages 
 when heavy or prolonged use is not 
 contemplated. Separate covers of heavier stock 
 can seldom be justified for any publication with 
 16 or fewer pages. 
 
 Self-cover publications are paginated throughout 
 in Arabic numerals, with the cover considered 
 page 1. 
 
 A self-cover publication needs no title page. 
 Pages 1 (cover) and 2 include the publication's 
 title, series identification if any, credit lines of the 
 Department and operating unit. Department seal, 
 
 sections 4.4.17-4.5 
 
4-8 
 
 publication date, and for-sale line. The title, 
 credit line of the Department, and Department 
 seal must appear on page 1. Sometimes a table of 
 contents and a brief foreword are also included 
 on pages immediately following. 
 
 A variation that lends itself to periodicals and 
 series publications and permits text to begin on 
 page 1 is the use of a masthead across the top of 
 the page giving title, publication date, and other 
 identifying information. Additional information 
 may appear in a box at the bottom of page 1 or 
 elsewhere in the publication. 
 
 Separate-Cover Publications 
 
 These include books and booklets, generally of 
 more than 16 pages, with covers heavier than the 
 stock used for the text. If they are at least 1/4- 
 inch thick, a printed backstrip reading from top 
 to bottom is normally required. 
 
 A separate-cover publication carries its title and 
 "U.S. Department of Commerce" on the front 
 cover and title page. The Department seal and/or 
 the name of the operating unit may appear on the 
 front cover also. If the Department seal is not on 
 the front cover, it must appear on the title page, 
 or inside of the front cover when this 
 occasionally serves as a substitute for the title 
 page. The date of publication may appear on the 
 front cover, and must always appear on the title 
 page, or inside front cover when it is a substitute 
 for the title page (Ed. Note: or on back cover). 
 
 Most separate-cover publications require a title 
 page, although some special-purpose publications 
 with separate covers can incorporate all 
 documenting information on the front cover and 
 inside of the front cover, and go directly into 
 text. 
 
 The "front-matter" pages of a separate-cover pub- 
 lication are numbered in Roman numerals, either 
 small capitals or lower case, with the title page as 
 "i." The first page of text is numbered Arabic "1" 
 and always is a right-hand page. 
 
 The order of front matter is fairly well 
 established. A typical arrangement: 
 
 i. Title page — series, title, author's name when 
 used. Department seal if it does not appear on the 
 front cover, issue date. Department and 
 Secretary, operating unit and its chief, and for- 
 sale line if not carried elsewhere. 
 
 ii. Blank, or bibliographic notes if any, Library 
 of Congress catalog card number and/or full 
 Library of Congress citation, for-sale line if not 
 carried elsewhere. 
 
 iii. Letter of transmittal or foreword by an 
 officer. (Ed. Note: At NBS, the NBS Director, 
 an MOU Director, or other senior official.) 
 
 iv. Continuation of foreword or transmittal 
 letter, or blank. (Ed. Note: At NBS, the preface, 
 if any.) 
 
 V. Contents immediately followed by hst of 
 tables or illustrations. (Ed. Note: At NBS, the 
 abstract and key words are generally included on 
 page 1.) 
 
 An introduction by the author is treated as the 
 first chapter of text and therefore is numbered in 
 Arabic, beginning with 1. Right-hand pages are 
 always odd-numbered; left-hand pages are even- 
 numbered. 
 
 Case-bound books are separate-cover publications 
 utilizing cloth- or paper-covered board or 
 semiflexible covers. They are limited to 
 permanent reference volumes or handbooks 
 subject to rough treatment. A case-bound book 
 must always have a separate title page. Case 
 binding generally adds about 4 weeks to 
 production time and about $1.50 per book to 
 cost. 
 
 Special bindings such as those employing rings, 
 spirals, or plastic combs, or with pockets inside 
 the covers, require special justification based on 
 their intended use. 
 
 Publication Date Must Appear 
 
 Every Commerce Department publication going 
 to the public, including promotional fliers and 
 publication order forms, must carry a publication 
 date. This is the date when the publication is 
 officially released to the public. Without this a 
 reader may not be able to tell how current the 
 content of the publication is. For proper 
 placement of date, see under "Self-Cover 
 Publications" and "Separate-Cover Publications." 
 
 4.5.1 Interagency/Internal Reports (NBSIRs) 
 
 The reproduction of covers and front matter for 
 the NBSIR series is handled by Gaithersburg or 
 Boulder Printing and Duplicating. The formats for 
 NBSIR covers and title page, shown in exhibit 4-F, 
 are the same as those prescribed in the previous 
 Manual, NBS Manual for Scientific and Technical 
 Communications and are based on Government- 
 wide procedures, embodied in American National 
 Standard Guidelines for Format and Production of 
 Scientific and Technical Reports (Z39. 18-1974), 
 available from the NBS storeroom. 
 
 section 4.5.1 
 
4-9 
 
 Unless otherwise prescribed by the sponsor, NBS 1 14A is shown in exhibit 4-G. The alphanumeric 
 
 authors should follow the cover and title page designation for this series is assigned by the 
 
 formats given in exhibit 4-F. As with other NBS in- Editorial Review Board (ERB) after approval. This 
 
 house publications, the Bibliographic Data Sheet number is entered as Item 1 on Form NBS- 114A, or 
 
 (Form NBS- 114A), must be completed and included as Item 2 if the sponsor's designation is given as 
 
 as the last page of an NBSIR. A sample Form NBS- Item 1. 
 
 section 4.5.1 (cont.) 
 
4-10 
 
 Exhibit 4-A. Sample Manuscript Copy for Typesetting 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS: First line of type must touch top blue border. See NBS Forms Catalog, Forms Facsimiles Section, 
 for instructions as to when and how to use this paper 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 ©■• 
 
 ®: 
 
 ©.. 
 
 ©- 
 © 
 
 Generators for Discrete Polynomial L, 
 Approximation Problems 
 P. Domich,* J. Lawrence,** and D. Shier* 
 National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC 20234 
 
 Polynomial approximation problems represent a class of spe- 
 cially structured problems which are frequently encountered in 
 empirical curve-fitting. Two generators for creating such prob- 
 lems have been developed, implemented and used in the testing of 
 discrete L, approximation codes. Both generators permit auto- 
 matic generation problems with specified characteristics and (for 
 one generator) having known, unique and controllable solutions. 
 
 Key words: algorithm testing; approximation; computational exper- 
 iment; least sum of absolute deviations; polynomial approxima- 
 tion; test problems. 
 
 1. Introduction 
 
 Recent years have seen increased interest in least absolute devia- 
 tion (L,) data fitting, either as an alternative to or in conjunction 
 with the usual least squares approach [1-2]. Estimation in the L, 
 norm has certain desirable statistical properties. 
 
 ♦Operations Research Division, Center for Applied Mathematics, National 
 
 Engineering Laboratory. 
 **NRC-NAS Postdoctoral Research Associate, 1973-1974. 
 iNumbers in brackets indicate literature references at the end of this 
 
 paper. 
 
 Form NBS ISC 
 
 © 
 
 J_ 
 
 5 
 « 
 
 7 
 
 fio}» 
 
 10 
 
 The two generators for polynomial approximation problems discussed 
 here will, for specified n and m, produce the following test problem 
 data: 
 
 X = (xJ), i = 1 n; j=0. 
 
 , m. 
 
 (i: 
 
 3 lines 
 3 lines 
 
 O 
 
 l)Use manuscript paper. Form 
 NBS- 156, double space, one side 
 only, and begin each page with a 
 new paragraph. Use same format 
 for manuscripts that will be copy 
 edited for electronic typesetting 
 by TIPD or by GPO (see sees. 
 4.1 and 4.2). 
 
 
 
 2)Center title and author(s) as 
 shown. Begin about 6 lines below 
 blue line. Note that special 
 symbols are used to identify 
 footnotes to front matter and 
 that Arabic numbgring begins 
 with main text (t) . 
 
 Q 
 
 3JKeep organizational affiliation 
 to a minimum and give mailing 
 address. Note that additional 
 identity, if needed, is given in a 
 footnote (see sec. 2.9.2 for 
 further instructions). 
 
 o 
 
 4) Indent abstract and key words as 
 shown; list key words in alpha- 
 betical order, separate by semi- 
 colons, and capitalize only 
 proper nouns. First line of 
 abstract may be indented or 
 flush. 
 
 (5) Flush left all headings. Use 
 Arabic numbers 1., 2., etc. for 
 main headings. 1.1, 1.2, ... 2.1, 
 2.2, etc. for subheadings (see 
 sec. 4.4.9 for alternative 
 method). 
 
 © 
 
 6jBegin and end each page with a 
 paragraph (i.e., do not split a 
 paragraph). First line may be 
 flush left if consistent through- 
 out. 
 
 o 
 
 7) Place superscript Arabic 
 numbered footnotes at the 
 bottom of the page. 
 
 ( 8)Use short rule line to separate 
 text from footnotes. 
 
 C 9)Center page number in blue box 
 of Form NBS-156 as indicated. 
 
 no)Center equations and number 
 them consecutively at the right 
 margin in parentheses if referred 
 to in the text. 
 
 s 
 
 riov" 
 
 y and each of m + 1 independent variables 2- 2 find parameters 
 
 S.,..., B^ that minimi2e 
 
 n m 
 
 = 1: ^1 - S ^j^ij 
 
 i=l j=0 
 
 3 lines 
 
 3 lines 
 
 Exhibit 4-A 
 
4-11 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS: FtrM Itne of typa must touch top blue border So* NBS Forms Catalog. Forms Facsimiln Section, 
 for instructions as to wtwn atxf how to use tfws paper. 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 5 
 6 
 
 Table 1. Functions and their intervals of approximation 
 
 
 f(x) I =[a,b] 
 
 1. e*'' sin X [0,4] 
 
 7 
 
 2. e'" sin x [0,4] 
 
 
 8 
 
 3. e''=^'"'< [0,7] 
 
 
 9 
 
 4. e^'*/2x [.05,1] 
 
 
 10 
 
 5. 75x/[l + {7.5x)^] [0,2] 
 
 
 11 
 
 6. lOxe'-^^ [0,4] 
 
 
 12 
 
 7. 1/[1 + (x -2.5)''] [0,5] 
 
 
 13 
 
 8. x^J^ [-1,1] 
 
 
 14 
 
 9. x^^^ [0,1] 
 
 
 15 
 16 
 
 10. 1/[1 + x"] [-2.5,2.5] 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 ^^^^^_^^--^^^^'X___-'^^^^-v^ 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 M uType tables, figure captions, and 
 list of references on separate 
 pages (see exh. 4-E for guidance 
 on reference citations). 
 
 Note: Refer to section 4.3 and 
 exhibit 3-B for guidance on elements 
 common to all manuscript copy. 
 
 ®" 
 
 5. References 
 
 [1] Abdelmalek, N. N. An efficient method for the discrete linear L, 
 approximation problem. Mathematics of Computation, Vol. 29, (1975), 
 844-850. 
 
 [2] Appa, G.; Smith, C. On L, and Chebyshev estimation. Mathematic- 
 al Programming, Vol. 5 (1973), 73-87. 
 
 [3] Armstrong, R. 0.? Frome, E. L. A comparison of two algorithms 
 for absolute deviation curve fitting. Journal of the American 
 Statistical Association, Vol. 71, No. 354 (1976), 328-330. 
 
 [4] Barrodale, I.; Roberts, F. 0. K. An improved algorithm for 
 discrete 1, linear approximation, SIAM Journal on Numerical 
 Analysis, Vol. 10, No. 5 (1973), 839-849. 
 
 [5] Timan, A. F. Theory of Approximation of Functions of a Real Vari- 
 able, trans, by J. Berry, MacMillan Co., New York, 1963. 
 
 2 lines 
 
 Exhibit 4-A (cont.) 
 
4-12 
 
 Exhibit 4-B. Sample of Single-Column, Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 ® 
 
 © 
 ® 
 ® 
 
 ® 
 
 ® 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 Form CO-135 
 
 ItKflEOUCTION. I 
 
 Nttlonti Bureau of Standirds Special Publlci^ 
 Research Synposlum on Characterization of 
 Galthersburg. W, Septenter 16-22, 1979. 
 
 M. C. Drake,* L 
 Natl 01 
 
 S61, Proceedings of the 10th Materials 
 |l| temperature Vapors and Gases held at NBS, 
 
 Different spectroscopic methods 
 ature. This report compares measurefflen|t 
 premlxed H^/O^/N^ laminar flames using 
 vibrational and rotational temperatures I 
 tronic temperature], and (3) line ratio 
 separate burner designs are considered, 
 possible, all measurements were made h1 
 system. The theory for each technique 
 and convenience are compared. Necessai 
 the results Indicate very good agreemei 
 methods for certain coi*1n«t1ons of fl. 
 
 led for the measurement of flame temper- 
 oT teoperature profiles for atmospheric 
 methods of: (1) Raman scattering (N., 
 U) line reversal (D-llne of Na, elec- 
 ofl, rotational temperature). Two 
 obtain the most accurate comparison 
 t^ [the same burners and auxiliary gas-feed 
 iujimarlzed and the sensitivity, accuracy, 
 oorrectlons are discussed. In general, 
 (petter than 98X) between the various 
 composition and burner type. 
 
 Key words: combustion; equilibrium; higp 
 spectrometry: matrix; modeling; vapors 
 
 1.1 Status of Flame Temperature Measurement 
 Temperature, and Its spatial and tempork 
 fundamental quantity for characterization < 
 This Is especially the case for atmospherV 
 dustrlal systems ire Included. For Instance 
 comparing the effectiveness of vai 
 le Inhibition (!]. More conmonly 
 centratlon data to define the kinetic 
 
 The recent development of computer-baseb 
 equilibrium [4] and on-equllbrlum [5] flame 
 
 'NRC-NBS Doctoral Research Associate 1977- 
 Research and Development Center, P.O. Box 8 
 
 [•Chemical Corrosion Division, National Meai 
 Numbers In brackets Indicate the literature 
 
 © 
 
 ■ and J. S. Hastle' 
 
 aemperature; isolation; lasers; inass; 
 
 distribution. Is perhaps the most Important 
 high temperature vapor or gaseous system. 
 -essure flames, where both laboratory and 1n- 
 tbmperature can be used as a rating parameter 
 tirol measures In contustlon efficiency and 
 ire Is used In conjunction with species con- 
 lynamlc state of the flame (2.3). 
 thods of temperature calculation for both 
 sitens. together with the availability of an 
 
 p-esent address. General Electric Co., 
 Schenectady, New York. 
 
 it Laboratory. 
 
 ■ences at the end of the paper. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 6 lines 
 
 t 
 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 2 lines 
 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 3 lines 
 
 O 
 
 IJUse manuscript paper, Form 
 NBS- 156, 16 percent reduction 
 paper, Form CD- 135 (as in this 
 example), or 25 percent 
 reduction paper. Form CD-135B. 
 Type single space, or 1 'A spaces 
 for technical text, exercise great 
 care to produce clean, error- 
 free copy (see sec. 4.4 for 
 additional instructions). 
 
 © 
 
 2)When preparing a proceedings 
 paper for which reprints will be 
 produced (as in this example), 
 identify the proceedings at the 
 top of the first page of each 
 paper. 
 
 o 
 
 3 j Center title and authors and 
 space as indicated. 
 
 o 
 
 4JKeep organizational affiliation 
 to a minimum and indicate 
 mailing address. Note that 
 additional identity, if needed, 
 is given in a footnote (see also 
 sec. 2.9.2). Also note that 
 special symbols are used to 
 identify footnotes to front 
 matter and that Arabic 
 numbmng begins with main 
 text (s) . 
 
 o 
 
 
 5)Type abstract two lines below 
 author's affiliation, indented 
 five spaces from both margins. 
 First line may be indented five 
 spaces or flush according to 
 text. 
 
 © 
 
 6)Place key words as shown in 
 alphabetical order, separated by 
 semicolons. Capitalize only 
 proper nouns. 
 
 r^Flush left is recommended for 
 headings, upper and lowercase. 
 Use Arabic numbers 1., 2., etc. 
 for main headings, 1.1, 1.2, 
 . . .2.1, 2.2, etc. for subhead- 
 ings. Double space between' 
 headings (see sec. 4.4.9 for 
 further information and alter- 
 native method). 
 
 (S^Place superscript Arabic 
 numbered footnotes at the 
 bottom of the page; note that 
 a short rule separates the foot- 
 notes from the text. 
 
 © 
 
 9)Center page number as 
 indicated (see sec. 4.4.17 for 
 numbering of front matter and 
 use of plain bond paper). 
 
 Exhibit 4-B 
 
4-13 
 
 ® 
 
 © 
 
 (u) 
 
 @ 
 @ 
 
 Si 
 
 with the reasonable assumption that K1 
 tivlty can be defined. Re-arranging relati 
 
 K^.Tfi) * A(A.T)[I(, 
 al , the expression In the s( 
 
 n^\ 
 
 where dT = T-Tp, 
 
 We shall define the derivativi 
 
 ■ihioff's law applies here, a temperature sensl 
 ips in eq (1): 
 
 ■ brackets is 
 
 3 lines 
 3 lines 
 3 lines 
 3 lines 
 
 Form CD-135 
 
 OJS WChrtliiueS And burners is also very goift' 
 experimental approach. 
 
 Initial mole 
 
 ratio Argon Na-0 line 
 
 Hj/O^/Nj shield reversal OH i 
 
 4.0/1,0/4.0 no 2100 * 20 
 
 yes 2060 ± 20 2160 
 
 1990 • 20*^ 
 2020' ^ 
 
 3.4/1.0/2.0 yes 2470 ± 20 2425 
 
 - 2475"^ 
 
 Temperature In degrees K measured at a hel 
 [rectangular burner) above the burner face 
 as two standard deviations. 
 Oata obtained at z = 30 mn, y = mm but 
 
 md Indicative of the reliability ot the 
 
 Vibrational Rotational Calculated 
 Raman Raman adiabatic 
 
 2146 1 40 
 
 1980 • 40 g 2019 
 
 2010 • 40*^ 
 
 2500 ± 150" f 2545 
 
 of 30 run (cylindrical burner) or 15 n 
 tota^ional Raman uncertainties are g1\ 
 
 3 lines 
 
 Its are required, 
 ! required since 1 
 
 with large 
 
 We wish to acknowledge Dr. W. J. Mill* 
 which we reproduced, and for useful discus 
 Bonnell assisted with the calculation of ad 
 burners and gas feed systems, Mr. A. Sesso 
 the apparatus. Suggestions by Dr. Gary Mai 
 appreciated. 
 7. References 
 
 (1) Reuther. J. H. Measures of effectlvene 
 inhibition of quenched adiabatic premi 
 561(2): 1281-1314; 1979 September. 
 
 12) Miller. Jr., W. , 
 Istry. Nat. Bur 
 
 , Raman measurement 
 iverage temperature. 
 
 fpr the loan of his Padley-Sugden-type burner, 
 the Na-D line reversal method. Dr. D. H 
 flame temperatures and with the design o^ 
 ted with data taking and maintenance 
 irl for improving the manuscript are also 
 
 and mechanisms for chemical and physical 
 ws. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Spec. Publ 
 
 3 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 ^O^Insert properly-sized line draw- 
 ^-^ings and halftones directly 
 into the camera-ready copy, or 
 seek help from the graphics 
 group, TIPD, or PIO. Center 
 figure captions two lines below 
 figure, single space, use Arabic 
 numbers followed by a period. 
 Refer to section 4.4.16 for 
 further guidance; follow 
 carefully. 
 
 M IjAllow three lines above and 
 below all equations. They 
 should be centered, typed, and 
 numbered consecutively at the 
 right margin in parentheses if 
 they are to be referred to in the 
 text. Break large equations at 
 the end of an expression and 
 line up to the right of the 
 equal ( = ) sign. Use presstype 
 for the larger symbols (see 
 also sec. 4.4.14). 
 
 (lljType tables directly as part of 
 the text, separated by three 
 lines. Number consecutively in 
 Arabic, followed by a period 
 and then the title. Indicate 
 footnotes in the table with 
 raised lowercase letters and 
 place footnotes at the bottom 
 of the table as shown (see 
 also sees. 4.4.13 and 4.4.15). 
 
 flByType a horizontal line below 
 the table caption, below the 
 column headings, and at the 
 end of the table. Avoid 
 unnecessary vertical and 
 horizontal rules. Consult 
 TIPD or PIO on large tables 
 that cannot be inserted 
 directly into the camera-ready 
 text. 
 
 n4)Acknowledgments are placed at 
 the end of the text, separated 
 by three lines and a centered 
 rule line as indicated. 
 
 C^i 
 
 15)Use care and consistency in 
 ordering the bibliographic data 
 of references. Reference 
 numbers in the text should be 
 enclosed in square brackets and 
 typed in the Reference Section 
 in sequence as they appear in 
 the text, or in alphabetical 
 order (see sec. 4.11 for further 
 details and exh. 4-E for 
 different examples). 
 
 Note: Appendixes, if any, come 
 next, with headings like other 
 sections of the text, or as 
 Appendix A, Appendix B, etc. 
 
 Exhibit 4-B (cont.) 
 
4-14 
 
 Exhibit 4-C. Sample of Two-Column Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 Form CD-135B 
 
 National Bureau of Standards Special Pubhcdt 
 Symposium on Characterization of High Temperi 
 September 18-22. 1979. 
 
 H. C, Drake.* L. M. GrabiMi 
 
 Different spectroscopic methods are used 
 report compares measurement of temperature pi 
 flames using the methods of: (1) Raman scatti 
 (2) line reversal (D-line of Na, electronic ■ 
 temperature). Two separate burner designs ai 
 parlson possible, all measurements were made 
 system. The theory for each technique is suf 
 venience are compared. Necessary correction: 
 very good agreement (better than 98X) betweei 
 flame co<npos1tion and burner type. 
 
 Key words: combustion; equilibrium; high temp 
 matrix; modeling, vapors. 
 
 © 
 
 1. Introduction 
 
 1.1 Status of Flame Temperature Measi 
 
 Temperature, and Its spatial and temporal 
 distribution, is perhaps the most important funda- 
 mental quantity for characterization of a high 
 temperature vapor or gaseous system. This is es- 
 pecially the case for atmospheric pressure flames 
 where both laboratory and industrial systems are 
 Included. For instance, temperature can be used 
 as a rating parameter for comparing the effective 
 ness of various control measures in contiustion 
 efficiency and flame inhibition 11).^ More como 
 ly, temperature is used In conjunction with spect 
 concentration data to define the kinetic or therm 
 dynamic state of the flame [2,3]. 
 
 The recent development of computer-based 
 methods of temperature calculation for both equi- 
 librium [4J and on-equillbrlum [5] flame systems. 
 
 •NRC-NBS Doctoral Research Associate 1977-1978; 
 present address. General Electric Co., Research 
 and Development Center. P.O. Box 8. Schenecta<ty, 
 New York. 
 
 ••Chemical Corrosion Division. Kational Measure- 
 ment Laboratory 
 
 ^Numbers in brackets indicate the literature 
 references at the end of the paper. 
 
 (jr the measurement of flame temperature. This 
 ■or atmospheric premixed H./O./N. laminar 
 
 rg (N-, vibrational and rotational temperature; 
 iftitjerature). and (3) line ratio (OH, rotational 
 dered. To obtain the most accurate com- 
 
 tJh the same burners and auxiliary gas-feed 
 
 rjlzed and the sensitivity, accuracy, and con- 
 icussed. In general, the results indicati 
 *ious methods for certain combinations of 
 
 "T 
 
 together with the availability of an adequate bas 
 thermodynamic 6 and chemical kinetic data base 
 (7.8], particularly for H^/O^/Nj. f>as added a nev 
 dimension to temperature determination. AccuratE 
 experimental flame temperature profiles are now 
 needed to validate these computer based models of 
 flame processes. 
 
 de. the use of differ- 
 
 On the experimeni 
 ent burners and flame; 
 serious impediment to 
 of data. It Is now at 
 standards are needed. 
 
 by f 
 
 workers is a 
 rlaboratory transfer 
 nt that combustion 
 icularly in the areas 
 
 of burner design and flame selection. The pres- 
 ent study is a mere beginning in this direction. 
 
 In addition to these difficulties, little 
 is known about the accuracy of various tempera- 
 ture measurement methods. With the continuing 
 development, in recent years, of novel tempera- 
 ture measurement techniques, e.g., Raman scatter- 
 ing. Coherent Antlstokes Raman Spectroscopy 
 (CARS), and two line fluorescence, the need for 
 accurate comparison data by established tech- 
 niques such as line-reversal for validation of 
 these methods 1s further indicated. Evidence 
 
 6 lines 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 2 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 © 
 
 The electromagnetic skin effect is Important 
 In any eddy current system and especially so In 
 the moltifrequency method. It is the variation of 
 the skin effect with frequency and the resulting 
 differences in the flow pattern of eddy currents 
 lat make It possible for the multifrequency 
 thod to produce more information about the test 
 lecimen than does the single frequency method [4] 
 
 2. Multifrequency Eddy Current Principles 
 
 Significant multifrequency eddy current 1n- 
 pection principles are; 
 
 a. Two or more excitation frequencies are 
 applied simultaneously to the inspection coll 
 
 sembly. 
 
 b. The filtered, demodulated outputs repre- 
 senting the response of the system to the dlffer- 
 
 excitation carrier signals can carry indepen- 
 dent information as a result of the eddy current 
 effect which varies with frequency. 
 
 2.1 Single frequency method 
 
 A single frequency eddy current 1nspecti_ __ 
 vice Is depicted in figure 1. The single f requenc ' 
 generator A supplies excitation currents tc 
 
 differential Internal eddy current probe colls. 
 The amplified bridge output signal Is applied to 
 an amplitude-phase detector which produced demodu 
 iBted in-phase (0*) and quadrature>phase (90*) 
 
 3 lines 
 
 2 lines 
 
 3 lines 
 
 o 
 
 IjUse 16% reduction paper, Form 
 CD- 135, or 25% reduction 
 paper, Form CD-135B (as in 
 this example). See section 4.4 
 for further details. Type single 
 space, or 1 'A spaces for techni- 
 cal text, exercise great care to 
 produce clean, error-free copy. 
 
 © 
 
 2 J When preparing a proceedings 
 paper for which reprints will be 
 produced (as in this example), 
 identify the proceedings at the 
 top of the first page of each 
 paper. 
 
 © 
 
 3)Center title and authors and 
 space as indicated. 
 
 
 
 4)Keep organizational affiliation 
 to a minimum and indicate 
 mailing address. Note that 
 additional identity, if needed, is 
 given in a footnote at the 
 bottom of the left column. Also 
 note that special symbols are 
 used to identify footnotes to 
 front matter and that Arabic 
 numbejjng begins with the main 
 text 
 
 © 
 
 SJType abstract two lines below 
 author's affiliation, indented 
 five spaces from both margins. 
 First line may be indented five 
 spaces or flush according to 
 text. 
 
 © 
 
 6jPlace key words as shown in 
 alphabetical order, separated by 
 semicolons. Capitalize only 
 proper nouns. 
 
 © 
 
 7jFor two-column work, type up 
 to but not beyond the blue 
 lines on the reduction paper. 
 Flush left is recommended for 
 all headings, upper and lower- 
 case. Use Arabic numbers 1., 
 2., etc. for main headings, l.I, 
 1.2, ... 2.1, 2.2, etc. for 
 subheadings. Double space 
 between headings (see sec. 4.4.9 
 for further information and 
 alternative method). 
 
 C SJPIace superscript Arabic 
 numbered footnotes at the 
 bottom of the left column; 
 note that a short rule separates 
 the footnotes from the text. 
 
 © 
 
 9jCenter page number as indicated 
 (see sec. 4.4.17 for numbering 
 of front matter and use of 
 plain bond paper). 
 
 n())lnsert properly-sized line draw- 
 ings and halftones directly into 
 the camera-ready copy, or seek 
 help from the graphics group, 
 TIPD, or PIO. Center figure 
 
 Exhibit 4-C 
 
4-15 
 
 ® 
 
 ® 
 ® 
 
 ® 
 ® 
 
 Form CD 135B 
 
 the firsf variable on 
 Hnes S. 6. and 7. Ne 
 
 can be used to determl 
 discriminate again: 
 
 two 
 
 signals d. , d^. and d 
 eqs (13). (14). and (16) 
 of *^ and *, 
 lies. These 
 
 ■ the 
 
 variables produce signals which may 
 dimensional subspace of the main four 
 subspace of the main four-dimensional 
 which applies In this example. When 
 it>, are determined, the signals d, , d.,, and d 
 
 "r 
 
 be found for any Input signals 
 
 and «.. 
 
 ""'(^)s 
 
 ; the value of - 
 
 When the rotator , 
 
 given in eq (23). the variable or p 
 
 observed (when present) on line 11 (signal f-). In 
 
 3 lines 
 3 lines 
 
 Form CD-135B 
 
 OUKft SMKT FOfI a% KoucnoM. r ■ 
 
 Integral fission cross 
 sion neutron spectrum j 
 
 -eported with an overal I 
 
 Table 1. Correction factors for backgroun 1 
 the cavity uranlum-235 flssi 
 cylindrical source shell 
 
 Photofission, epither' 
 mal and thermal neu- 
 tron penetration 
 
 Impurity isotopes 
 
 background 0.6636 0.7810 0.8923 
 0.9907 0.9939 0.9840 
 
 0.999 0.997 
 0.991 0.991 
 
 0.999 
 0.991 
 
 1.000 1.000 1.000 
 
 Net correctioi 
 
 0.8472 0.7668 0.8693 
 
 'For typical fissionable deposits 
 
 combined uncertainty of ±2. 2-2. 61. depending on 
 the Isotope. 
 
 The spectral characterize 
 nium-252 spontaneous fission i 
 
 of the califo 
 )n spectrum is 
 
 sponses and neutron field perturbations 
 rum neutron field measurements standard 
 
 7995 0.9975 0.9978 ± 0.1 to ± 0.3X 
 99J9 0.9967 0.993S t 0.1S 
 
 1.000 0.998 
 
 1.001 1.010 
 
 1.003 1.006 
 
 : O.U 
 : l.OX 
 
 7875 0.9982 1.0056 
 
 excellent over the bulk of the energy range. A 
 recent evaluation of eight documented spectrom- 
 
 3 lines 
 
 3 lines 
 
 captions two lines below figure, 
 single space, use Arabic 
 numbers followed by a period. 
 Refer to section 4.4.16 for 
 further guidance; follow 
 carefully. 
 
 n UAIlow three lines above and 
 below all equations. They 
 should be centered, typed, and 
 numbered consecutively at the 
 right margin in parentheses if 
 they are to be referred to in the 
 text. Break large equations at 
 the end of an expression and 
 line up to the right of the 
 equal ( = ) sign. Use presstype 
 for the larger symbols (see also 
 sec. 4.4.14). 
 
 nZJType tables directly as part of 
 the text, separated by three 
 lines. Number consecutively in 
 Arabic, followed by a period 
 and then the title. If a table 
 (or figure) spans both columns 
 and appears mid page, continue 
 left column text in same 
 column below the table (or 
 figure), then continue at the top 
 of the right column. Indicate 
 footnotes with raised lowercase 
 letters and place footnotes at 
 the bottom of the table as 
 shown (see sees. 4.4.15 and 
 4.4.16). 
 
 USyType a horizontal line below 
 the table caption, below the 
 column headings, and at the 
 end of the table. Avoid un- 
 necessary vertical and horizontal 
 rules. Consult TIPD or PIO on 
 large tables that cannot be 
 inserted directly into the 
 camera-ready text. 
 
 (l4)AcknowIedgments are placed 
 at the end of the text, 
 separated by three lines and a 
 centered rule line as indicated. 
 
 @ 
 
 © 
 
 ime) frequency instrument; 
 utomatlc calibration meani 
 
 The developtnent 
 needed 
 
 3 lines 
 2 lines 
 
 The permission of Battelle-Northwest and the 
 Electric Power Research Institute to use figure: 
 through 13 and the basic data given in table 1 
 gratefully acknowledged. Also acknowledged are 
 helpful suggestions of G..J. Posakony. Manager, 
 Nondestructive Testing, Battelle-Northwest. 
 
 6. References 
 
 [1] HcMaster. R. C. ed. Nondestructive testing 
 handbook. Vol. II. New York: Ronald Press; 
 1959. Sections 36, 37, and 36. 
 
 L. U.S. Patent 3,229. ]98. Januar - 
 
 [3] Libby, H. L. Multiparameter eddy current cor 
 cepts. In Research techniques in nondestruc- 
 tive testing. R. S. Sharpe, ed. London: 
 Academic Press, 1970. 345-382. 
 
 [4] Libby, K. L. Introduction to electromagnetic 
 nondestructive test methods. New York: Wiley 
 Interscience; 1971. 
 
 [5] Malmshaw, R. Potential developments in NOT. 
 The British Journal of Nondestructive Test- 
 ing. 19(1); 21; 1977 October. 
 
 [6] Libby. H. L.; Handling. C. R. Transformation 
 (analyzer] device using post detector signal 
 pattern rotators for multiparameters eddy 
 current tester BNHL-1469. Richland. HA: 
 Battelle-Northwest; 1970 September. 
 
 [7] Hultifrequency eddy current inspection for 
 cracks under fasteners. AFHL-TR-76-209, 
 Battelle Columbus Laboratories, Oecember 197^ 
 
 flS^Use care and consistency in 
 ordering the bibliographic 
 data or references. Reference 
 numbers in the text should be 
 enclosed in square brackets and 
 typed in the Reference Section 
 in sequence as they appear in 
 the text, or in alphabetical 
 order (see sec. 4.4.11 for further 
 details and exh. 4-E for 
 different examples). 
 
 Note: Appendixes, if any, come 
 next, with headings like other 
 sections of the text, or as 
 Appendix A, Appendix B, etc. 
 
 Exhibit 4-C (cont.) 
 
4-16 
 
 Exhibit 4-D. Sample Table of Contents for Typewritten Camera-Ready Copy 
 
 Note: The indentation style for headings and subheadings is used in this example, but flush left, as recommended for text, may also be 
 used (see sec. 4.4.9). 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 
 Foreword iii 
 
 Preface iv 
 
 1. Introduction 1 
 
 1.1 Overview 1 
 
 1.2 ADP Installation Model 2 
 
 2. Installation Performance Management 4 
 
 2.1 Upper Management 4 
 
 2.2 User Community 5 
 
 2.2.1 Measuring User Satisfaction 5 
 
 2.2.2 Setting Service Levels 5 
 
 2.2.3 Measuring Service 6 
 
 2.2.4 Reporting to Users 6 
 
 2.2.5 Correcting Poor Service 7 
 
 2.3 Resource Management 8 
 
 2.3.1 Operational Standards 8 
 
 2.3.2 Resource Utilization Standards 9 
 
 2.3.3 Forecasting 9 
 
 2.4 Vendor 10 
 
 2.5 Summary 11 
 
 3. Installation Performance Activities in the Federal Sector . . 12 
 
 3.1 Auditor Perspective 12 
 
 3.2 Installation Perspective 14 
 
 3.3 Summary 15 
 
 4. Current Inadequacies in Installation Performance 
 
 Practices 16 
 
 4.1 Lack of Measurability 16 
 
 4.2 Lack of Well -Defined Terms 17 
 
 4.3 Lack of "Good" Values 17 
 
 4.4 Lack of Statistical CPE Techniques 18 
 
 5. Proposed Remedial Work 20 
 
 5.1 Standard Performance Measures 20 
 
 5.2 Data Base for Normative Performance 20 
 
 5.3 Development of Statistical CPE Techniques 21 
 
 5.4 Summary 21 
 
 6. Acknowledgments 22 
 
 7. References 23 
 
 Appendix A 23 
 
 Exhibit 4-D 
 
4-17 
 Exhibit 4-E. Reference Style in NBS Publications 
 
 The following are examples of how both NBS and non-NBS publications should be referenced in NBS in- 
 house publications. When the reference style for an outside publication differs, use the style manual of that 
 publication. 
 
 Type of Reference 
 
 As Typed on Reference Page 
 
 Journal of Research 
 
 [1] Schoonover, Randall M. A high precision load cell mass comparator. J, 
 
 M. A mgr 
 I. (U.S.). 
 
 Res. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.). 84(5): 347-351; 1979 September-October. 
 
 Journal of Physical and 
 Chemical Reference Data 
 
 [2] Haar, L.; Gallagher, J. S. Thermodynamic properties of ammonia. J. 
 Phys. Chem. Ref. Data. 7(3): 635-792; 1977. 
 
 Monographs 
 
 [3] Burley, N. A.; Powell, R. L.; Burns, G. W.; Scroger, M. G. The nicro- 
 sil versus nisil thermocouple: properties and thermoelectric refer- 
 ence data. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Monogr. 161; 1978 April. 167 p. 
 
 Handbooks 
 
 [4] Wood, L. A.; Wood, J. F.; Krieder, K. G. Energy management for 
 
 furnaces, kilns, and ovens. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Handb. 124; 1978 
 January. 44 p. 
 
 Special Publications 
 
 [5] Baum, M. A.; Washburn, S. A., eds. Science on its way to work. Nat. 
 Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Spec. Publ . 498; 1978 April. 44 p. 
 
 Applied Mathematics Series 
 
 [6] Clatworthy, W. H. Tables of two-associate-class partially balanced 
 designs. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Appl . Math. Ser. 63; 1973 May. 327 p. 
 
 National Standard Reference 
 Data Series 
 
 [7] Buxton, G. V.; Sellers, R. M. Compilation of rate constants for the 
 reaction of metal ions in unusual valency states. Nat. Bur. Stand. 
 (U.S.) Nat. Stand. Ref. Data Ser. 62; 1978 June. 78 p. 
 
 Exhibit 4-E 
 
4-18 
 
 Type of Reference 
 
 As Typed on Reference Page 
 
 Building Science Series 
 
 [8] Rubin, A. I.; Collins, B. L.; Tibbott, R. L. Window blinds as a 
 potential energy saver--a case study. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Bldg. 
 Sci. Ser. 11; 1978 May. 85 p. 
 
 Federal Information 
 Processing Standards 
 Publications 
 
 [9] McEwen, H. E. Transmittal form for describing computer magnetic tape 
 file properties. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Fed. Info. Process. Stand. 
 Publ. (FIPS PUB) 53; 1978. 4 p. 
 
 Product Standards 
 
 [10] Marking of jewelry and novelties of silver. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) 
 Prod. Stand. 71-76; 1977 August. 4 p. 
 
 Technical Notes 
 
 [11] Shorten, F. J., ed. NBS reactor: summary of activities July 1976 to 
 June 1977. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Tech. Note 969; 1978 April. 188 p. 
 
 Consumer Information 
 Series 
 
 [12] Radack, Shirley M. ; Burns, Grace G. Automation in the marketplace. 
 Halpin, Suellen, ed. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) Consum. Info. Ser. 10; 
 1978 March. 8 p. 
 
 NBS Interagency/Internal 
 Reports 
 
 [13] Stiehler, Robert D.; Hockman, Arthur; Embree, Edward J.; Masters, 
 Larry W. Solar energy systems--standards for rubber seals. Nat. Bur. 
 Stand. (U.S.) NBSIR 77-1437; 1978 March. 63 p. 
 
 Journal article 
 
 [14] Dunlap, Connie F. Cataloging in publication. Lib. J. 99(18): 
 2573-2578; 1974 October 15. 
 
 Book 
 
 [15] Heilbrun, James. Urban economics and public policy. New York: St. 
 Martin Press; 1974. 380 p. 
 
 Exhibit 4-E (cont.) 
 
4-19 
 
 Type of Reference 
 
 As Typed on Reference Page 
 
 Chapter in a book 
 
 [16] Iverson, W. P.; Brinckman, F. E. Microbial metabolism of heavy metals, 
 chapter 8 in Water pollution microbiology. Vol. 2. R. Mitchell, ed. 
 New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons; 1978. 201-232. 
 
 Chapter in conference Proceedings 
 
 [17 1 Senholzi, Peter B. Oil analysis/wear particle analysis. Shives, T. R. ; 
 Willard, William A., ed. Proceedings of the 26th meeting of the 
 mechanical failure prevention group: detection, diagnosis, and 
 prognosis; 1977 May 17-19; Chicago, IL. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) 
 Spec. Publ. 494; 1977 September. 27-32. 
 
 ' [17] is an NBS publication, but the same format should be followed when referencing a proceedings not published by NBS. 
 
 Exhibit 4-E (cont.) 
 
4-20 
 
 Exhibit 4-F. Sample Cover and Title Page for NBSIRs 
 
 NBSIR Cover 
 
 NBSIR 80-2004 
 
 The Measurement of the Smoke 
 Leakage of Door Assemblies 
 During Standard Fire Exposures 
 
 National Bureau ol Standards 
 U S Department o' Commerce 
 Washington, C 20234 
 
 Prepared for 
 
 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 
 U.S. Department of LatMr 
 Washington. DC 20210 
 
 Report number 
 
 (Assigned by ERB after approval) 
 
 Title 
 
 (Subtitle, if any) 
 
 Author(s) 
 
 Organization and address 
 
 Date 
 
 Type of report or period covered 
 
 Sponsoring Agency and address 
 
 NBSIR Title Page 
 
 NBSIR 80-2004 
 
 THE MEASUREMENT OF THE SMOKE 
 LEAKAGE OF DOOR ASSEMBLIES 
 DURING STANDARD FIRE EXPOSURES 
 
 Leonard Y Cooper 
 
 Center (or Firo Research 
 Ndiional Engir^eenng Laborsiory 
 Naiional Bureau of Standards 
 U 5 Depertmeni of Commerce 
 Washington. C 20234 
 
 e 1980 ■^*" 
 
 Prepared (or 
 
 The Occupalional Safety and Health Adminis 
 
 US Depanment of Labor 
 
 Washington, DC 20210 
 
 \f \ 
 
 us. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE. Philip M. Klutznick. Stenltry 
 
 Uithtt H Hodg*a. Jt . Otputy S*cf*taiy 
 
 Jordan J Baruch. A%tiHani S*cmary for Productivity. Toctinotttgy. and Inrtovottot 
 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDAROS, EnMet Amiiler. DifOctof 
 
 Report number 
 
 (Assigned by ERB after approval) 
 
 Title 
 
 (Subtitle, if any) 
 
 — — Author(s) 
 
 — Organization and address 
 
 (give fuller identity on title page, if needed) 
 
 Date 
 
 Type of report or period covered 
 
 Sponsoring Agency and address 
 
 Seal and masthead provided by NBS duplicating units 
 
 Note: Final camera-ready copy for cover and title page is 
 prepared by NBS duplicating units from typewritten copy 
 supplied by the originating organization. The NBS 
 duplicating units also provide the required DoC/NBS seal 
 and masthead information at the bottom of the title page 
 and on the cover of "Internal" reports (sponsored only by 
 NBS). See next page for Bibliographic Data Sheet 
 (NBS-I14A). 
 
 Exhibit 4-F 
 
Exhibit 4-G. Sample Bibliographic Data Sheet for NBSIRs 
 
 4-21 
 
 NBS-n4A (REV. 2*8C) 
 
 U.S. DEPT. OF COMM. 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA 
 
 SHEET (See instructions) 
 
 1. PUBLICATION OR 
 REPORT NO. 
 
 NBSIR 80-2004 
 
 2.- Performing Organ. Report No.) 3. Publication Date 
 
 June 1980 
 
 4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 
 
 The Measurement of the Smoke Leakage of Door Assemblies During Standard 
 Fire Exposures 
 
 5. AUTHOR(S) 
 
 Leonard Y. Cooper 
 
 6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other thon NBS, see instructions) 
 
 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 
 DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 WASHINGTON, D.C. 20234 
 
 7. Contract/Grant No. 
 
 8. Type of Report & Period Covered 
 Final 
 
 9. SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS (Street. City. State, ZIP) 
 
 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 
 U.S. Department of Labor 
 Washington, DC 20210 
 
 10. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES 
 
 I I Document describes a computer program; SF-185, FIPS Software Summary, is attached. 
 
 11. ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summarY of most significant information. If document includes a significant 
 bibliography or literature survey, mention it here) 
 
 A basis for relating overall intrabuilding smoke migration dynamics to high tempera- 
 ture, door assembly smoke leakage measurements is formulated. The results of applyim^ 
 the tentative, high temperature, ISO test method DP 5925 Part 3, which was developed 
 to measure smoke leakage of door assemblies during the course of a standard fire 
 endurance test, are reported. A critical analysis reveals that the basic objective 
 of the method is limited in its utility in the sense that fire scenarios in high- 
 rise buildings may not be adequately simulated. Consistent with the above-mentioned 
 experimental results, troxoblesome theoretical problems with the test method and its 
 procedures are identified. These lead to a conclusion that the test method as 
 written is generally unreliable. An alternate test concept which removes the above- 
 mentioned DP 5925 Part 3 limitation and all of its problems is described and its 
 development is advocated. 
 
 12. KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries; alphabetical order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words by semicolons) 
 building fires; compartment fires; doors; egress; fire tests; high-rise buildings; 
 leakage; life safety; smoke; smoke movement; stack effects; test methods. 
 
 13. AVAILABILITY 
 
 [2jjt Unlimited 
 
 I I For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS 
 
 r~\ Order From Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 
 20402. 
 
 U^Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. 22161 
 
 14. NO. OF 
 
 PRINTED PAGES 
 
 70 
 
 15. Price 
 $7.00 
 
 USCOMM-DC 6043-P80 
 
 For detailed instructions for completing this sheet, see exhibit l-E(a) or reverse side of Form NBS -114. Include this sheet as 
 the last page of the report. 
 
 Exhibit 4-G 
 
5-1 
 
 Chapter 5 
 
 Special Forms of Communication 
 
 Page 
 
 5.1 Conferences 5-3 
 
 5.1.1 Success of Conferences 5-3 
 
 5.1.2 NBS Participation 5-3 
 
 5.1.3 Approval of Conferences 5-3 
 
 5.1.4 Responsibilities of Public Information Division or Program 
 
 Information Office 5-4 
 
 5.1.5 Responsibilities of Technical Organizations 5-4 
 
 5.1.6 Financing 5-4 
 
 5.1.7 Publishing Conference Proceedings 5-4 
 
 5.2 Oral Presentations 5-5 
 
 5.2.1 Review and Approval 5-5 
 
 5.2.2 Guidelines for Oral Presentations 5-5 
 
 5.2.3 Reading a Speech 5-5 
 
 5.2.4 Rehearsing a Speech 5-5 
 
 5.2.5 Organization and Visual Aids 5-6 
 
 5.2.6 Presentation 5-6 
 
 5.3 Exhibits 5-6 
 
 5.3.1 Developing or Refurbishing an Exhibit 5-6 
 
 5.3.2 Displaying an Existing Exhibit 5-7 
 
 5.4 Tours 5-7 
 
 5.4.1 General 5-7 
 
 5.4.2 Tour Logistics 5-7 
 
 5.5 Audiovisual Productions 5-8 
 
 5.5.1 Justifying an Audiovisual Production 5-8 
 
 5.5.2 Motion Pictures 5-8 
 
 5.5.3 Videotape 5-8 
 
 5.5.4 Slide-Audio Productions 5-8 
 
 5.5.5 Television Public Service Announcements 5-8 
 
 5.5.6 Radio and Audio-Only Programming 5-8 
 
 5.5.7 Exhibit Programming 5-8 
 
 5.5.8 Distribution of Audiovisual Programs 5-9 
 
 5.6 Historical Information 5-9 
 
 5.6.1 Museum 5-9 
 
 5.6.2 Contribution of Artifacts 5-9 
 
 5.7 Community Outreach 5-9 
 
 Exhibit 5-A. Conference Financing 5-10 
 
 Exhibit 5-B. Copyright Release for Non-Government Authors, Form NBS-1158 5-12 
 
 Exhibit 5-C. Checklist for Proceedings Editor 5-13 
 
 Bibliography 5-A. Aids to Oral Presentations 5-14 
 
 Chapter 5 — Contents 
 
5-3 
 
 Chapter 5 
 
 Special Forms of Communication 
 
 This chapter is addressed to administrators, 
 scientists, and engineers, and describes how to plan 
 and coordinate special forms of communication 
 within NBS policy guidelines. 
 
 5.1 Conferences 
 
 5.1.1 Success of Conferences 
 
 Face-to-face presentations and discussions 
 through conferences and seminars have proved 
 successful at NBS as a means of two-way communi- 
 cation with business, industry, academia, scientific 
 organizations, and Government. 
 
 A successful meeting depends on more than 
 program content. The proper blending of talent and 
 personalities to stimulate original thought; the 
 combination of staff friendliness, courtesy, and 
 efficiency to create an easy, outgoing atmosphere; 
 and careful conference management — all are 
 important in conducting a successful and fruitful 
 conference. 
 
 5.1.2 NBS Participation 
 
 In general, all technical conferences involving 
 NBS facilities should relate to some aspect of NBS 
 competences and interests. Whether sponsored 
 exclusively by NBS, cosponsored by NBS in 
 cooperation with other Government organizations 
 or professional societies, or hosted by NBS and 
 sponsored by a non-NBS group, some NBS techni- 
 cal group will be committed to participation in the 
 conference with at least one technical representa- 
 tive who will be particularly concerned with the 
 scope and coverage of the specific conference. 
 Such participation is necessary so that NBS has a 
 voice both in the substantive program aspects and 
 in the arrangements. 
 
 5.1.3 Approval of Conferences 
 
 Although the conferences in which NBS is 
 involved may appear similar in format, they require 
 different management approaches. 
 
 Type 1. Conferences sponsored or cosponsored 
 by the Bureau with national or international 
 speakers and attendees, and as many as several 
 hundred persons attending. The request originates 
 within NBS. Approval is required at the major 
 operating unit (MOU) level. Space and facilities are 
 booked by the conference managers in the Public In- 
 formation Division (PID), Gaithersburg, and the 
 Program Information Office (PIO), Boulder. 
 
 Type 2. Conferences in which NBS provides the 
 facilities and acts as host but is not listed as a 
 cosponsor, even though NBS staff members are 
 heavily involved in the meeting and request use of 
 the facilities. These are usually committee meetings, 
 e.g., committee meetings of the American National 
 Standards Institute or the American Society for 
 Testing and Materials. Approval is required at the 
 MOU level. Space and facilities are booked by the 
 conference managers in PID, Gaithersburg, and 
 PIO, Boulder. 
 
 Type 3. Technical conferences in which NBS 
 provides the facilities and acts as host or as an 
 honorary cosponsor but has only a marginal interest 
 in the program, and sponsorship of general events 
 not directly connected with programs of the techni- 
 cal MOUs, such as the Montgomery Science Fair. 
 Requests normally originate outside NBS but 
 should be approved by the Chief of the Public Infor- 
 mation Division. Space and facilities are booked 
 through Conference Facilities and Equipment, after 
 the conference has been approved. In Boulder, 
 contact PIO. 
 
 Type 4. Small training courses or seminars 
 sponsored by NBS, (e.g., precision measurement 
 seminars sponsored by NBS) through internal NBS 
 procedures. Such conferences must be approved by 
 the NBS Director or Deputy Director. Space and 
 other facilities are booked by the conference 
 managers of PID, Gaithersburg, and PIO, Boulder. 
 
 Type 5. Small seminars, sponsored at the 
 division or section level, often with a single guest 
 speaker (e.g., solid-state physics seminars, heat 
 division colloquia). These seminars must be 
 approved at the MOU level, or at the center level — 
 if the laboratory director so chooses. Such seminars 
 should be booked directly through the staff of 
 Conference Facilities and Equipment, who will 
 notify PID. In Boulder contact PIO. 
 
 sections 5.1-5.1.3 
 
5-4 
 
 Type 6. Community related events and hosted 
 events of a general nature not related to the 
 Bureau's technical programs. These requests 
 originate outside NBS, and are approved by the 
 Chief, Facilities Services Division. 
 
 Following approval of the conference, a member 
 of the NBS group that originated the request should 
 meet with the appropriate PID or PIO staff to 
 discuss general arrangements. The conference 
 manager of PID or PIO should be included in any 
 general planning meetings for the conference. 
 When audiovisual and space requirements are 
 discussed, the Chief of Conference Facilities and 
 Equipment should be involved. 
 
 5.1.4 Responsibilities of Public Information 
 Division or Program Information Office 
 
 The PID in Gaithersburg and the PIO in Boulder 
 are responsible for the management and coordina- 
 tion of the NBS conference program. All confer- 
 ences of types 1 through 4 should be managed by 
 these offices. These offices can answer questions 
 about the type-classification of a meeting. Good 
 communication between these offices and the techni- 
 cal sponsor is necessary for a successful conference. 
 
 Conference management services include consult- 
 ing with sponsors on: 
 
 (1) Overall concept and direction of conference, 
 
 (2) Promotional efforts, 
 
 (3) Schedules and deadlines, 
 
 (4) Agenda, 
 
 (5) Conference financing, 
 
 (6) Proceedings, 
 
 (7) Displays, and 
 
 (8) Bureau procedures for conferences. 
 
 Services also include helping arrange the 
 following: 
 
 (1) 
 
 Food functions. 
 
 (2) 
 
 Living accommodations, 
 
 (3) 
 
 Transportation, 
 
 (4) 
 
 Printing, 
 
 (5) 
 
 Mailing, 
 
 (6) 
 
 Registration procedures and materials, 
 
 (7) 
 
 Hospitality services, and 
 
 (8) 
 
 Tours. 
 
 5.1.5 Responsibilities of Technical Organizations 
 
 Once a technical organization has received the ap- 
 propriate approvals, it should be prepared to accept 
 the following responsibilities: 
 
 (1) Providing adequate staff for preparing meeting 
 announcements, program documents (e.g., abstracts 
 of papers), and proceedings of the meeting; 
 
 (2) Processing registration; 
 
 (3) Handling fiscal arrangements; 
 
 (4) Providing staff to assist during the conference 
 in such roles as registrars and bus dispatchers; 
 
 (5) Maintaining primary liaison with cosponsors; 
 
 (6) Overseeing the technical program, in 
 association with any cosponsors. This responsibility 
 includes planning the program content and style, 
 arranging for speakers, scheduling the program, and 
 planning pre- and post-conference material, such as 
 abstracts and proceedings; 
 
 (8) Assisting PID, Gaithersburg, or PIO, Boulder, 
 as needed in the execution of other arrangements. 
 
 For conferences involving the National Measure- 
 ment Laboratory (NML), additional guidelines are 
 available from the NML office. 
 
 5.1.6 Financing 
 
 Details on conference financing are contained in 
 exhibit 5-A. 
 
 5.1.7 Publishing Conference Proceedings 
 
 The publishing cost of conference proceedings 
 must be completely covered either by including this 
 cost as part of the attendance fee, from MOU funds, 
 from cosponsor contributions, or a combination of 
 these sources. 
 
 In preparing the proceedings for publication, the 
 technical sponsor must adhere to the following 
 editorial review procedures. Each paper by an NBS 
 author must be individually reviewed and approved 
 by the appropriate Editorial Review Board (in 
 addition to being reviewed by the symposium 
 committee). Papers by non-NBS authors must be 
 carefully reviewed by the symposium committee or 
 the proceedings editor (an NBS staff member 
 appointed by the symposium committee) using ap- 
 propriate review criteria. 
 
 Following editorial review of all technical 
 papers, the conference chairperson or proceedings 
 editor must submit the front material to the appro- 
 priate NBS Editorial Review Board for final noting 
 and release for publication. Forms NBS-114 and 
 1 14- A should accompany the front material (which 
 includes cover and title page copy, table of 
 contents, abstract, foreword, introductory statements, 
 key words, and any other front-matter elements). This 
 final step is to ensure that the proceedings package is 
 ready for production by TIPD. 
 
 Also, in order that "invited" conference papers 
 by non-Government authors be subject to the same 
 
 sections 5.1.4-5.1.7 
 
5-5 
 
 public domain status as papers by NBS authors, 
 non-Government authors should be asked to sign a 
 copyright release form, a sample of which appears 
 in exhibit 5-B. (For more information on copyright 
 status of NBS publications, see sec. 1.4.1.) 
 
 The mechanics of publication — whether by 
 typewriter or by typesetting — are covered in 
 chapters 3 and 4. It is the responsibility of the con- 
 ference manager (usually the proceedings editor) to 
 provide final copy suitable for one of the three 
 NBS methods of publication discussed in chapter 3 
 of this manual. When typewritten camera-ready 
 copy is to be used, it is especially important that 
 outside conference authors be provided with 
 detailed instructions on the desired format for their 
 papers. This can conveniently be done by 
 reproducing the instructions for typewritten 
 camera-ready copy (see sec. 4.4), and sending them 
 to each author along with an adequate supply of 16 
 or 25 percent reduction paper (obtainable from the 
 NBS storeroom). Proceedings editors should check 
 exhibit 5-C to be sure they have fulfilled all the 
 requirements for publication. For additional 
 guidance, they may contact TIPD, particularly 
 when production by typesetting is planned. 
 
 5.2 Oral Presentations 
 5.2.1 Review and Approval 
 
 When a staff member is invited to speak before 
 an outside group, the Editorial Review Board 
 (ERB) should be notified by submitting Form NBS- 
 118 (Notice of Talk) at least 10 days before the talk 
 is given, and 3 weeks if the talk is to be given 
 outside of the Gaithersburg or Boulder areas, for 
 advance notice in the technical calendar. The 
 3-week notification is helpful to Department of 
 Commerce field officers if the talk is likely to draw 
 public or press interest. 
 
 If publication of the oral presentation is 
 contemplated, the manuscript is subject to the same 
 review procedures as other papers. An abstract of 
 approximately 200 words should accompany Form 
 NBS-118 for clearance if possible (see sec. 1.3.10 
 and exh. l-E(h)). Manuscripts and other material 
 reproduced in any form for general distribution 
 before or during a meeting, or for any other prepub- 
 lication use, must be submitted to the appropriate 
 ERB for noting and review. The manuscripts 
 should be clearly labeled "Preliminary Draft for 
 Discussion — Not for Publication." However, 
 editorial review is not required if such a manuscript 
 is distributed to a limited number of colleagues for 
 comments. 
 
 Transcripts of tape-recorded speeches intended 
 for publication must also be submitted for appropri- 
 ate review. The transcript should be carefully 
 
 edited before submission so that it will be suitable 
 for formal publication. 
 
 Technical papers presented at some meetings, 
 such as those of the American Physical Society, are 
 published only as abstracts and are submitted to 
 sponsoring committees before the meeting. If the 
 author finds that a sponsor's deadline does not 
 permit prior submission to ERB, the author may 
 mail the abstract to the sponsor before it has been 
 approved by ERB. A copy of this abstract must, 
 however, be submitted to ERB as soon as possible. 
 
 Some organizations publish abstracts that are in 
 themselves short papers. Such extensive abstracts 
 are normally treated as papers and should be given 
 the same type of review as is given a letter to the 
 editor (see sec. 1.3.10). If an abstract is more than 
 500 words, or if it contains figures, tables, or a 
 number of references, it should be submitted with 
 completed Forms NBS-114 and 114A to ERB the 
 same as any other manuscript (see sec. 1.3). 
 
 5.2.2 Guidelines for Oral Presentations' 
 
 A speech offers a good opportunity for communi- 
 cation of technical ideas because of the potential for 
 an instant exchange of information between a 
 speaker and an audience. 
 
 The challenge in giving a good talk is to 
 introduce a technical subject to a group of one's 
 colleagues, guide them through an analysis of the 
 subject's relevant aspects, and show how solutions 
 were arrived at and what they mean in as broad a 
 context as possible. 
 
 5.2.3 Reading a Speech 
 
 A potential hazard to communication is reading a 
 speech, especially where speakers do so to avoid 
 the necessity of thinking on their feet. Because the 
 audience usually realizes this, a paper, designed for 
 printed publication, may fall flat when read aloud 
 unless the paper has considerable literary value in 
 addition to its scientific worth. In reading a paper, a 
 person may fail to look at an audience often enough 
 to maintain effective contact, to judge their 
 reaction, and to adjust the speech accordingly. 
 
 5.2.4 Rehearsing a Speech 
 
 Whether the speech is to be delivered from notes 
 or read, rehearsal is usually required for all but the 
 highly experienced speaker. If the speech is to be 
 read, rehearsal is necessary to eliminate or change 
 sentences and phrases that do not read well, to 
 develop a conversational delivery, and to practice 
 
 ' Sections 5.2.2 to 5.2.7 are adapted from Hereford, Thomas G. 
 Oral presentation of technical papers. NBS manual for scientific 
 and technical communications. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.); June 
 1969, 108 p. 
 
 sections 5.2-5.2.4 
 
5-6 
 
 thinking out what is being read, so that the reading 
 will not seem mechanical. Speeches delivered from 
 notes must be rehearsed to see how well the outline 
 works as a guide for the speech, to smooth out 
 phrasing, and to develop transitions between ideas 
 as they appear in the outline. 
 
 5.2.5 Organization and Visual Aids 
 
 Any of the patterns used to present information 
 in papers can be adapted for speeches. Some 
 adaptation is necessary because people hearing a 
 speech do not have a chance to look back and 
 refresh their memory as a reader does. 
 
 A powerful tool for oral communication is the 
 visual aid — slides, motion pictures, transparencies 
 (with overhead projector), charts, blackboards, and 
 models. Good visuals clarify and amplify the verbal 
 message. They command audience attention, 
 stimulate interest, and help the speaker emphasize 
 major points. Visuals merit the same careful 
 thought and preparation that go into the manu- 
 script. If the visuals cannot be read or understood, 
 they detract from the information they are meant to 
 enhance. 
 
 PID, Gaithersburg, and the PIO, Boulder, are 
 prepared to assist the NBS staff in all phases of au- 
 diovisual presentations (see sec. 5.5). In addition, 
 the following general guidelines may help the 
 speaker in planning and using visual aids. 
 
 (1) Use visuals appropriate for the size of the 
 auditorium. For example, blackboards, flip charts, 
 or small models are too small to be effective in 
 large auditoriums, while slides are enlarged when 
 projected and can be seen from anywhere in the 
 auditorium. 
 
 (2) Slow down the rate of speaking while the 
 visual aid is before the audience to give listeners 
 time to read and comprehend the visual. Keep in 
 mind that the audiences' attention is divided when 
 a visual is presented; they must both look and listen. 
 
 (3) Do not repeat aloud the visual word for word, 
 but emphasize or expand this information to 
 develop the ideas further. 
 
 (4) Do not leave a visual on the screen after 
 discussing its subject. 
 
 (5) Know the slides and their sequence. Talk to 
 the audience, not to the slides! 
 
 5.2.6 Presentation 
 
 Oral presentations require much effort both in 
 preparation and in presentation. An hour-long 
 speech may require a week or more in preparation, 
 and afterward the speaker should feel that the hour 
 of speaking was about equal in effort to a whole 
 day of normal working. 
 
 If there is a discussion period, the speaker should 
 discover the main point of each question and give a 
 brief answer that will satisfy not only the questioner 
 but the whole audience as well. Occasionally 
 speakers may have to deal with "loaded" questions. 
 They should usually conceal knowledge of the 
 ulterior design of the question and proceed to give 
 an answer so candid as to disarm the questioner. 
 Persistent questioners should be invited to confer 
 with the speaker after the formal meeting. (See 
 bibliography 5-A for more guides to oral presenta- 
 tions.) 
 
 5.3 Exhibits 
 
 The exhibit is a unique medium for transferring in- 
 formation. It can combine artifacts, text, people, 
 film, photography, publications, recordings, and 
 participatory devices to attract diverse audiences on 
 many levels and for a variety of reasons. An exhibit 
 can (1) educate audiences about NBS work, 
 (2) reach people who want and can use additional 
 information about NBS programs, and (3) encour- 
 age participation in NBS programs. For success it 
 requires a joint effort between the scientific, techni- 
 cal, and administrative staff, PID or PIO, and other 
 specialists. 
 
 5.3.1 Developing or Refurbishing an Exhibit 
 
 When a program manager is contemplating the 
 development of a new exhibit or the refurbishment 
 of an old exhibit, a representative should call the 
 exhibit manager in PID, Gaithersburg, or PIO, 
 Boulder, to discuss the exhibit, its purpose, its 
 intended audience, and its best format for success. 
 Costs, logistical procedures, time factors, design 
 and fabrication issues will also be discussed. These 
 preliminary discussions will assist the staff member 
 and the exhibit manager to decide what exhibits 
 approach is best for the program, of even if an 
 exhibit is the best way to communicate the message. 
 
 An initial meeting will be held to insure proper 
 coordination. Attendees at this meeting will include 
 the exhibit manager, the public information 
 specialist who covers the organization, and the pub- 
 lications coordinator — all from PID or PIO; the 
 designer, if possible; and scientific/technical 
 division representatives. The scope and content of 
 the exhibit, research and writing, collection of 
 artifacts, design and production, and the activities 
 required to produce an exhibit will be discussed. 
 
 At an initial exhibit review meeting, the represen- 
 tative from the scientific/technical division should 
 have the following: (1) a written statement of 
 the exhibit's purpose and the objectives to be 
 obtained with the audience; (2) a description of 
 
 sections 5.2.5-5.3.1 
 
5-7 
 
 the audience(s) to be reached, such as professionals, 
 lay persons (adults and students), industry, 
 commerce, academia; (3) suggestions of possible 
 sites in which this exhibit might be shown, such as 
 trade shows, professional meetings, museums, fairs, 
 science and technology centers, and schools; and 
 (4) any written materials about the NBS scientific 
 or technological program, which provide background 
 information for the exhibit. 
 
 An exhibit script is the basis of an exhibit, and 
 must be developed prior to starting the design and 
 fabrication phases. It includes text and visuals, 
 including artifacts, photographs, and drawings. The 
 designer produces the design concept by working 
 from the script and tiie final design is submitted to 
 the fabricator for production. The exhibit may be 
 evaluated to determine its ability to communicate to 
 its designated audiences. Circulation of the exhibit 
 will be implemented according to the guidelines 
 below (see sec. 5.3.2). 
 
 5.3.2 Displaying an Existing Exhibit 
 
 If a program wishes to display an existing exhibit, 
 a representative should contact the exhibit manager 
 in PID or PIO as soon as possible for the best 
 possible service. The exhibits program develops the 
 exhibits' display schedule 1 to 2 years in advance. 
 
 The exhibit manager, working with the 
 scientific/technical division representatives, makes 
 arrangements to ship the exhibit, repair the exhibit, 
 order supplies and services necessary at the display 
 site, order booths for trade shows, coordinate 
 display arrangements with the exhibit recipient, 
 prepare and ship publications to be used with the 
 exhibit, and staff the exhibit. 
 
 When a program plans to display only publica- 
 tions, the procedure outlined for existing exhibits 
 should be followed. 
 
 5.4 Tours 
 5.4.1 General 
 
 The NBS tour program permits person-to-person 
 communication of the work done at NBS. The 
 public is invited into the science laboratory to learn 
 about measurement technology and how standards 
 affect the quality of everyday life. All tours are 
 arranged to cause as little disruption to NBS 
 scientists as possible. 
 
 In Gaithersburg approximately 4,000 visitors are 
 guided through NBS per year. At this site public 
 tours of general interest are scheduled every 
 Tuesday at 1:30 p.m. and every Friday at 9:30 a.m. 
 Group tours and special programs can be arranged 
 upon request with advance notice. General public 
 
 tours include an NBS overview, a discussion of 
 basic measurement exhibits in the museum, and 
 selected laboratory visits. Special or group tours 
 include an NBS overview, a museum stop (if appro- 
 priate), and laboratory visits that cover the interests 
 of the group. Tours connected with conferences 
 and VIP visits fall into this last category. 
 
 In Boulder, public tours are scheduled one 
 morning per week in the summer. Self-guided tours 
 are available year round. 
 
 5.4.2 Tour Logistics 
 
 Tours should be coordinated by the manager of 
 the tour program in PID, Gaithersburg, or PIO, 
 Boulder. The following steps are involved: 
 
 (1) A staff member may be asked to set up a tour. 
 If the groups are small (one to five people) and 
 requests are general in nature, these callers can join 
 one of the regularly scheduled general public tours. 
 
 (2) To avoid conflicts, all offices hosting 
 individuals or groups are asked to notify the tour 
 manager in PID or PIO before making a 
 commitment. 
 
 (3) For specific tour requests, the staff contact and 
 the tour manager assess the audience size and needs. 
 Tentative arrangements are made until specific 
 background information on the visitors is secured. 
 
 (4) The tour manager suggests relevant NBS 
 research activities as possible tour stops based on 
 the tour manager's knowledge of NBS and the 
 visitor's interest. 
 
 (5) The tour manager proceeds with logistical 
 arrangements such as the timing of the tour, 
 transportation, meeting facilities, audiovisual 
 equipment, and meals for special visitors or large 
 groups. 
 
 (6) To eliminate the necessity of technical staff 
 members speaking to non-technical or general 
 interest groups, PID personnel have produced a 
 repertoire of tour stops of specific technical 
 laboratories from which to structure diversified, 
 meaningful tours. The tour manager will select a 
 tour appropriate to the non-technical visitors' 
 interests from these stops. 
 
 (7) For visitors with technical backgrounds, the 
 tour manager schedules laboratory speakers, when 
 appropriate, in a time frame that is as convenient as 
 possible for the speaker. 
 
 (8) As a reminder to speakers, the tour manager 
 prepares a tour agenda and sends it to all people 
 concerned with the tour. 
 
 (9) The tour manager follows up the tour with 
 thank-you letters, answers requests for information, 
 and records tour data. Periodic tour evaluations are 
 conducted. 
 
 sections 5.3.2-5.4.2 
 
5-8 
 
 5.5 Audiovisual Productions 
 
 5.5.4 Slide-Audio Productions 
 
 The audiovisual programs in PID, Gaithersburg, 
 and PIO, Boulder, provide support to the technical 
 staff and management of NBS. The audiovisual staff 
 handles a wide variety of audiovisual requests, from 
 editing and processing 16-mm film footage to the de- 
 velopment of complete contract specifications for 
 the production of a major audiovisual production. 
 Competent technical advice is available in many au- 
 diovisual areas. These include budget development, 
 technical monitoring of contracts and services, film 
 editing, promotion and distribution, planning audio- 
 visual programs, development of creative audiovisu- 
 al concepts, and script writing. 
 
 5.5.1 Justifying an Audiovisual Production 
 
 Before an audiovisual program is produced, the 
 following major steps should be taken: 
 
 (1) Identify the need to communicate a certain 
 message to the intended audience. 
 
 (2) Ascertain that an audiovisual program is an ap- 
 propriate means of delivery. 
 
 (3) Determine which audiovisual format is most 
 suitable. 
 
 (4) Define as clearly as possible the intended 
 audience. 
 
 (5) Determine the costs, intended life span, and dis- 
 tribution involved. 
 
 (6) Obtain clearance from the Department of 
 Commerce to proceed with the production by 
 submitting SEC-927 (Audiovisual Production 
 Request). 
 
 5.5.2 Motion Pictures 
 
 NBS can coordinate the production of color or 
 black and white films with optical or magnetic 
 sound tracks. Costs of production vary widely 
 depending upon such factors as research and script 
 development, number of shooting locations, length 
 of film, special effects, choice of original or canned 
 musical score, and availability of stock footage. 
 
 5.5.3 Videotape 
 
 Slide-audio programs (slide with accompanying 
 recorded narration) are usually less expensive to 
 produce than film or videotape. The slide-audio 
 program is an excellent format to use in exhibits 
 because the equipment required is relatively 
 inexpensive and allows remote starting and 
 automatic stopping. Slide-audio programs can also 
 be used for internal presentations such as briefings 
 and overviews. 
 
 The cost for slide presentations varies according 
 to the length of the presentation, its sophistication, 
 the number of locations to be shot, the amount of 
 original graphics available, and the typesetting 
 required. 
 
 Color Slide File The PID has a comprehensive 
 file of more than 4,000 35-mm color slides, which 
 document visually many NBS technical program 
 activities and the physical facilities in Gaithersburg 
 and Boulder. Also, the NBS slide file contains 
 general category slides of buildings, people, 
 transportation, environment, background abstracts, 
 and other subjects. It is a valuable resource which 
 is available to the NBS staff for briefings, 
 overviews, and other types of visual presentations. 
 A similar slide file is available in PIO, Boulder. 
 
 5.5.5 Television Public Service Announcements 
 
 Television public service announcements are used 
 to promote important messages, publications, or 
 other types of Government products and services. 
 Generally, agencies distribute television public 
 service announcements to television stations as 16- 
 mm color sound prints. 
 
 5.5.6 Radio and Audio-Only Programming 
 
 The Department of Commerce Broadcast Service 
 has been distributing 3 1/2-minute features to radio 
 stations for several years. Radio spots can be 
 distributed at a lower cost than television spots, and 
 the sound track of a television spot can also be 
 distributed as a radio public service announcement. 
 Thirty-second announcements will probably receive 
 the most play, but a 60-second announcement is 
 acceptable. There are also applications for shorter 
 10 -to 20-second spots. 
 
 There are four basic formats available for 
 videotape: 1/2-inch and 1-inch reel-to-reel, 3/4- 
 inch cassette, and 2-inch reel-to-reel suitable for tele- 
 vision broadcast. The 3/4-inch format is the most 
 widely used, and recent advances have made it 
 possible for the 3/4-inch cassette to be broadcast 
 with acceptable quality. 
 
 5.5.7 Exhibit Programming 
 
 Many exhibits produced by Government agencies 
 use audiovisuals to help convey a theme or 
 message. Nearly any audiovisual format can be used 
 in an exhibit with the right equipment. Films or tele- 
 vision spots can be transferred to Super 8 film 
 
 sections 5.5-5.5.7 
 
5-9 
 
 cartridge or run automatically on a start-stop or 
 continuous basis. This method is available also for 
 videotape, slide-audio, and audio-only programs. 
 Cartridge tapes can run continuously, or be 
 operated by a remote start button and automatically 
 stopped at the end of the program. 
 
 5.5.8 Distribution of Audiovisual Programs 
 
 Distribution of NBS audiovisual programs is 
 either through free loans or sales. Free loans are 
 handled by Modern Talking Picture Service, a com- 
 mercial distribution firm with regional branches 
 throughout the United States. The company 
 publishes catalogs on a regular basis and in addition 
 will promote specific films through specialized 
 flyers and order forms. Modern provides the 
 Bureau with monthly Distribution Reports which 
 give statistical data on such things as the number of 
 shipments, number of showings, and audience totals 
 for a particular film. 
 
 Sales of NBS films are handled by the National 
 Audiovisual Center, a federal agency that promotes 
 government audiovisual programs with regularly 
 issued catalogs. 
 
 5.6 Historical Information 
 
 The historical information program responds to 
 inquiries of a historical nature about the Bureau, its 
 past programs and achievements, and its distin- 
 guished staff. All such internal and external 
 inquiries should be referred to the historical infor- 
 mation specialist, PID, who will either assist the 
 staff member in responding, or handle the request. 
 The historical information specialist can help locate 
 historic documents, museum holdings, photographs, 
 slides, and biographical information on past and 
 present distinguished personnel of the Bureau. 
 
 5.6.1 Museum 
 
 NBS maintains a museum designed to preserve 
 and display apparatus and other memorabilia 
 illustrative of the past scientific work of NBS. It 
 provides information for visitors, inspiration for 
 present and future staff members, and an historical 
 resource on the evolution of the science of physical 
 measurements. 
 
 Displays of the past achievements of NBS are 
 contained in the Museum itself and in the lobby 
 area adjacent to the Museum and the Library. In 
 this lobby temporary exhibits feature items from the 
 Museum and the Library collections. 
 
 The historical information specialist, as museum 
 curator, is responsible for the preservation of all 
 scientific artifacts and related information 
 transferred to the museum custody. Artifacts on 
 display as of November 1977 are listed in the NBS 
 museum catalog, which is available in the Museum, 
 in the Library, and in center and division offices. 
 
 5.6.2 Contribution of Artifacts 
 
 Members of the scientific and technical staff are 
 urged to contact the curator to insure the 
 preservation of artifacts in their custody that may 
 have played a significant role in Bureau achieve- 
 ments. These historical artifacts, the completed 
 museum information sheets, and related photographs 
 and documents constitute an archives for future 
 historical inquiries and exhibits. 
 
 5.7 Community Outreach 
 
 This program encourages NBS scientific and tech- 
 nical staff members to make hour-long presentations 
 to public school students in the 4th through the 
 12th grades. The purpose of the program is to 
 expose a great many young people to science and 
 technology, and to stimulate more minorities and 
 women to consider science-related careers. 
 
 This program is coordinated by the Public Infor- 
 mation Division, Gaithersburg, and by the Program 
 Information Office, Boulder. 
 
 The Science and Technology Enrichment 
 Program (STEP), a cooperative venture with the 
 Montgomery County (Maryland) Public Schools, 
 and NBS, Gaithersburg, enhances the learning 
 experiences of students who are academically 
 gifted, talented and interested in the sciences. The 
 Career Awareness and Resource Education 
 (CARE) Program is designed to stimulate 
 awareness of careers in math and science, 
 particularly among females, minorities and 
 handicapped students in several Colorado school 
 districts, including Denver, Boulder, and Adams 
 County. 
 
 In addition, the Community Outreach Program in 
 Gaithersburg plans career awareness days for 
 eighth and ninth grade students, and both programs 
 respond to requests for speakers and resources that 
 come from additional educational institutions. 
 
 NBS staff members who are interested in 
 participating in either the STEP or CARE 
 activities, or who receive requests from a school or 
 school system should contact PID in Gaithersburg, 
 or PIO in Boulder for information and/or coordina- 
 tion of efforts. 
 
 sections 5.5.8-5.7 
 
5-10 
 
 Exhibit 5-A. Conference Financing 
 
 1. Purpose 
 
 This section states the pohcies and procedures to 
 be followed in the conduct of Bureau-sponsored, 
 fee-supported conferences. 
 
 2. Deflnition 
 
 For the purpose of this section, the term 
 "Bureau-sponsored, fee-supported conference" 
 includes any form of meeting, seminar, symposium, 
 or training session, sponsored, cosponsored, or 
 hosted by NBS where a registration (or participa- 
 tion) fee is established. The finances may be 
 handled through the NBS accounting system, or by 
 a cosponsor, the conference, or an NBS employee. 
 
 3. Approval Authorities 
 
 a. The following are authorized to approve 
 Bureau-sponsored conferences when costs are to be 
 paid through the Bureau accounting system: 
 
 • Director 
 
 • Deputy Director 
 
 • Director, NBS Boulder Laboratories 
 
 This authority may not be redelegated. 
 
 b. The following are authorized to approve 
 Bureau-sponsored, fee-supported conferences when 
 costs are not paid through the Bureau accounting 
 system: 
 
 • MOU Director 
 
 • Director, NBS Boulder Laboratories 
 
 c. Separate approval is required for each confer- 
 ence even though it may be a continuation or 
 periodic reconvening of a previously approved con- 
 ference. 
 
 4. Use of Fees 
 
 Registration fees are used to offset partially or 
 wholly the cost to the Bureau of providing a special 
 service to a select group, i.e., the conference 
 participants. In the case of nonrecurring confer- 
 ences, any balance left after obligations are 
 liquidated will be deposited in the Gift and 
 Honorarium Fund. 
 
 5. Allowable Expenses 
 
 a. Costs of the following items should be included 
 in calculating the income required from fees and 
 contributions: printing and duplicating, including 
 printing of proceedings; travel and local 
 transportation; communications; rental of equip- 
 ment and fixtures; rental of non-NBS conference 
 
 rooms; other costs usually associated with con- 
 ferences. When costs are handled through the 
 Bureau accounting system, the time of Bureau 
 employees and related overhead should be charged 
 to the conference cost center, and temporary help 
 such as typists and registrars may be appointed 
 through regular personnel channels (they may not 
 be hired on purchase orders). 
 
 b. Serving refreshments during conference breaks, 
 holding luncheon meetings, receptions, and 
 banquets, or arranging special events for the 
 spouses of participants are frequently conducive to 
 the success of a conference. If such functions are 
 considered necessary to accomplish the objectives 
 of the conference, it is necessary to include the 
 incremental costs of the functions in the registration 
 fee. Permission to charge the costs of these 
 ancillary functions against conference income must 
 be included in the request for approval of the con- 
 ference whether or not the costs are paid through 
 the Bureau accounting system. The only other 
 methods of paying for these functions are through 
 use, after advance clearance, of gifts and bequests 
 funds (see Administrative Manual, Subchapter 8.03, 
 Official Entertainment), or by having registrants 
 pay out-of-pocket. Appropriated funds may not be 
 used to pay these costs. 
 
 c. The cost of alcoholic beverages may not be 
 included in registration fees when the costs are paid 
 through the Bureau accounting system. 
 
 6. Recovery of Costs Paid Through Bureau 
 Accounting System 
 
 Each division will be expected to fully recover 
 all costs charged against cost centers established for 
 conferences. To the extent that fees fall short of 
 actual costs incurred, the division is expected to 
 arrange with the Office of the Comptroller to have 
 the cost deficit transferred to other projects in the 
 division that benefited from the conference. 
 
 7. Financial Advice and Assistance 
 
 For advice and assistance concerning financial 
 arrangements, contact the Budget Office. (In 
 Boulder, contact the Fiscal Office.) 
 
 8. Procedures, Costs Handled Through the Bureau 
 Accounting System 
 
 a. Divisions planning to hold Bureau-sponsored, 
 fee-supported conferences where costs will be paid 
 through the Bureau accounting system should 
 submit a memorandum (original and four copies) to 
 the appropriate official listed in 3a through their 
 MOU director. The request should give the 
 following pertinent information concerning the con- 
 ference: starting and closing dates, location of the 
 
 Exhibit 5-A 
 
5-11 
 
 various functions, number of participants and the 
 types of organizations the participants will 
 generally represent, the proposed fees to be 
 charged, and whether refreshments as described in 
 5b are included in the fee. The cost of alcoholic 
 beverages may not be included in the registration 
 fee. A separate cost center in the 580-584 series 
 must be established to collect fees and costs 
 associated with each conference. 
 
 b. The official who approves the conference will 
 return the original signed copy to the initiating 
 division through the MOU director, forward one 
 copy to PID, and one copy to the Budget Office. 
 (In Boulder, the Director, NBS Boulder 
 Laboratories will return the original signed copies 
 to the initiating division and forward one copy each 
 to PIO and the Fiscal Office.) 
 
 c. The Budget Office or Fiscal Officer, Boulder, 
 will authorize establishment of the cost center and 
 furnish the Office of the Comptroller with copies of 
 the approved request. 
 
 d. If publication of proceedings by NBS is 
 proposed, the publishing cost must be completely 
 covered either by including this cost as part of the 
 attendance fee, from MOU funds, from cosponsor 
 contributions, or a combination of these sources. 
 
 9. Procedures, Costs Not Handled Through the 
 Bureau Accounting System 
 
 a. Background 
 
 1. Conference funds may be managed by 
 Bureau employees as part of their official duties 
 only when the Bureau sponsors, cosponsors, or 
 hosts the conference. Employees are not required 
 to be responsible for conference funds, but may 
 elect to handle such funds. 
 
 2. The Bureau's role must have the approval of 
 the MOU director (in Boulder, the Director, 
 NBS Boulder Laboratories). 
 
 3. If publication of proceedings by NBS is 
 proposed, the publishing cost must be completely 
 covered either by including this cost as part of 
 the attendance fee, from MOU funds, from 
 cosponsor contributions, or a combination of 
 these sources. 
 
 4. Expenditures of nonappropriated funds 
 should not benefit small groups or individuals. 
 Particular discretion should be exercised in 
 making payments or extending benefits to Bureau 
 or Government employees for work in 
 connection with a conference. Out-of-pocket 
 expenses may be reimbursed; however, the 
 accountable officer should seek the advice of the 
 Comptroller on items which might be regarded 
 as questionable, keeping in mind problems of 
 conflict of interest and dual compensation. 
 
 b. Responsibilities' 
 
 1. An accountable officer, designated by the 
 NBS conference sponsor or cosponsor, is 
 reponsible for all receipts, commitments, and 
 payment authorizations, and for preparing a final 
 financial statement for review and possible audit. 
 This person usually works with the conference 
 chairperson or an executive committee to 
 develop a budget and establish fees. An MOU 
 may designate a single accountable officer to 
 handle all its major conferences. 
 
 2. The accountable officer should keep records 
 showing sources and expenditures of funds. The 
 Comptroller may be contacted for advice on 
 establishing such controls. Within 30 days of the 
 completion of a conference or receipt of final 
 bills, a financial statement and a copy of the final 
 bank statement should be sent to the Comptroller 
 (in Boulder, through the Fiscal Officer). 
 
 3. The Comptroller determines whether an 
 audit will be made of the final financial statement 
 prepared by the accountable officer. 
 
 c. Accounting for Funds 
 
 1. Commercial bank accounts must be 
 established to receive fees and other contributions 
 and to pay expenses of Bureau-sponsored or 
 cosponsored conferences. For recurring confer- 
 ences sponsored by the Bureau, continuing bank 
 accounts may be maintained, and balances carried 
 forward from one conference may be applied to 
 the "start-up" costs of the next meeting 
 (announcements, postage, etc.). For nonrecurring 
 conferences, the bank account and any cash 
 subaccounts are closed with the final statement. 
 After all outstanding obligations for nonrecurring 
 conferences have been liquidated, including publi- 
 cation of proceedings, balance remaining in the 
 account will be deposited in the Gift and 
 Honorarium Fund. 
 
 2. Payments may be approved by individual 
 transaction, or through a budget approved by the 
 conference chairperson and/or the MOU 
 director. Individual payments can be approved 
 by the accountable officer and one person 
 connected with the function (generally the confer- 
 ence chairperson), with both signatures appearing 
 on the documents substantiating payment. If 
 there is an approved budget, the accountable 
 officer may authorize and make payments 
 without a second signature. 
 
 3. Records showing sources of funds and 
 purpose of payments are maintained. Paid 
 invoices, memorandums, and other documents 
 supporting payments are retained and referenced 
 to items appearing in the final financing 
 statement. 
 
 ' If a cosponsor manages finances, these responsibilities do not 
 apply. An NBS employee may not manage conference finances 
 in the name of a cosponsor. 
 
 Exhibit 5-A (cont.) 
 
5-12 
 
 Exhibit 5-B. Copyright Release for Non-Go vemment Authors, Fonn NBS-1 158 
 
 ***' <»'c« 
 
 NBS-1158 
 (6-78) 
 
 
 •'■Who*' 
 
 UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 
 Washington, D.C. S0S34 
 
 PUBLIC DOMAIN STATUS OF PAPERS PUBLISHED 
 By the National Bureau of Standards 
 
 Because the new U.S. Copyright Law, effective January 1, 1978, recognizes copyright 
 in a manuscript at the time of preparation, it is in^ortant to estaiblish a clear 
 understanding of the conditions under which papers from non-Government authors may be 
 accepted for publication by the National Bureau of Standards. The official NBS 
 periodical and non-periodical series are supported in whole or in part by public funds 
 and are printed by the U.S. Government Printing Office as "in-the-public-domain" 
 pviblications. By law, official papers of NBS authors are not subject to copyright in 
 the United States; and, thus, we impose no restrictions on their reproduction or use 
 by the scientific and technical community or by abstract, microfilm, and other distri- 
 bution services . 
 
 In order that "invited" papers by non-Government authors be subject to the Scune 
 public policy considerations, we are asking authors whose papers will appear as part 
 of the proceedings of conferences sponsored or cosponsored by NBS to dedicate their 
 contribution to the public. Under this procedure, the public will be free to use the 
 paper without restriction, thus following a practice found to promote the widest 
 possible dissemination of scientific and technical literature. Your agreement to 
 dedication in no way restricts your subsequent use of your paper. It is understood, 
 therefore, that your signature below will signify your consent to the release of any 
 copyright you may have in your contribution to these proceedings. To this end, 
 please conplete the following: 
 
 TITLE OF PAPER 
 
 
 
 AUTHOR (S) 
 
 MEETING/CONFERENCE DATE 
 
 SIGNATURE 
 
 DATE 
 
 i 
 
 RETURN TO: 
 
 Building, Room_ 
 
 National Bureau of Standards 
 Washington, D.C. 20234 
 
 Exhibit 5-B 
 
5-13 
 
 Exhibit 5-C. Checklist for Proceedings Editor 
 
 1. Has copyright release been received from non-Government authors by use of Form NBS-1158 
 which appears in exhibit 5-B? 
 
 2. Do all papers conform with NBS editorial policy and format? 
 
 3. Are pages of uniform length? 
 
 4. Are photographs clear and informative? (Original black-ink drawings or black-and-white glossies 
 are preferred.) 
 
 5. Is lettering on illustrations large enough so that when reduced it will still be readable? 
 
 6. Is computer-generated type printed on the unruled side of the paper, with clear and precise 
 impressions? 
 
 7. Have the individual papers authored by NBS personnel cleared the Editorial Review Board, 
 complete with Forms NBS-1 14 and NBS-1 14A? 
 
 8. Do the entire proceedings have an overall abstract and key words? 
 
 9. Have the entire proceedings cleared the Editorial Review Board? Usually the proceedings editor 
 need submit only the front material, provided step 2 has been carried out by the symposium committee or 
 the proceedings editor. 
 
 10. Is a purchase requisition (Form NBS- 10 A) provided or a conference account check supplied to 
 absorb the publishing costs? 
 
 Exhibit 3-C 
 
5-14 
 
 Bibliography 5-A. Aids to Oral Presentations 
 
 Mambert, W. A., Effective presentation: A short course for professionals. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 
 1976, 316 p.i 
 A helpful series of self-study units in planning and delivering oral presentations. 
 
 Manko, H. H., Effective technical speeches and sessions: A guide for speakers and program chairmen. New 
 York: McGraw-Hill, 1969, 174 p. 
 
 Lively, well-written resource with much practical advice, such as how to prepare an auditorium for a 
 meeting and the relative advantages of different types of visual aids. This book covers the three major 
 aspects required for a successful technical meeting: preparation of lively speeches, organization of a 
 successful technical meeting, and parliamentary procedures to keep any meeting orderly. 
 
 ' NBS library has a copy. 
 
 Bibliography 5-A 
 
Index 
 
 A-l 
 
 Abbreviations, for scientific and engineering terms 
 
 Abstract 
 
 typing of 
 
 Acknowledgments 
 
 typing of 
 
 Advertising, use of NBS name 
 
 American Chemical Society 
 
 American Institute of Physics, style manual of 
 
 Annual reports 
 
 Appendix 
 
 typing of 
 
 Applied Mathematics Series 
 
 Artifacts, contribution to museum 
 
 Artwork (see figures, graphs, line drawings) 
 
 Audiovisual productions 
 
 justification of. 
 
 Authors 
 
 associates and guests 
 
 changes of 
 
 multiple 
 
 non-Government 
 
 staff members 
 
 staff members on training 
 
 typing names of 
 
 Authors and reviewers, checklist for 
 
 Automatically recorded tracings 
 
 Awards, writing 
 
 Bibliographic data sheet 
 
 Bibliography (see references) 
 
 Biographies, of distinguished staff 
 
 Booklets 
 
 Book chapters 
 
 Books (non-NBS) 
 
 Booth (see exhibits) 
 
 Boulder Editorial Review Board (BERB) (see also Editorial Review Boards). 
 
 Brochures 
 
 Building Science Series 
 
 Byline (see also authors) 
 
 Exh. 2-F, Bibliog. 2-B 
 
 2.10, 2.17 
 
 4.2, 4.4.7, Exh. 4.B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 2.19 
 
 4.4.10, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 1.4.9 
 
 2.2.2, Bibliog. 2-D 
 
 2.2.2, Bibliog. 2-D 
 
 2.26 
 
 2.18.1,2.22 
 
 4.4.12 
 
 3.2 
 
 5.6.2 
 
 1.3.10,5.2.5,5.5 
 
 5.5.1 
 
 2.9.1, 2.9.2 
 
 2.9.2 
 
 1.3.11 
 
 1.3.4,2.9.1 
 
 5.1.7, Exh. 5-B 
 
 2.9.1 
 
 2.9.2 
 
 4.4.6, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Exh. 2-A 
 
 2.18.5 
 
 1.3.12,2.3 
 
 2.10, 2.11, Exh. 3-A, Exh. 4-G 
 
 5.6 
 2.26 
 
 1.4.2, 1.4.6 
 1.4.7 
 
 1.1, Exh. 1-A, Exh. 1-D 
 
 2.26 
 
 3.2 
 
 2.9 
 
 Camera-ready copy (see typewritten camera-ready copy) 
 Clearance procedures (see editorial review and approval) 
 Colloquia (see conferences) 
 
 Color publications 3.9 
 
 Composition, methods of (see also typesetting, printing and duplication 
 
 unit, typewritten camera-ready publications) 3.2, 3.6 
 
 Computer printouts 2.18.5 
 
 Condon Award 1.3.12, 2.3 
 
 Conference facilities and equipment 5.1.3 
 
 A-? vdqLi^JildieK 
 
A-2 
 
 Conferences 
 
 allowable expenses 
 
 approval of 
 
 financing of 
 
 management services 
 
 National Measurement Laboratory 
 
 NBS participation in 
 
 PID responsibilities 
 
 PIO responsibilities 
 
 planning for 
 
 registration fees 
 
 technical organizations' responsibilities 
 
 types of 
 
 Conference proceedings 
 
 approval of , 
 
 foreign 
 
 paper in 
 
 publication of. 
 
 non-Government authors 
 
 Consumer Information Series 
 
 Copyright 
 
 book chapters 
 
 books or volumes 
 
 copyrighted material, use of. 
 
 grant or contract reports 
 
 NBS papers in copyrighted publications 
 
 non-Government authors 
 
 nonofficial writing 
 
 Costs of publication (see publication costs) 
 
 Covers for NBS publications 
 
 Data files (NBS magnetic tapes) 
 
 Data, treatment of 
 
 DIMENSIONS/NBS 
 
 advisory board 
 
 staff reports 
 
 writing guidelines 
 
 Discussion section, of a paper 
 
 Display (see exhibits) 
 
 Domestic publications (see publications, U.S.) 
 
 Drafts, writing 
 
 Drawings (see figures, graphs, line drawings) 
 
 Dummy 
 
 Duplicate publication 
 
 Editorial review and approval (see also review and approval) . 
 
 appeal mechanism 
 
 audiovisual programs 
 
 authors' responsibilities 
 
 Boulder process 
 
 center and division responsibilities 
 
 ERB processing time 
 
 Gaithersburg process 
 
 GPO electronic typesetting 
 
 grant/contract reports 
 
 in-house electronic typesetting 
 
 legal review 
 
 letter circulars 
 
 letters to editors 
 
 lists of publications 
 
 MOU responsibilities 
 
 multiple authors 
 
 5.1 
 
 Exh. 5-A 
 5.1.3, Exh. 5-A 
 
 5.1.6, Exh. 5-A 
 5.1.4 
 
 5.1.5 
 
 5.1.2 
 
 5.1.4 
 
 5.1.4 
 
 5.1, Exh. 5-C 
 
 Exh. 5-A 
 
 5.1.5 
 
 5.1.3 
 
 5.1.7 
 
 3.4 
 
 3.4 
 
 5.1.5, 5.1.7, Exh. 5-A, Exh. 5-C 
 
 5.1.7, Exh. 5-B 
 3.2 
 
 1.4.1 
 
 1.4.2, 1.4.6 
 1.4.7 
 1.4.4 
 1.4.3 
 
 1.4.2, 1.4.6 
 5.1.7, Exh. 
 1.4.5 
 
 4.5 
 
 5-B 
 
 3.2 
 
 
 
 2.15, 
 
 2.16, Exh. 
 
 2-E, 
 
 Bibliog. 2-C 
 
 
 3.2 
 
 
 
 Exh. 
 
 IB 
 
 
 2.23.1 
 
 
 
 2.23 
 
 
 
 2.16 
 
 
 
 2.2.4, 
 
 2.2.5 
 
 
 3.7.1, 
 
 3.7.2 
 
 
 3.4 
 
 
 
 1.2, 1.3, Exh. 1-E 
 
 1.2, 1.3.9 
 
 
 1.3.10, 5.5 
 
 
 1.3.3, 
 
 Exh. 2-A 
 
 
 1.3.2, 
 
 Exh. ID 
 
 
 1.3.4 
 
 
 
 1.3.6, 
 
 Exh. 1-C, 
 
 Exh. ID 
 
 1.3.2, 
 
 Exh. 1-C 
 
 
 3.7.2, 
 
 4.3 
 
 
 3.5 
 
 
 
 3.7.1 
 
 
 
 1.3.1, 
 
 1.4.12 
 
 
 1.6.2 
 
 
 
 1.3.10 
 
 
 1.6.3 
 
 
 
 1.3.5 
 
 
 
 1.3.4, 
 
 2.9.1 
 
 
 Index (cent.) 
 
A-3 
 
 notice of ERB approval 
 
 oral presentations 
 
 policy review 
 
 readers 
 
 reports to sponsors 
 
 sponsor responsibilities (of ERB members) 
 
 stages of review 
 
 technical review 
 
 types of review 
 
 Editorial Review Boards (see also Boulder Editorial Review Board, Washington 
 Editorial Review Board, JILA Editorial Review Board) 
 
 chairperson's responsibilities 
 
 membership and responsibilities 
 
 Electronic typesetting, using in-house capability 
 
 copy preparation 
 
 Electron micrographs 
 
 Equations 
 
 typing of 
 
 Exhibits 
 
 audiovisuals in 
 
 developing 
 
 existing 
 
 refurbishing 
 
 Federal Information Processing Standards Publications 
 
 Figures 
 
 in two-column, typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 in single-column, typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 typing of 
 
 Films (see motion pictures) 
 
 Flyers 
 
 Footnotes 
 
 typing of 
 
 Foreign publications (see publications, foreign) 
 
 Foreword 
 
 typing of 
 
 Forms 
 
 BL-7A (NBS Boulder Editorial Review Board) 
 
 NBS-lOA (Purchase Request) 
 
 NBS-50 (Public Information Division Clearance) 
 
 NBS-114 (Manuscript Review and Approval Form 
 
 NBS-114A (Bibliographic Data Sheet) 
 
 NBS-1 18 (Notice of Talk) 
 
 NBS-214 (Manuscript Evaluation) 
 
 NBS-265 (Publications Follow-Up Record) 
 
 NBS-266 (Notice of Publication in Non-NBS Journal) 
 
 Freedom of Information Act 
 
 Front matter 
 
 typing of 
 
 Gender terminology 
 
 General publications 
 
 Government Printing Office 
 
 proofreading symbols 
 
 style manual 
 
 Grant/contract reports 
 
 copyright 
 
 format for 
 
 1.3.9 
 
 1.3.10, Exh. l-E(h) 
 
 1.3.1 
 
 1.3.4, 1.3.7 
 
 1.5.1, 1.4.12 
 
 1.3.8 
 
 1.3.2 
 
 1.3.1 
 
 1.3.1 
 
 1.1, Exh. 1-A 
 1.2 
 
 1.3.6, Exh. 1-A 
 
 3.6,3.7.1 
 
 4.1 
 
 2.18.3 
 
 4.2, 4.4.14, Exh. 4-A, 
 Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 5.3 
 
 5.5.7 
 5.3.1 
 5.3.2 
 5.3.1 
 
 3.2 
 
 2.15, 
 
 2.16, 4.4.16, Exh. 4-A 
 
 Exh. 
 
 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4.2 
 
 Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.2.2 
 
 Exh. 4-B 
 
 4.2,4.4.16 
 
 2.26 
 
 
 2.21, 
 
 4.4.13 
 
 4.2, 4.4.13, Exh. 4-A, 
 
 Exh. 
 
 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.5 
 
 
 4.4.4 
 
 
 Exh. 
 
 l-E(d) 
 
 1.4.10 
 
 Exh. 
 
 l-E(g) 
 
 1.3.2, 
 
 1.3.4, 1.3.7, 
 
 2.10, 
 
 Exh. l-E(a) 
 
 1.3.3, 
 
 1.3.11,2.10,2.11, 
 
 Exh. 
 
 l-E(b), Exh. 3-A, Exh. 4-G 
 
 1.3.10, 5.2.1, Exh. l-E(h) 
 
 1.3.7, 
 
 Exh. l-E(c) 
 
 1.3.4, 
 
 Exh. l-E(e) 
 
 1.3.4, 
 
 1.3.6, 1.3.11, 
 
 Exh. 
 
 1-E(0 
 
 1.4.11, 1.5.4 
 
 4.5 
 
 
 4.4.4 
 
 
 2.7 
 
 
 2.26 
 
 
 Exh. 
 
 2-C 
 
 2.2.2, 
 
 Bibliog. 2-D 
 
 3.2, 3.5 
 
 1.4.3, 
 
 3.5 
 
 3.5, Exh. 3-A 
 
 
 Index (cont.)bn! 
 
A-4 
 
 number of 3.5 
 
 review of. 3.5 
 
 Graphs 2.18.2 
 
 Handbook 3.2 
 
 Headings 4.4.9, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Historical information 5.6 
 
 Honorariums for writing 1.4.6, 1.4.8 
 
 Illustrative materials (see also figures, graphs, line drawings, 
 
 photographs, tables) 2.18 
 
 Incentive awards for outstanding written exposition 1.3.12, 2.3 
 
 Indexing (see also key words) 2.11, Exh. 4-A, Exh. 4-B, 
 
 Exh. 4-C 
 
 Inquiries of the Bureau 1.6, 5.6, Exh. 1-F 
 
 letter circulars 1.6.2 
 
 lists of publications 1.6.3 
 
 staff responsibilities 1.6.1 
 
 Interagency/Internal reports (see NBS Interagency/Internal Reports) 
 
 International System of Units 2.4.1, Exh. 2-A, Exh. 2-D 
 
 Introduction 2.13 
 
 JILA Editorial Review Board (see also Editorial Review Boards) 1.1, Exh. 1-A 
 
 Joint Committee on Printing 1.4.11, 3.10 
 
 Journal of Physical and Chemical Reference Data 3.2, 4.3 
 
 Journal of Research 3.2, 3.4 
 
 board of editors Exh. 1-B 
 
 Key words 2.11 
 
 typing of 4.2, 4.4.8, Exh. 4-A, 
 
 Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Lectures (see oral presentations) 
 
 Legal considerations 
 
 Legal review 
 
 reports to sponsors 
 
 Letter circulars 
 
 Letters to editors 
 
 Limited distribution publications. 
 
 Line drawings 
 
 Lists of publications 
 
 Magazines 
 
 Magnetic tapes, NBS 
 
 Manuscript 
 
 author responsibilities 
 
 mechanics of preparation 
 
 withdrawal of 
 
 writing 
 
 Materials section 
 
 Media liaison 
 
 Meeting (see conferences) 
 
 Methods section 
 
 Metric system 
 
 Monographs 
 
 Monthly Highlights 
 
 Motion pictures 
 
 Museum 
 
 contribution to 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.3.1 
 
 1.4.12, 1.5.1 
 
 1.6.2 
 
 1.3.10 
 
 1.5.3(2), 1.5.4 
 
 2.18.4 
 
 1.6.3 
 
 2.26 
 3.2 
 
 1.3.3, Exh. 2-A, 3.4 
 
 Ch. 4 
 
 1.3.11,3.4 
 
 Ch. 2 
 
 2.14 
 
 1.7 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.4.1, Exh. 2-D 
 
 3.2 
 
 2.25 
 
 5.5, 5.5.2 
 
 5.6.1 
 
 5.6.2 
 
 ihdeJc (cotit.) 
 
A-5 
 
 National Standard Reference Data Series 
 
 National Technical Information Service 
 
 NBS communications system overview 
 
 responsibilities of: 
 
 MOU heads 
 
 scientific and technical staff 
 
 NBS Interagency /Internal Reports (NBSIR) 
 
 NBS magnetic tapes 
 
 NBS-sponsor communications (see also NBS Interagency/Intemal Reports and 
 
 reports to sponsors) 
 
 NBS Standard 
 
 Newsletters 
 
 News releases (see media liaison) 
 
 Nomenclature, standards for 
 
 Nonofficial writing 
 
 Official writing, definition of 
 
 Oral presentations 
 
 delivery of 
 
 guidelines 
 
 organization 
 
 publication of abstracts 
 
 publication of transcripts 
 
 reading speeches 
 
 rehearsal 
 
 review and approval 
 
 visual aids 
 
 Organization of paper (see writing effectively) 
 
 3.2 
 
 1.3.3, 1.5.3,2.18.1,3.2,3.5 
 
 1.1, 1.2 
 
 1.2 
 
 1.2 
 
 1.5,3.2,4.5.1, 
 
 Exh. 4-F, Exh. 4-G 
 
 3.2 
 
 1.5.3(3) 
 
 2.24 
 
 2.26 
 
 Bibliog. 2-B 
 1.4.5 
 
 1.2, 1.4.1, 1.4.8 
 
 1.3.10,5.2 
 
 5.2.6 
 
 5.2.2, Bibliog. 5-B 
 
 5.2.5 
 
 5.2.1 
 
 5.2.1 
 
 5.2.3 
 
 5.2.4 
 
 5.2.1, Exh. l-E(h) 
 
 5.2.5 
 
 Page charges 
 
 Page numbers 
 
 Page requirements 
 
 Payment for writing 
 
 Periodicals, advisory boards 
 
 Periodicals, NBS 
 
 Photocomposition (see typesetting, electronic) 
 
 Photographs 
 
 Photomicrographs 
 
 Phototypesetting (see typesetting, electronic) 
 Policy review (see editorial review and approval) 
 
 Preface 
 
 Printing and Duplicating Unit 
 
 Printing, method of (see also typesetting and typewritten camera-ready 
 
 publications) 
 
 Proceedings, publication of (see conference proceedings) 
 
 Program Information Office (PIO) 
 
 Progress reports to sponsors 
 
 Proofreading 
 
 symbols 
 
 typeset copy 
 
 typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 Proofs 
 
 galley 
 
 page 
 
 Publication, change in place of. 
 
 Publication costs 
 
 Publication, duplicate 
 
 Publication process 
 
 Boulder 
 
 Gaithersburg 
 
 1.4.10 
 4.4.17 
 4.2,4.4.1 
 1.4.6, 1.4.8 
 Exh. IB 
 3.2 
 
 2.18.3 
 2.18.3 
 
 4.4.4 
 
 1.5.3(2), 3.5, Exh. 1-C, 
 
 Exh. 3-A, Exh. 4-F 
 
 3.2, 3.6 
 
 1.1 
 1.5 
 
 Exh. 2-C 
 
 2.2.6, 3.7 
 2.2.6, 4.4 
 
 3.7 
 
 3.7 
 
 1.3.11 
 
 3.9 
 
 3.4 
 
 3.2, Exh. 1-D 
 3.2, Exh. 1-C 
 
 Index (cont,) 
 
A-6 
 
 Publications 
 
 color 3.9 
 
 foreign Exh. l-E(a), 3.2 
 
 NBS 3.2 
 
 non-NBS 3.1, 3.2 
 
 selection of. 3.1 
 
 Soviet-bloc 3.2 
 
 U.S 3.2 
 
 Public Information Division (PID) 1.1 
 
 Publishing, methods (see typesetting and typewritten camera-ready copy) 
 
 Radio announcements 5.5.6 
 
 Readers (see editorial review and approval, readers) 
 
 Recordkeeping 1.3.4, 1.3.11, 1.4.10 
 
 Recruiting material 2.26 
 
 Reduction paper 4.4.1 
 
 References 2.20,4.2, 4.4.11, Exh. 4-E 
 
 Reports, sponsored by NBS (see grant/contract reports) 
 Reports to sponsors (see also NBS-sponsor communications) 
 
 legal review 1.5.1 
 
 letters and memorandums 1.5.4 
 
 NBS publications 1.5.4 
 
 NBS Interagency/Internal Reports (NBSIR) 1.5.4, 4.5.1 
 
 negotiations with sponsors 1.5.2 
 
 progress reports 1.5.5 
 
 quality control 1.5.1 
 
 restrictive notices 1.5.5 
 
 review of. 1.5.1 
 
 sensitive matters 1.5.3, 1.5.5, 1.4.12 
 
 superseding notice 1.5.5 
 
 trade names 1.4.12 
 
 Reprints 1.4.10 
 
 Restrictive notices 1.5.5 
 
 Results section 2.15 
 
 Review and approval (see also editorial review and approval) 
 
 conferences 5.1.3 
 
 oral presentations 5.2.1 
 
 Reviewers (see editorial review and approval, readers) 
 
 Reviewer's checklist Exh. 2-A 
 
 Royalties 1.4.8 
 
 Scientific and engineering terms, symbols and abbreviations Exh. 2-F 
 
 Seminars (see conferences) 
 
 Sensitive matters, reports to sponsors 1.5.3, 1.5.5, 1.4.12 
 
 Sexist language 2.7 
 
 Single-column copy 4.4.2, Exh. 4-B 
 
 SI Units 2.4.1, Exh. 2-D 
 
 Slide-audio productions 5.5.4 
 
 Slide file 5.5.4 
 
 Soviet-bloc publications 3.2 
 
 Spacing when typing 4.2, 4.4.3 
 
 Speakers, tour 5.4.2 
 
 Special publications 3.2 
 
 Speeches (see oral presentations) 
 
 Sponsor reports 1.5, 4.5.1, Exh. 4-F, Exh. 4-G 
 
 Staff members, biographies of 5.6 
 
 Standard, the (see NBS Standard) 
 
 Statistical variation in tables 2.18.1 
 
 Style manuals Bibliog. 2-D 
 
 Superintendent of Documents 1.5.3, 3.2 
 
 Superseding notice 1.5.4 
 
 Summary section 2.17 
 
 Index (cent.) 
 
A-7 
 
 Symbols 
 
 scientific and engineering terms. 
 
 standards for 
 
 Symposia (see conferences) 
 
 Exh. 2-F 
 Bibliog. 2-B 
 
 Table of contents 
 
 Tables 
 
 statistical variability in 
 
 typing of 
 
 Talks (see oral presentations) 
 
 Tapes, NBS magnetic 
 
 Technical Information and Publications Division (TIPD) 
 
 Technical Notes 
 
 Technical review (see editorial review and approval) 
 
 Television announcements 
 
 Title 
 
 change of 
 
 typing of 
 
 Title page 
 
 OCRs 
 
 NBSIRs 
 
 typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 typeset copy 
 
 Tours 
 
 Boulder 
 
 Gaithersburg 
 
 Trade names in NBS papers 
 
 approval to evaluate products 
 
 reports to sponsors 
 
 Training courses (see conferences) 
 
 Transcripts of oral presentations (see oral presentations) 
 
 Treatment of data 
 
 Turnaround time for publications (see publications, NBS and publications, non-NBS) 
 
 Two-column copy 
 
 Typeset copy, samples of 
 
 Typesetting 
 
 computer-assisted 
 
 electronic 
 
 GPO 
 
 hot-metal 
 
 in-house capability 
 
 title page 
 
 Typewriter requirements 
 
 Typewritten camera-ready copy 
 
 acknowledgments 
 
 equations 
 
 figures 
 
 headings 
 
 publications 
 
 samples of 
 
 single-column format 
 
 table of contents 
 
 tables 
 
 title page 
 
 two-column format 
 
 typing of 
 
 Typing manuscripts 
 
 Uncertainties of final results 
 
 Units, standards for 
 
 4.4.4, Exh. 
 2.15, 2.16, 
 2.18.1 
 4.2,4.4.15, 
 
 4-D 
 
 1.18.1 
 
 Exh. 
 
 1 
 4-B, 
 
 Exh. 
 
 4-C 
 
 3.2 
 1.1 
 3.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 5.5.3, 5.5.5 
 2.8 
 1.3.11 
 4.4.5, Exh. 
 Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.A, 
 
 Exh 
 
 .4-B, 
 
 
 3.5, Exh. 3- A 
 4.5.1, Exh. 4-F 
 4.4.4, 4.5, Exh. 
 4.5 
 
 3-A, 
 
 Exh. 
 
 4-F 
 
 5.4 
 5.4 
 
 1.4.11, 1.4.12,2.4.3 
 1.4.12 
 
 1.4.12, 1.5.3(2) 
 
 
 
 Exh. 2-E, Bibliog. 2-C 
 
 4.4.2, 4.4.16, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Exh. 3-B 
 
 3.7,4.1,4.2 
 
 3.7,4.1,4.2 
 
 3.7,4.1,4.2 
 
 3.7,4.1,4.2 
 
 3.7 
 
 3.7,4.1,4.2 
 
 4.5 
 
 4.4.1 
 
 4.4.10, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4.14, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4.16, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4.9, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 3.8, 4.4 
 
 Exh. 3-B, Exh. 4.B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Exh. 4-B 
 
 Exh. 4-D 
 
 Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4.4, 4.5, Exh. 3-A, Exh. 4-F 
 
 4.4.2, Exh. 4-C 
 
 4.4, Exh. 4-B, Exh. 4-C 
 
 Ch. 4 
 
 2.4.2, Exh. 2-E 
 
 Exh. 2-D, Exh. 2-F, Bibliog. 2-B 
 
 Index (cent.) 
 
A-8 
 
 Videotapes 5.5.3 
 
 Visitors (see tours) 
 
 Visual aids 5.2.5 
 
 Volumes (non-NBS) 1.4.7 
 
 Voluntary Product Standards 3.2 
 
 Washington Editorial Review Board (WERE) (see also Editorial Review Boards) 
 
 Writing awards 
 
 Writing effectively 
 
 aids 
 
 audience 
 
 checklist for authors and reviewers 
 
 clarity 
 
 crediting others 
 
 discussing work of others 
 
 first draft 
 
 organization 
 
 purpose, scope, and audience 
 
 readability 
 
 revision 
 
 sample scientific paper 
 
 speculation 
 
 stages of writing 
 
 style (see also style manuals) 
 
 uncertainties of final results 
 
 1.1, Exh. 1-A, Exh. 1-C 
 
 1.3.12,2.3 
 
 2.1 
 
 Bibliog. 2-A 
 
 2.2.1,2.13,2.17 
 
 Exh. 2-A 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.13,2.19 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.2.4 
 
 2.2.3, 2.12 
 
 2.2.1 
 
 2.5, 2.6 
 
 2.2.5 
 
 Exh. 2-B 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.2 
 
 2.2.2 
 
 2.4.2, Exh. 2-E 
 
 Index (cent.) 
 
Washington Editorial Review Board (WERB) 
 (Membership as of 26 September 1980) 
 
 Org. 
 
 Address 
 
 Phone 
 
 Edward L. Brady, Chairperson 
 Robert L. Parker, V.-Chairperson 
 Robert F. Blunt, Exec. Secy. 
 John J. Rochford, Ex-Officio Mbr. 
 W. Reeves Tilley, Mbr. Emeritus 
 
 NATIONAL MEASUREMENT LABORATORY 
 
 L Lynus Barnes 
 Samuel E. Chappell 
 John W. Cooper 
 R. Keith Kirby 
 Alvin Perloff 
 Charles M. Eisenhauer 
 Donald H. Tsai 
 
 NATIONAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY 
 
 Walter S. Liggett 
 Richard A. Forman 
 Dennis A. Swyt 
 Stephen T. Margulis 
 Robert S. Levine 
 Carl O. Muehlhause 
 
 INSTITUTE FOR COMPUTER SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY 
 
 Susan K. Reed 
 Robert Rosenthal 
 
 100 
 
 Admin. A505 
 
 3641 
 
 560 
 
 Matls. B164 
 
 2961 
 
 344 
 
 Admin. A617 
 
 2058 
 
 344 
 
 Admin. A600 
 
 2493 
 
 344 
 
 Admin. A530 
 
 2493 
 Expiration 
 
 Org. 
 
 Phone 
 
 of Appt.* 
 
 550 
 
 3674 
 
 1981 
 
 510 
 
 3307 
 
 1981 
 
 520 
 
 2001 
 
 1982 
 
 503 
 
 2082 
 
 1981 
 
 560 
 
 2900 
 
 1981 
 
 530 
 
 2685 
 
 1981 
 
 540 
 
 2831 
 
 1982 
 
 710 
 
 3651 
 
 1982 
 
 720 
 
 3625 
 
 1982 
 
 730 
 
 2159 
 
 1981 
 
 740 
 
 2102 
 
 1981 
 
 750 
 
 3845 
 
 1981 
 
 760 
 
 3751 
 
 r 
 
 1981 
 
 IJMULUlji 
 
 640 
 
 3861 
 
 1981 
 
 650 
 
 3516 
 
 1982 
 
 PUBLIC INFORMATION 
 
 Sharon A. Shaffer 
 
 346 
 
 3181 
 
 1981 
 
 ♦Members serve 2 years; may be reappointed. 
 
 •tbiii 
 
Boulder Editorial Review Board (BERB) 
 (Membership as of 1 October 1980) 
 
 Org. 
 
 Address 
 
 Gordon W. Day, Chairperson 
 Doris M. Schaffner, Secretary 
 Ralph F. Desch, Ex- Officio Mbr. 
 
 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS DIVISION 
 
 Raymond N. Jones 
 
 ELECTROMAGNETIC TECHNOLOGY DIVISION 
 
 Richard L. Kautz 
 
 THERMOPHYSICAL PROPERTIES DIVISION 
 
 Dwain E. Diller 
 Larry L. Sparks 
 
 TIME AND FREQUENCY DIVISION 
 
 James L. Jespersen 
 
 FRACTURE AND DEFORMATION DIVISION 
 
 Hassel M. Ledbetter 
 
 724 
 
 773 
 773 
 
 524 
 
 462 
 
 3391 
 
 3255 
 3612 
 
 3849 
 
 3443 
 
 ♦Members serve 2 years; may be reappointed. 
 
 JILA Editorial Review Board (JERB) 
 
 Quantum Physics Division, U. of Colorado 
 
 (Membership as of 1 September 1980) 
 
 Gordon H. Dunn, Chairperson 
 Lorraine Volsky, Ex-Officio Mbr. 
 Stephen J. Smith 
 Peter L. Bender 
 Jeffrey L. Linsky 
 
 ♦Members serve 2 years; may be reappointed. 
 
 NBS Journal of Research Board of Editors 
 (Membership as of 1 October 1980) 
 
 Phone 
 
 724 
 410 
 360 
 
 1-4616 
 1-5004 
 1-4001 
 
 5204 
 3239 
 3244 
 
 Org. 
 
 Phone 
 
 Expiration 
 of Appt.* 
 
 723 
 
 3609 
 
 1982 
 
 1981 
 
 1981 
 1982 
 
 1982 
 
 1982 
 
 
 
 Expiration 
 
 Org. 
 
 Phone 
 
 of Appt.* 
 
 525 
 
 3527 
 
 — 
 
 JILA 
 
 3423 
 
 — 
 
 525 
 
 3631 
 
 1981 
 
 525 
 
 3846 
 
 I98i 
 
 525 
 
 3481 
 
 1982 
 
 Churchill Eisenhart (Mathematics) Executive Editor 
 
 John W. Cooper (Physics) 
 
 Vacant (Chemistry) 
 
 Andrew J. Powell (Engineering) 
 
 Joseph O. Harrison (Computer Science) 
 
 Howard J.M. Hanley (Boulder Labs) 
 
 Phone 
 
 2566 
 2001 
 
 3748 
 3551 
 3320 (Bldr.) 
 
 a U. S. CMDVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1981 340-997/346 
 
NBS TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS 
 
 PERIODICALS 
 
 JOURNAL OF RESEARCH— The Journal of Research of the 
 National Bureau of Standards reports NBS research and develop- 
 ment in those disciplines of the physical and engineering sciences in 
 which the Bureau is active. These include physics, chemistry, 
 engineering, mathematics, and computer sciences. Papers cover a 
 broad range of subjects, with major emphasis on measurement 
 methodology and the basic technology underlying standardization. 
 Also included from time to time are survey articles on topics 
 closely related to the Bureau's technical and scientific programs. 
 As a special service to subscribers each issue contains complete 
 citations to all recent Bureau publications in both NBS and non- 
 NBS media. Issued six times a year. Annual subscription; domestic 
 $13; foreign $16.25. Single copy, $3 domestic; $3.75 foreign. 
 
 NOTE; The Journal was formerly published in two sections; Sec- 
 tion A "Physics and Chemistry" and Section B "Mathematical 
 Sciences." 
 
 DIMENSIONS/NBS— This monthly magazine is published to in- 
 form scientists, engineers, business and industry leaders, teachers, 
 students, and consumers of the latest advances in science and 
 technology, with primary emphasis on work at NBS. The magazine 
 highlights and reviews such issues as energy research, fire protec- 
 tion, building technology, metric conversion, pollution abatement, 
 health and safety, and consumer product performance. In addi- 
 tion, it reports the results of Bureau programs in measurement 
 standards and techniques, properties of matter and materials, 
 engineering standards and services, instrumentation, and 
 automatic data processing. Annual subscription; domestic $11; 
 foreign $13.75. 
 
 NONPERIODICALS 
 
 Monographs — Major contributions to the technical literature on 
 various subjects related to the Bureau's scientific and technical ac- 
 tivities. 
 
 Handbooks — Recommended codes of engineering and industrial 
 practice (including safety codes) developed in cooperation with in- 
 terested industries, professional organizations, and regulatory 
 bodies. 
 
 Special Publications — Include proceedings of conferences spon- 
 sored by NBS, NBS annual reports, and other special publications 
 appropriate to this grouping such as wall charts, pocket cards, and 
 bibliographies. 
 
 Applied Mathematics Series — Mathematical tables, manuals, and 
 studies of special interest to physicists, engineers, chemists, 
 biologists, mathematicians, computer programmers, and others 
 engaged in scientific and technical work. 
 
 National Standard Reference Data Series — Provides quantitative 
 data on the physical and chemical properties of materials, com- 
 piled from the world's literature and critically evaluated. 
 Developed under a worldwide program coordinated by NBS under 
 the authority of the National Standard Data Act (Public Law 
 90-396). 
 
 NOTE; The principal publication outlet for the foregoing data is 
 the Journal of Physical and Chemical Reference Data (JPCRD) 
 published quarterly for NBS by the American Chemical Society 
 (ACS) and the American Institute of Physics (AIP). Subscriptions, 
 reprints, and supplements available from ACS, 1 155 Sixteenth St., 
 NW, Washington, DC 20056. 
 
 Building Science Series — Disseminates technical information 
 developed at the Bureau on building materials, components, 
 systems, and whole structures. The series presents research results, 
 test methods, and performance criteria related to the structural and 
 environmental functions and the durability and safety charac- 
 teristics of building elements and systems. 
 
 Technical Notes — Studies or reports which are complete in them- 
 selves but restrictive in their treatment of a subject. Analogous to 
 monographs but not so comprehensive in scope or definitive in 
 treatment of the subject area. Often serve as a vehicle for final 
 reports of work performed at NBS under the sponsorship of other 
 government agencies. 
 
 Voluntary Product Standards — Developed under procedures 
 published by the Department of Commerce in Part 10, Title 15, of 
 the Code of Federal Regulations. The standards establish 
 nationally recognized requirements for products, and provide all 
 concerned interests with a basis for common understanding of the 
 characteristics of the products. NBS administers this program as a 
 supplement to the activities of the private sector standardizing 
 organizations. 
 
 Consumer Information Series — Practical information, based on 
 NBS research and experience, covering areas of interest to the con- 
 sumer. Easily understandable language and illustrations provide 
 useful background knowledge for shopping in today's tech- 
 nological marketplace. 
 
 Order the above NBS publications from: Superintendent of Docu- 
 ments. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. 
 Order the following NBS publications — FIPS and NBSIR 's — from 
 the National Technical Information Services. Springfield, VA 22161 . 
 
 Federal Information Processing Standards Publications (FIPS 
 PUB) — Publications in this series collectively constitute the 
 Federal Information Processing Standards Register. The Register 
 serves as the official source of information in the Federal Govern- 
 ment regarding standards issued by NBS pursuant to the Federal 
 Property and Administrative Services Act of 1949 as amended. 
 Public Law 89-306 (79 Stat. 1127), and as implemented by Fv- 
 ecutive Order 11717(38 FR 12315, dated May 11, 1973) and Pano 
 of Title 15 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations). 
 
 NBS Interagency Reports (NBSIR) — A special series of interim or 
 final reports on work performed by NBS for outside sponsors 
 (both government and non-government). In general, initial dis- 
 tribution is handled by the sponsor; public distribution is by the 
 National Technical Information Services, Springfield, VA 22161, 
 in paper copy or microfiche form. 
 
"^l/ll^ll'JJf.iiNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARIES 
 
 iiii 
 
 A0000?0^0e3bS 
 
 i 
 
 (